Kip 3100 S M PDF

Service Manual
Version A.1
This service manual includes the basic information about the KIP 3100 Multi-Function Printer,
which is required during field service to properly maintain the products quality and reliability.
Chapter 1 Introduction
Overview
(Features, specifications, name of parts and
etc.)
Chapter 2 Installation
Installation requirements, method of

installation, connection with PC & printer
Chapter 3 Print / Scan Process
Explanation for the steps of the print and

scan process
Chapter 4 Electrical
Circuit diagrams, image process system,

electric parts location and etc.
Chapter 5 Mechanical
Parts replacement and mechanical

disassembly
Chapter 6 Maintenance
Field maintenance information
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
Problem resolution
Chapter 8 Service Mode and Utility Software
Service Mode settings, Diagnosis and etc.
Some of the information included in this manual may be changed by product upgrades. Such
information will be informed to you through Technical Bulletins or Engineering Change Orders.
Read this service manual and these TBs / ECOs to understand the KIP 3100 correctly.
All sections of the document are subject to change without notice.
Chapter 1
Introduction
1. 1
page
1- 2
Features
1. 2 Specifications
1. 2. 1 General
1. 2. 2 Printer part
1. 2. 3 Scanner part
1111-
3
3
4
5
1. 3 Specifications for Originals

1. 3. 1 Original - Standard
1. 3. 2 Special Documents
1. 3. 3 Do Not Scan Originals
1111-
6
6
6
6
1. 4 Appearance
1. 4. 1 Front view
1. 4. 2 Rear view
1- 7
1- 7
1- 8
1. 5
1- 9
Specifications for the Scan Original
1. 6 Specifications for the Printing Paper

1. 6. 1 Improper Printing Paper
1. 6. 2 Proper Care of Printing Paper
1. 6. 3 Treatment against environmental condition
1-1
1-12
1-12
1-13
1-14
K116sm1e1
1. 1
Features
The KIP 3100 is a single footprint Multi-Function Printer which can copy, scan and print.
Advanced drivers and comprehensive print utilities make the KIP 3100 an advanced, easy to use
system. Some of these features may be optional.
The scan and print speeds are up to 80mm/sec or up to 5 D size prints / minute (landscape).
KIP HDP technology generates no waste toner.
The combination of the KIP HDP Plus imaging system with mono-component minute toner
produces high definition lines, distinctive greyscale and consistent blacks.
The maximum paper width is 36 (914mm) wide, and the minimum is 11 (279mm) wide.
The maximum paper length is 19.7ft (6m) with 36 paper, and the minimum is 8.5 (210mm).
Up to 600dpi print and scan resolutions, with an advanced Image Process System, produces the
highest quality images.
Copier Features
Easy Touch screen control panel
Collated Sets copying
Real-time image preview
Recall/reprint previous jobs
600x600DPI copy quality
Integrated Accounting and Reports for all copying, network printing, scanning
Network ready copier
Simple Operator assistance for every day tasks (toner replacement procedure)
Image stamping
All hardware/software included for instant upgrade from Digital Copier to Network
Printer to Scan-to-File system.
Information center displays all support information, meter readings, and serial number.
Network Printer Features (Optional)
Standard TCP/IP connectivity
Direct support for vector file formats: HPGL1/2, HP-RTL, Calcomp 906/907
KIP 3100 DWF format support
Direct support for raster file formats: TIF Group 3/4, Cals Group 4, Uncompressed
Grayscale/Color TIF,
Optional KIP 3100 PDF format support: PS/PDF file format.
Standard Windows Driver for KIP Script (PS output) and KIP-GL (HPGL/2,RTL output)
Standard AutoCAD Drivers
Unlimited site license of KIP Request allows users to group supported formats together
for printing collated sets.
Integrated Accounting in all KIP Drivers/Request for all network printing.
Integrated KIP 3100 Web Printing (web server)
Open architecture ASCII Job Ticket for third party applications
Scan-to-File Features
Scan directly to PDF, TIF Group 4, Cals Group 4
Scan to file to FTP or personal inbox on the KIP 3100
Selected resolution up to 600 DPI optical
Automatic original size recognition
Retrieve scanned image files with KIP Request
1-2
K116sm1e1
1. 2
Specifications
1. 2. 1
General
Subject
Model
Configuration
Specification
KIP 3100
Console
Power consumption
(Maximum)
Power consumption
(Low power mode)
Acoustic noise
1,500W (Including Scanner & IPS)
Ozone
Dimensions
Weight
Environmental condition
for usage
Interface
Input power
44W or less
Idling
Max. 60db
Printing
Max. 65db
Impulse sound Max. 70db
Max. 0.05ppm (Measurement method under UL Standard)
1266mm (Width) x 600mm (Depth) x 1100mm (Height)
50w x 24d x 44h (UI is not included)
About 219kg or 485 lbs (1 roll)
About 230kg or 510 lbs (2 roll)
(Temperature)
10 to 32 degrees Centigrade
50 to 85 Fahrenheit
(Humidity)
20 to 85% RH
Network Interface (10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX)
In the US
: 120V plus/minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 12A
In Europe : 220-240V plus 6% or minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 7A
NOTE
The above specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-3
K116sm1e1
1. 2. 2.
Printer part
Subject
Printing method
Photoreceptor
Print speed
Print head
Resolution of print head
Print width
Print length
Specification
LED Array Electro photography
Organic Photoconductive Drum
80mm per second
(Metric)
(Inch)
6 / D Landscape
LED Array
600dpi x 600dpi
Maximum
914mm or 36
Minimum
279mm or 11 (Roll paper)
210mm or 8.5 (Cut sheet paper)
Maximum
(Standard)
6m or 19.7 ft
(Option)
24m or 75 ft
Minimum
210mm or 8.5
NOTE
If the print is longer than 6m, its image quality or the reliability
of the paper feeding systems are not guaranteed.
Warm up time
First print time
Fusing method
Development method
Media
Storage of consumables
Shorter than 4 minutes 30 seconds

(At 23oC, 60%RH, the rated voltage, and plain paper is used)
18 seconds (D Landscape)
(At 23oC, 60%RH, the rated voltage, and plain paper is used)
Heat and Pressure Rollers
Dry type non-magnetic mono-component toner
(Recommended Media)
Plain Paper
18 24lbs
Tracing Paper
18 20lbs
Film
4MIL
Recommend media for electro-photography process
(Toner cartridge)
Store the cartridge within the temperature range from 0 to 35
degrees Centigrade (32 to 95 degrees Fahrenheit) and within the
humidity range from 35 to 85% RH.
NOTE
1-4
K116sm1e1
1. 2. 3
Scanner part
Subject
Scanning method
Light source
Setting of original
Starting point of scan
Scan width
Scan length
Margin area
Optical resolution
Digital resolution
Original transportation
Transportable original
thickness
Scanning speed
Specification
Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
(5 pieces of A4 or 8.5 sized CIS)
LED (R/G/B)
Face up
Center
Max: 914.4mm or 36
Min : 210.0mm or 8.5
Max: 24m or 75 ft (Including the margin area)
Min : 210mm or 8.5 (Including the margin area)
3mm from leading, trailing and both side edges
600dpi
200 / 300 / 400 / 600 dpi
Sheet through type
Max: 1.60mm
Min : 0.05mm
65mm per second
NOTE
1-5
K116sm1e1
1. 3
1. 3. 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Specifications for Originals

Original Standards
The width of original must range from 8.5 to 36 or 210mm to 914.4mm.

The length of original must range from 8.5 to 75 ft or 210mm to 24,000mm.
The thickness of original must range from 0.05mm to 0.65mm (Max 1.60mm).
The shape of original must be square, and it must be standard sized.
The type of original must belong to any of the followings.
Plain paper
Coated paper (High or middle class plain paper is coated with the paint.)
Tracing paper
Pansy Trace Paper (Both sides of the film is sandwiched between Tracing paper.)
Film
Newspaper
Cardboard paper
1. 3. 2
Special Documents
The following kinds of originals are special. It is possible to scan them, but the image quality
and feed reliability are not guaranteed.
(1) These types of originals are acceptable, but the thickness may not be:
Booklets
Originals with a Hanger
Cut and Pasted originals
(2) These originals may not damage the scanner, but these types are NOT recommended:
Cloth
Aluminium Kent Paper
1. 3. 3
Do Not Scan Originals
Do not use the following types of originals because they are likely to damage the scanner.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Metal originals (The Scan Glass may damage)

Slippery originals which is difficult to transport
Irregularly shaped originals (Not square in shape)
Extremely curled originals (Diameter of curl is less than 50mm)
Extremely creased originals
Torn originals
1-6
K116sm1e1
1. 4
Appearance
1. 4. 1
Front view
7
3
5
13
8
2
9
1
10
11
No.
1
2
Name
Main Switch
Original Guides
User Interface
Emergent Stop Button
5
6
7
Original Tray
Scanner Unit
Toner Hatch
(Original Table)
8
9
10
Engine Unit Open Lever

Bypass Feeder
Roll Deck
11
12
13
Print Tray
Counter
Stylus
12
Function
You can turn on/off the KIP 3100.
Feed the original under the Scanner Unit along the Original
Guides.
This is a Touch Screen, and many kinds of user operation
are available.
Press this button when you would like to stop copying or
scanning in an emergency.
These trays catch the original ejected from the Scanner Unit.
This unit reads the original when you make a scan or copy.
Open the Toner Hatch when you replace the Toner Cartridge.
Also put the original here and then feed it into the Scanner
Unit when you make scan or copy.
Pull up these levers when you open the Engine Unit.
Feed a cut sheet paper from the Bypass Feeder.
Roll paper can be set here.
(You can set 1 roll paper normally, but 2 rolls of paper are
available if you install the optional 2nd Roll Deck.)
Prints are stacked here after the ejection.
It counts the total amount of printing.
Use this to press buttons on the touch screen.
1-7
K116sm1e1
1. 4. 2
Rear view
7
8
2
3
No.
1
Name
Exit Cover
LAN Port
3
4
5
6
7
Dehumidify Heater Switch

(Optional in the US)
Breaker
Inlet Socket
Print Guide Trays
COM Port (Optional)
USB Port
Function
Open the Exit Cover when you remove the paper misfed
inside the Fuser Unit.
Connect the LAN Cable to connect the KIP 3100 to the
network. (Do not connect a telephone line)
Turn on the Dehumidify Heater with this switch when you
would like to dry the paper during the humid season.
It is possible to shut off the supplied AC power.
Connect the Power Cord here.
These trays guide the prints to the Print Tray.
Connect the cable from the Optional Device.
(D-Sub Connector 9 pins: 12VDC max.)
5VDC max.
1-8
K116sm1e1
1. 5
Specifications for the Scan Original
A scan original must satisfy the following specifications.

Thickness
Width
Length
0.05mm to 1.6mm
210.0mm to 914.4mm (8.5 to 36)
210mm to 24,000mm (8.5 to 75ft)
Do not scan the following kinds of original, because you may damage the original or scanner itself!
Stuck with paste
Paste
Torn
Folded (Leading edge)
Excessively curled
(a diameter of 50 mm or
less)
1-9
K116sm1e1
Not square
KIP
KIP
Wet
Wet
Metal or fabric material
Metal
KIP
Rough surface
(Carbon paper for example)
Rough surface
Clipped or stapled
Clipped
KIP
1-10
Fabric
KIP
Stapled
KIP
K116sm1e1
The following kinds of originals can be read with using a carrier sheet.
Image quality or the reliability of paper feeding for them is not guaranteed.
Patched
Punched
1-11
K116sm1e1
1. 6
1. 6. 1
Specifications for the Printing Paper

Improper Printing Paper
Do not use the following kinds of printing paper because you may damage the print engine!
Excessively curled
(a diameter of 50 mm or
less)
Folded
Creased
Torn
Punched
1-12
K116sm1e1
Extremely slippery
Extremely sticky
Extremely thin and soft
Extremely slippery
OHP Film
CAUTION
Do not use paper with staples, and do not use conductive paper such as aluminium foil and
carbon paper.
The use of these materials may cause a fire.
NOTE
(1) Print image may become light if printed on a rough surface of the paper.
(2) Print image may become defective if the print paper has an excessive curl.
(3) It will become a cause for paper mis-feed, defective print image or crease of paper if you
use a paper that does not satisfy the specification.
(4) Do not use a paper of which surface is very special, such as thermal paper, art paper,
aluminium foil, carbon paper and conductive paper.
(5) Tracing paper exposed to air over a long period tends to cause defective printing.
Removing one round from the beginning of the roll surface of the tracing paper is
recommended.
1. 6. 2
Proper Care of Printing Paper
Follow these steps in taking care of your printing paper.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not expose the paper to the direct sunlight.

Keep the paper away from high humidity. (It must be less than 70%)
Put the paper on a flat place
Place unused paper back into its original polyethylene bag to avoid the humidity.
1-13
K116sm1e1
1. 6. 3
Treatment against environmental condition
Shown below are necessary treatments according to the environmental conditions.

Humidity(%)
Low
Possible problem
Void of image, crease of paper and
other problems occurs when you print
with plain paper and tracing paper.
Void of image occurs when you print

with tracing paper.
40%
70%
Void of image occurs when you print

Void of image, crease of paper and
other problems occurs when you print
Necessary treatment
1. Install the humidifier in the room, and
humidify the room air.
2. Remove the paper from the machine
right after the completion of the print,
and keep it in a polyethylene bag.
If you will not make print soon, remove
the tracing paper from the machine and
keep it in a polyethylene bag.
Remove the paper from the machine after
everyday use, and keep it in a
polyethylene bag.
If you will not make print soon, remove
the tracing paper from the machine and
keep it in a polyethylene bag.
1. Turn on the Dehumidify Heater.(if
installed)
2. Remove the paper from the machine
right after the completion of the print,
and keep it in a polyethylene bag.
High
NOTE
(1) KIP 3100 is equipped with the Dehumidify Heater (optional in U.S.A.)
Using it in high humidity environment (65% or higher) is recommended.
(2) Void of image and crease of paper will occur in case of extremely high or low
humidity.
Normal Print
Crease of paper
If the media is humidified ;
Normal Print
Loss of image
If the media is humidified ;
1-14
K116sm1e1
Chapter 2
Installation
The machine had passed our strict inspection after careful adjustment in the factory, and
then it was packaged and shipped. Installation is an important work to make the machine
work at customers site as same as it has passed our strict inspection before shipment.
A service engineer has to understand machines function very well. Install the machine in a
good environmental place in a correct way, and then check that it works perfectly.
2. 1
Page
2- 2
Installation Requirements
2. 2 Unpacking
2. 1 Unpacking
2. 2 Confirmation of Accessories
2- 3
2- 3
2- 6
2. 3
Leveling the KIP 3100
2-13
2. 4
Setup of the Roll Deck
2-17
2. 5
Setup of the Machine
2-18
2. 6
Installation of Accessories
2-36
2. 7
Turning on the KIP 3100
2-45
2. 8 Initializing the KIP 3100 Scanner Unit

2. 8. 1 Installation
2. 8. 1. 1 Installing USB Driver
2. 8. 1. 2 Installing KIP Scanner Utility
2. 8. 2 Scanner Calibration
2-47
2-47
2-47
2-51
2-54
2-1
K116sm2e1
2. 1
Installation Requirements
The following conditions are required for the installation of the equipment.
1. Power source should be rated as:
U.S.A: 120V +/-10%, 50/60Hz, 15A or higher
Europe and Asia: 220-240V+6% or -10%, 50/60Hz, 10A or higher
2. The equipment must be on a dedicated circuit.
3. The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible.
1. Make sure to connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet.
2. The outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Site Environmental Conditions
Temperature Range
10 C to 32 C
50 F to 89.6 F
Humidity Range
15% to 85% RH. (NON CONDENSING)
Keep the printer away from water sources, boilers, humidifiers or refrigerators.
1. The installation site must not have any open flames, dust or ammonia gases.
2. The equipment must not be exposed to the air vents from heating/cooling systems.
3. The equipment should not be exposed to the direct sunlight. Please draw curtains to
block any sunlight.
When you open the printer (Upper Half), do not expose the Photoconductive Drum to
strong (intense) light as this will damage the Drum.
Ozone will be generated while this equipment is in use, although the quantity generated is
within all safe levels. (see certifications)
Ventilate the room, if so required.
Keep ample space around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation.
(Refer to the following figure.) The floor must be level and the strength must be ample to
sustain the weight of the equipment.
(Rear)
60cm/24 or larger when

the standard tray is
installed
KIP 3100
45cm/18
or wider
45cm/18
or wider
(Front)
80cm/32 or larger
2-2
K116sm2e1
2. 2
Unpacking
2. 2. 1 Unpacking
1. Cut the bands (1) and remove the top board (2).
2
1
1
2. Remove pads (3) and the outer cardboard box (4).
Please note that and Software Box will be

included in the crate.
The Software box has the Software CD and other
important installation notes and documents.
OPEN THIS BOX FIRST.

DO NOT DISCARD THIS BOX.
3. Remove the inner cardboard cases (5).
4. Open the front face (6) of the bottom board. Peel off the plastic bag (7).
Remove the wrapped machine with a forklift, and move it to the installation place.
Unwrap the machine.
6
2-3
K116sm2e1
5. Put aside each accessory box (8), Startup Kit (9: Europe/Asia model only) and empty Drum
Box (10). DO NOT DISCARD THESE ITEMS.
Remove the scanner protection box (11) and the protection papers (12) around the machine.
8
10
9
11
12
6. Put aside one more accessory box (13) and the
protection mat under the Roll Deck. DO NOT
DISCARD THE BOX.
Remove the tapes (14) on Roll Deck.
13
14
14
2-4
K116sm2e1
7. Open the Scanner Unit. Remove the protection mat (14). Put aside Shading Sheet (15) for the
scanner adjustment.
DO NOT DISCARD THE SHEET. HANDLE WITH GREAT CARE.
KEEP THE SHEET IN SAFE COSTODY FOR AVOIDING DAMAGE.
Remove the protection sheet (16) on the top rear of the machine. Close the Scanner Unit.
15
16
17
8. Put aside the Power Cord (18) which is on the

bottom plate of machine.
18
2-5
K116sm2e1
2. 2. 2 Confirmation of Accessories
Confirm the following parts are attached to the product.
Item name
Picture
Number
of article
4
Tray
Drum Box ( empty )
Guide 3
Tray 2 Assembly
2-6
K116sm2e1
Item name
Picture
Number
of article
2
Guide 4
Original Guide 1 & 2
1
1
Power Cord
Monitor Assembly
2-7
K116sm2e1
Item name
Picture
Number
of article
1
Arm Assembly
Cover 3
Holder Assy
Stylus
2-8
K116sm2e1
Item name
Picture
Number
of article
2
Plate 2
Arm
Arm 2
Guide 5 & 6
1
1
2-9
K116sm2e1
Item name
Picture
Number
of article
2
Guide Sheets
Developer Handle
Starting Toner (500g)

(Europe/Asia model only)
Toner Cartridge (300g)

2-10
K116sm2e1
Item name
Picture
Number
of article
1
Shading Sheet
2 or 4
Cap Assy
(2 for 1 Roll / 4 for 2 Rolls)

8
4x8 Tooth Washer Screws

4x6 Bind Screw
(for Arm Assembly)
3x8 Bind Screws

(for Guide 4)
2-11
K116sm2e1
Item name
Picture
Number
of article
1
Setup Procedure
User CD
(Operator manual)
Hardcopy of Users Manual

(German)
2-12
K116sm2e1
2. 3
Leveling the KIP 3100
1. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine.
2. Remove the screws (2) at both sides.
3. Remove 4 screws (3) at the bottom of both sides.
2-13
K116sm2e1
4. Remove 5 screws (4) at the back on both sides. (3 pieces on the left and 2 pieces on the right)
4
4
6. Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6).
7. Close the Engine Unit.
2-14
K116sm2e1
8. Rotate 4 Leveling Bolts (7) on the bottom of the KIP 3100 with a wrench to bring up the KIP
3100 from the floor.
Keep 85mm of distance between the bottom plate and the floor. (It is about 80mm before the
adjustment.)
85mm
NOTE
Do not rotate the Levelling Bolts too much.
If the distance between the bottom plate and the floor becomes wider than 95mm, the
Adjuster Bolt may be removed.
2-15
K116sm2e1
9. Put a level (8) on the specified positions shown to check the level of the KIP 3100.
If not leveled, adjust by rotating the Adjustment Bolts.
Front
Rear
Right
Left
2-16
K116sm2e1
2. 4
Setup of the Roll Deck
1. Open the Roll Deck (1).
2. Remove the tapes (2) from Roll Deck.

2
2
3. Close the Roll Deck.
2-17
K116sm2e1
2. 5
Setup of the Machine
1. Pull up on the Levers (1) to open the Engine.
2. Carefully remove the protection mat (2) under the Drum.
3. Open the Cover 4 (3).
2-18
K116sm2e2
4. Remove the screws (4) and flat washers (5) to release the Bands (6) at both sides.
4
5
5. Rotate up the Pins (7) and move them to the inside to pull them out from the holes.
Remove the Cover 4 (3).
2-19
K116sm2e2
6. Open the Bypass Feeder (8).
7. Remove 4 pieces of screw (9).
8. Close the Bypass Feeder (8). Open the Developer Press Unit (10).
10
8
2-20
K116sm2e2
9. Disconnect the connector (11).

11
10. Remove 2 pieces of red screw (12) at both sides of the Developer Unit, which protect the
Developer Unit from vibration during transportation. (They are no longer required.)
12
12
11. Holding both side plates firmly, slide the Developer

Unit (13) out of the machine.
13
14
2-21
K116sm2e2
13. Remove 4 screws (15).

15
15
14. Remove the Hopper Assembly (16).

16
15. Remove the Separator (17).
17
17
16. Shake the Starting Toner Bottle (18) well, and add
the toner to the Developer Unit.
(Please even out the toner in the Developer unit.)
2-22
18
K116sm2e2
17. Along the guide on the side plates, gently place Separator (17) on the added toner.
Do not push it in.
17
17
to be placed
along the guide
NOTE
(1) Be careful of the direction of Separator (17).
Do not install it in the wrong direction.
17
(2) Just put Separator (17) on the toner. It will be placed unseated. Do not push it completely
at this time. Doing so may damage the plastic screwing sheets (19) on the 2 shafts
Unseated
19
17
19
2-23
K116sm2e2
18. Insert Developer Handle (20) to the shaft of Roller Developer, and gently turn Developer
Handle (20).
Separator will sink in the toner. Turn Developer Handle (20) until Separator sinks in position.
20
20
NOTE
(1) Slowly turn Developer Handle. Otherwise the toner may spill out.
(2) Make sure that Separator (17) completely sinks in position by a 1/2 or more rotation of
Developer Handle.
If not in position, the plastic screwing sheets may be damaged at the next step.
Correct:
Seated
Wrong:
Unseated
17
17
19. Replace the Hopper Assembly (16) and connect the connector (14).
16
14
2-24
K116sm2e2
20. Insert the Developer Handle (20) to the shaft of Roller Developer, and rotate the Roller
Developer several times so that its surface is covered with the toner.
20
NOTE
Do not install the Developer Unit at this time, as it must be removed when you setup the
Drum in the later procedure.
21. The process unit and toner cover should be open. The Photoconductive Drum is covered with
a black sheet (21). Gently remove it pulling from the front.
21
21
2-25
K116sm2e2
22. Install the Developer Unit (13) to the machine. Connect the connector (11).
13
11
NOTE
Both the Gear Helical 20T (22) on machine side and the Gear Helical 28T (23) on Developer
Unit side must be in gear firmly with each other, but they may not be in gear with each other
by just installing the Developer Unit to the machine.
22
23
After installing the Developer Unit to the machine, rotate the Gear Helical 34T (24: instead of
Gear Helical 20T) by hand from under the Engine Unit.
Both gears will be in gear by this way.
24
2-26
K116sm2e2
23. Close and fix the Developer Press Unit (10), and put back the Cover 4 (3).
3
10
2-27
K116sm2e3
25. Both the LED Head and the Image Corona are locked with the screws (25) being separated
from the Drum, not to be damaged during the transportation. Loosen the screws (25) to unlock
the Fixing Brackets (26) at both sides. Pressing down the Fixing Brackets (26) firmly, tighten
the screws (25).
Left side
Right side
26
26
25
25
NOTE
Please satisfy the following requirements before performing Step 25.
(1) The black sheet has been removed from the Drum. (See the former procedure 21.)
(2) The Engine Unit is closed firmly. (See the former procedure 25.)
Otherwise a proper distance can not be kept between LED Head and Drum.
26. Remove 4 screws (27) and loosen 4 screws (28) to remove Cover 15 (29)
27
29
28
2-28
K116sm2e3
27. Remove 5 screws (30) to remove Case 5 (31).

30
31
30
28. Remove Bushing (32) from the frame and insert it onto the harnesses (33) of Arm
Assembly (34).
32
34
32
33
29. Route the harness (33) and fit Bushing (32) to the original position (35).
35
33
2-29
32
K116sm2e3
30. Fix Arm Assembly (34) to the frame with 4-4x8 tooth washer screws (36).
34
36
36
31. Pass through the harness (33) to the Arm

Cover (37).
37
33
NOTE
Pull out the harnesses (33) from the bottom opening of Arm Assembly within about 100mm.
Do not pull out the harnesses (33) too much.
Otherwise a noise problem may occur.
100mm
2-30
K116sm2e3
32. Secure the harnesses (33) with the wire saddles (38). Pass through the harnesses (33) to the
square hole (39).
38
33
38
39
33
39
33
NOTE
There are 2 kinds of cable inside of the machine.
One is the internal cable such as VGA Cable,
USB Cable (of the scanner, monitor) and Power
Supply Cable and the other is the external one
such as LAN Cable, USB Relay Cable or Folder
Cable (Option).
38
These 2 kinds of cable must not be bundled with

the same Wire Saddle because a noise problem
may occur.
not secured together
Therefore bundle the internal cables only with the
Wire Saddles (38) at this time.
33. Attach Monitor Assembly (40) to Arm Assembly. Fix it with 2-4x8 tooth washer screws (41) of
accessory loose so that it can turn upward on the screws (41).
40
41
41
41
2-31
K116sm2e3
34. Lean Monitor Assembly (40) back. Connect VGA Cable (42), Power Supply Cable (43), Monitor
USB Cable (44) to Monitor Assembly (40).
40
44
43
42
35. Install 2 more 4x8 tooth washer screws (45) of accessory to the screw holes. Secure the
screws (45) in the top of the holes on Monitor Assembly.
Secure the screws (41) (45) to fix Monitor Assembly (40).
45
45
45
41
41
41
Reference
Monitor Assembly can be tilted up (in 5 degree
maximum) by adjusting the location of the tooth
washer screws (45).
2-32
K116sm2e3
36. Fix Arm Cover (37) with 1-4x6 bind screw (46) of
accessory.
46
37
37. Secure VGA Cable (42) with the outside wire saddles (47). Secure Power Supply Cable (43)
and Monitor USB Cable (44) with the wire saddles (48).
48
48
47
47
38. Secure Power Supply Cable (43) with wire saddles (49) and connect it to DC Power Supply (50).
49
50
49
43
2-33
K116sm2e3
39. Connect Monitor USB Cable (44) and VGA cable (42) to the lower USB port and VGA port on
IPS respectively. Secure VGA Cable (42) with 2 wire saddles (51).
42
51
44
NOTE
There are 2 kinds of cable inside of the machine. One is the internal cable such as VGA
Cable, USB Cable (of the scanner, monitor) and Power Supply Cable. And another is the
external one such as LAN Cable, USB Relay Cable or Folder Cable (Option). These 2 kinds
of cable must not be bundled with the same Wire Saddle because a noise problem may
occur if these cables are mixed.
(1) There are 6 wire saddles on PC Cover. The inside line (48) is for Power Supply Cable
(43), Monitor USB Cable (44) and Scanner USB Cable. Note that the outside line (47) is
for VGA Cable (42), LAN Cable, USB Relay Cable or Folder Cable.
(2) Route the excess (52) of VGA Cable in the
wire saddle.
48
52
(3) There are two USB ports under the network connector on IPS.
Monitor USB Cable (44) is to be connected to the lower USB port.
The upper one should be occupied by Scanner USB Cable (53).
Do not interchange the USB Cables.
(4) Bundle only VGA Cable (42) with the wire
saddle (51) besides USB connector of IPS.
53
Do not bundle USB Cable (44) (53) together

at this time, because the USB Cables are the
great cause for a noise issue.
44
51
42
2-34
K116sm2e3
40. Replace Case 5 (31) and Cover 15 (29).
31
29
41. Replace Cover 2 (54) and Cover 3 (55).
54
55
42. Remove 1 screw (56) on the lower left corner of

the back of Monitor Assembly.
56
2-35
K116sm2e3
43. Attach Holder Assy (57) to the corner shown as follows and fix it the 3x14 bind screw (56) of
accessory.
57
57
56
44. Place the stylus (58) to the Holder Assy (57).
58
57
2-36
K116sm2e3
2. 6
Installation of Accessories
1. Fit 2 Guide 3 (1) to the notches on the Cover 10.

1
2. Fit the Guide 1 & 2 (2) to the Cover 4.
3. Loosen 4 screws (3), fit the Plate 2 (4) to the

screws (3), and tighten the screws (3).
2-37
K116sm2e4
4. Install 2 pieces of Arm (5).
2-38
K116sm2e4
5. Install Arm 2 (6), Guide 6 (7), Guide 5 (8).
NOTE
Insert all Arm 2 (6), Guide 6 (7), Guide 5 (8) as the following photos. (Be careful of the
direction of insertion.)
2-39
K116sm2e4
6. Remove 2 - 4x6 Bind Screws (9).
7. Attach 2 Sheet Assembly (10) with 4x6 Bind Screws (9) you have removed at step 6.
boss
10
NOTE
Fit the positioning bosses on the Sheet Assembly to the positioning holes on machine side at
this time.
8. Fit 4 pieces of Tray (11) to the notches (12) on the back of the machine.
12
11
2-40
K116sm2e4
9. Fit the Guides 4 (13) to the Tray 2 Assemblies (14).

13
14
NOTE
Insert the tip plate (15) of the Guide 4 (13) into the
slit (16) of the Tray 2 Assembly (14).
15
16
10. Put each Tray 2 Assembly (14) onto the slide rails
(17) on machine side, and fix with 2 - 3x8 screws.
17
17
14
NOTE
Change the position of Tray 2 Assemblies (14) according to the format of printing paper.
ISO (A/B)
Pull out completely.
Architecture
Align with the marking line.
2-41
Engineering
Push in completely.
K116sm2e4
11. Open Cover 4 (18).
18
12. Shake Toner Cartridge (19) several times.

19
13. Pressing Lock Lever (20), locate the pin (21) on top of Toner Cartridge to the groove (22).
Make sure that Lock Lever (20) correctly locks Toner Cartridge.
20
21
22
2-42
K116sm2e4
14. To open the toner supply hole, rotate Toner Cartridge body (23) in one revolution to the arrow
direction so that the tab (24) goes into the notch (25).
24
23
25
NOTE
It is not necessary for the cartridge bottom to be
locked by the lever (26).
That will be done at the machines power on.
26
15. Close Cover 4 (18).
18
2-43
K116sm2e4
2. 7
Turning on the KIP 3100
1. Plug the KIP 3100 into an exclusive wall outlet.
WARNING
(1) Do not handle the Power Plug with wet hands, or you may receive an electrical shock.
(2) Make sure to earth the machine for safety.
(3) Do not plug the printer into a multi-wiring connector in which other devices are
plugged. It may overheat the outlet and may result in a fire.
(4) The outlet must satisfy the following conditions.
In U.S.A. : 120V plus/minus 10%, 50/60Hz and 15A
In Europe : 220-240V plus 6% or minus 10%, 50/60Hz and 10A
2. There is a Power Switch on the right side of KIP 3100.

Press its I side to turn on the KIP 3100.
Power Switch
Press | side.
2-44
K116sm2e4
3. The User Interface (UI) starts operating, and displays the following Copy Mode Screen in one
minute.
There is a Ready Indicator in the Copy Mode Screen, which flashes during warming up.
Ready Indicator
Note: The screen shown with available options.

4. The Ready Indicator lights green when ready.
You can make a copy, scan (optional) or print (optional).
2-45
K116sm2e4
2. 8
Initializing the KIP 3100 Scanner Unit
After the setup, the KIP 3100 Scanner Unit requires scanner adjustment for initialization.
This provides a clearer and more accurate scan image.
Initialize the KIP 3100 using KIP Scanner Utility.
NOTE
Below are the system requirements to operate KIP Scanner Utility.
Windows 2000 / XP operating system
USB 2.0 support

1. Loosen 4 screws (1), remove 4 screws (2)
to remove Cover 10 (3).
2. Disconnect the USB Cable (4), and connect it to the USB Terminal to your service PC.
2-47
K116sm2e5
3. Turn on both your PC and the KIP 3100.

[Found New Hardware Wizard] for KIP K116 starts automatically.
If the following message appears, select your driver update option and click [Next].
4. Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive.

5. Choose Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]. Click [Next].
2-48
K116sm2e5
6. Click [Continue Anyway] when the following message is indicated.
7. Click [Finish] to close [Found New Hardware Wizard].
2-49
K116sm2e5
8. Open Device Manager, and confirm that KIP K116 is operating properly.
2-50
K116sm2e5

1. Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive
Locate and run SETUP.EXE for KIP Scanner Utility.
2. The Setup program starts. Click [Next].
3. The destination of the software can be changed. Click [Next].
2-51
K116sm2e5
4. The name of the program folder can be changed. Click [Next].
5. The following message is indicated when all files have been copied. Click [Finish].
2-52
K116sm2e5
6. Open the properties panel for the KIP Scanner Utility shortcut on Start _Program _
Scanner Utility _ Scanner Utility
7. Add the following text to the end of the target path.
(one byte space)/Maintenance
2-53
K116sm2e5
2. 8. 2 Scanner Calibration
NOTE
Scanner Calibration should be performed with KIP Scanner Utility 1.12 (or later).
1. Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.0 Cable.
2. Start KIP Scanner Utility by; Start _Program _ ScannerUtility _ ScannerUtility
(KIP Scanner Utilitys initial screen)
2-54
K116sm2e5
3. Select [Calibration] under [Adjust].
4. At first it is required to calibrate all pixels.

Select [All] and then click [Execute].
You will be asked to set the original.
2-55
K116sm2e5
5. Set Shading Sheet in the KIP 3100 accessory to the scanner.
6. Click [OK] after setting Shading Sheet, and the scanner reads it.
It takes about 5 minutes to complete Shading adjustment.
NOTE
(1) It takes about 10 minutes to complete Shading adjustment.
(2) The scanner will be performed white balance (monochrome) and Color calibration at
the same time with Shading Sheet.
7. When finished scanning, click [OK].

Reload Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [Confirm] to check the result of Shading.
2-56
K116sm2e5
8. The scan image of Shading Sheet is displayed.
Scan image of Shading Sheet

9. Scrolling the image horizontally, check whether the density is even or not.
If the density is even at every place, finish Shading clicking [Close].
There may be some place of which density is different from others as the following image.
As this pixel is defective, it is necessary to calibrate it individually in the next step.
Defective pixel
2-57
K116sm2e5
NOTE
Sometimes the density may be different between left and right as the following image.
This is not a problem but it is just the border of image blocks.
10. If you will calibrate an individual pixel, select [Specified part].
11. Move the pointer onto the scan image, and you will find a kind of red cursor.
red cross cursor
defective pixel
2-58
K116sm2e5
12. Move the red cursor so that its vertical line matches the defective pixel and click it.
The defective pixel is selected by this operation.
If there are some more defective pixels, select them in the same way.
Match the vertical line to a defective pixel.

13. Click [Execute], and the selected defective pixel is compensated individually.
14. You will be asked to set the original again.

Set Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [OK].
Check the result of Shading again.
When finished, click [Close].
15. Scanner Calibration (white balance / color) is completed.
2-59
K116sm2e5
Chapter 3
Print / Scan Process
3. 1 Print Process
3. 1. 1 Characteristic of toner
3. 1. 2 Each step of the print process
3. 2. 1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)
3. 2. 2 Charge of Drum
3. 2. 3 Exposure
3. 2. 4 Development
3. 2. 5 Transfer
3. 2. 6 Separation
3. 2. 7 Drum Cleaning (Removal of toner)
3. 2. 8 Fusing
3. 1. 3 Controlling the movement of toner in the Developer Unit
3. 1. 4 Toner Collection Process
3. 1. 5 Density Compensation Process
Page
3- 2
3- 2
3- 3
3- 5
3- 6
3- 7
3- 8
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-17
3-20
3. 2 Scan Process
3. 2. 1 Data flow in scan and copy
3. 2. 2 Positioning process of Image Block
3-21
3-21
3-22
3-1
K116sm3e1
3. 1
3. 1. 1
Print Process
Characteristic of toner
The toner used for the KIP 3100 has a characteristic to be charged negative, which tends to be
attracted to a more positive object.
Suppose that there are objects A and B, and the situation is as follows.
1. Electric potential of the object B is higher than that of object A.
2. Toner exists on the object A.
Comparing the potential of both objects, it can be said that the object B is relatively positive and
the object A is negative. (In another word, object B is more positive than the object A.)
As the toner is negative, it is attracted to the object B that is more positive.
If you move the object B close to the object A, therefore, the toner moves onto the object B.
Object A with low potential

(Relatively negative)
A
A
A
Toner moves from A to B.
Object B with high potential

(Relatively positive)
On the contrary, suppose that the toner exists on the object B of which electric potential is higher
than the object A.
Even if you move the object A close to the object B, the toner continues to stay on the object B
because negative toner and relatively negative object A repel each other.
Object A with low potential

(Relatively negative)
Object B with high potential

(Relatively positive)
Toner stays on B.
Thus, the toner has a characteristic to move from one place with a lower potential to another place
with a higher potential.
If we control the electric potentials, it is possible to move the toner from one place to another as we
intend, or it is also possible to remove the toner from an unwanted place.
The KIP 3100 properly controls the electric potentials for each of the following components:
Drum, Corona Units, Lamps, Developer Unit and Cleaning Roller.
The movement of toner is correctly controlled for each of the following processes:
Development, Toner Transfer, Drum Cleaning and etc. are performed.
3-2
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 2
Each step of print process
One cycle of print consists of the following 8 processes.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)

Charge of Drum
Exposure
Development
Transfer
Separation
Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner)
Fusing
LED Head
Image Corona
Eraser Lamp
Regulation Roller
Grid Plate
Fuser Roller
Cleaning Roller
Density Sensor
Toner Supply Roller

Developer Roller
Transfer Corona
Separation Lamp
3-3
Separation Corona &

Pressure Roller
K116sm3e1
Processes from 1 to 8 are related with the control of the electric potentials.
The following graphic shows the electric potential at each process and the movement of toner.
Voltage of
Transfer Corona
+700V
+600V
+500V
+400V
Voltage of
Cleaning Roller
+300V
5
+200V
+100V
0V
SP1
-100V
-200V
3
-300V
-400V
-500V
-600V
Voltage of
Developer Roller
1
6
2
SP2
-700V
Surface Potential of Drum

SP1 : For black image / SP2 : For white image
Name of part
Image Corona Wire
Grid Plate
Developer Roller
Regulation Roller
(Center)
Regulation Roller
(Both sides)
Toner Supply Roller
Transfer Corona
Separation Corona
Cleaning Roller
Voltage (Current) during Print Cycle

-1.3mA +/-0.05mA
-620V +/-30V
-180V +/-5V
-80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias
+350V +/-5V
0V (Connected to the ground)
The same voltage with Developer Roller Bias

Plain Paper: +1.2mA +/-0.05mA
Other Media: +1.0mA +/-0.05mA
AC (5.0KV) + DC (-250V +/-5V)
+450V +/-5V
Voltage during Toner Collection Process
The same voltage with Developer Roller Bias

-550V +/-5V
Reference
When the printer is going to stop after printing, or when the used Roll Deck is changed with
other one, the KIP 3100 will take the Toner Collection Process to remove the remained toner
and place back into the Developer Unit.
Refer to [3.1.4 Toner Collection Process] on the page 3-20 for the detail.
3-4
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 1
Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)
As the first step of the print cycle, it is necessary to remove the negative electric charges from the
Drum, which remains there after the former print cycle.
The Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to light.
So the Drum is rotated and evenly exposed to the light from the Eraser Lamp.
The electric potential on the Drum becomes 0V (residual potential) by this process.
0V
0V
0V
Eraser Lamp
Drum
Negative electric
charges
3-5
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 2 .2
Charge of Drum
The Image Corona discharges negative electric charges which are given to the Drum.
The surface of Drum becomes about -620V evenly as a result, which corresponds to the white
area of the printed image pattern.
The Grid Plate is also connected to the High Voltage Power Supply individually.
The Current and Voltage supplied to the Image Corona Wire is as follows:
Corona Wire
-1.3mA +/-0.05mA
Corona Wire
Grid Plate
Image Corona
620V
620V
0V
0V
Drum
3-6
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 3
Exposure
According to the printed image pattern, the LED Head throws the light (740nm) onto some part of
the Drum which corresponds to the black area of printed image pattern.
As the Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to light, this
part of Drum surface loses the charges and its potential becomes about -20V. (This potential is not
constant but is variable due to the environment.)
The other part of Drum surface, which was not exposed to the light from the LED Head, keeps the
-620V of potential which the Image Corona has given.
An invisible electric image pattern that consists of -620V area and the -20V area is formed on the
surface of Drum as a result. (This is called Electrostatic Latent Image.)
LED Head
20V
620V
620V
20V
0V
0V
Drum
(Distribution of electric potentials after the Exposure)
-20V
-620V
Reference
Even if the toner remains on the Drum, it will not block the light from the LED Head because
the diameter of toner (9 micrometers) is much smaller than that of 1 pixel (42 micrometers)
of the LED. The electric charges on the Drum are removed as needed.
3-7
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 4
Development
The Developer Roller, which is evenly covered with toner, is in contact with the Drum because the
Developer Unit is pressed to the Drum. (The width of contact point is about 5mm.)
The Developer Roller is supplied with -180V (+/-5V) during the print cycle.
And both -620V and -20V areas exist on the Drum because the Electrostatic Latent Image has
been formed in the former Exposure process.
Seen from the voltage of Developer Roller Bias (-180V), the -20V area on the Drum is relatively
positive. So the toner moves from the Developer Roller to the -20V area of Drum.
On the other hand, the -620V area is relatively negative seen from the Developer Roller.
So the toner does not move to the -620V area but stays on the Developer Roller.
A visible toner image is formed on the Drum as a result.
Developer Roller
Drum
Developer Roller
Drum
20V
620V
180V
Before Development
-20V
20V
After Development: Toner moves

only to -20V area.
-620V
(Invisible Electrostatic Latent Image)
(Visible toner image)
3-8
K116sm3e1
Even if some toner has not been removed by the Cleaning Roller and remained on the -620V area
of the Drum (which corresponds to the white area of the print) shown later in section [3.1.2.7 Drum
Cleaning], this toner is removed at the time of the Development process. This remaining toner
moves to the Developer Roller because the potential of the roller (-180V) is higher than that of the
Drum (-620V).
This way there will be no unnecessary black spots printed on the white area of the print.
The remaining toner that moved to the Developer Roller is carried into the Developer Unit and then
reused.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Some Toner remained on the Drum

Toner moves from the Drum to the Developer Roller.
Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Toner Supply Roller
Toner is shifted to the inside of the Developer Unit by the rotation of Toner Supply Roller.
Toner is reused.
3
4
Before Development
(Toner is remaining on the white area.)
-20V
After Development
(Toner is removed from the white area.)
-620V
Reference
The Developer Unit not only has the Developer Roller but also 2 more rollers inside which
are also supplied with individual voltages.
The Developer Unit controls the movement of toner in the unit taking advantage of the
difference of potentials among these rollers, ultimately covering the Developer Roller with the
toner.
Refer to [3.3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit] to know how the
Developer Unit controls the movement.
3-9
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 5
Transfer
The printing paper is charged positively to about +500V as the Transfer Corona discharges
positive electric charges from under the paper.
The toner existing on the -20V area on the Drum will move to the printing paper because the
potential of the paper becomes higher than the Drum by the Transfer Process.
The voltage supplied to the Transfer Corona Wire is as follows.
Transfer Corona Wire:
for plain paper: +1.2mA +/-0.05mA
for other
+1.0mA +/-0.05mA
(When the Insulated Drum is used.)
Printing paper
20V
20V
20V
Transfer Corona
Positive electric charges
(+500V +/-30V)
3-10
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 6
Separation
The printing paper is attracted to the Drum after the Transfer Process because the potential of
paper is positive and that of Drum is negative.
To avoid jamming, it is necessary to separate the paper from the Drum by removing the static force
between them.
The Separation Corona takes AC discharge being supplied with the AC voltage and the DC
voltage.
AC voltage : 5.0KV
DC voltage : -250V
As the AC voltage is compensated by the negative DC voltage, the negative charges are
generated more than positive ones, which mainly results in removing the positive charges of the
printing paper.
On the other hand, the Separation Lamp throws light from under the Corona Wires to remove the
negative charges of the Drum.
The static force between the printing paper and the Drum is reduced as a result, and the paper is
separated from the Drum by its weight.
Negative charges of the Drum are removed

by the light from the Separation Lamp.
Drum
620V 20V
Separation Corona
Positive charges of the paper are

removed by the AC discharge.
Separation Lamp
3-11
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 7
Drum Cleaning (Removal of toner)
Some amount of toner that has not transferred onto the printing paper remains on the Drum.
This remaining toner will be removed by the Cleaning Roller.
The Cleaning Roller is supplied with +450V (+/-5V), and there are some negative electric charges
on the Drum at this time.
As the Cleaning Roller is relatively positive and the Drum is negative, the toner moves from the
Drum to the Cleaning Roller.
Cleaning Roller
450V
Drum
Remained toner
Negative electric charges
NOTE
If too much toner exists in a small area (like a trace of solid black image) the Cleaning Roller
may not be able to remove it all.
The remaining toner will then be removed from the Drum in the Development Process.
Refer to the page 3-9 for the detail.
3-12
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 8
Fusing
After Transfer / Separation Processes, the printing paper is transported to the Fuser Unit by the
Inner Transport Unit.
The Fuser Unit mainly consists of the Fuser Roller and the Pressure Roller.
The Fuser Roller is very hot, and the Pressure Roller is strongly pressed to the Fuser Roller.
The toner is firmly fused onto the printing paper by the combined heat and pressure when the
paper passes between these rollers.
Fuser Roller
Inner Transport Unit
3-13
Pressure Roller
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 3
Controlling the movement of toner in the

Developer Unit
There are 3 kinds of rollers called Developer Roller, Regulation Roller and Toner Supply
Roller in the Developer Unit.
Each roller is supplied with its own voltage.
In the following list, the voltage of the Developer Roller (-180V) is measured against the ground.
The voltage of the Regulation Roller (Center) (-120V) is measured against the developer roller;
meaning the difference against the voltage of Developer Roller Bias. The voltage on the Toner
Supply Roller is provided by the Developer Roller Bias.
Name of roller
Developer Roller
Regulation Roller (Center)
Regulation Roller (Both sides)
Toner Supply Roller
Regulation Roller: Both sides

(0V: Connected to GND)
Supplied voltage
-180V +/-5V against the ground
The same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias
(The Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller are connected
together using a spring leaf plate inside the developer contact
cover.)
Insulator
Regulation Roller: Center

(-80V against the Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller
(-180V against GND)
Toner Supply Roller

(Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias)
NOTE
The Regulation Roller is divided into three areas, the central area and both side areas.
These areas are separated by insulators so that an individual voltage can be supplied to
each.
3-14
K116sm3e1
Taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers, the movement of toner is
controlled in the Developer Unit as follows.
1. The Toner Supply Roller carries the toner toward the Developer Roller.
2. When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers it moves onto the Developer Roller
Then the Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Regulation Roller.
3. The Regulation Roller is strongly pressed to the Developer Roller by springs, and these
2 rollers move in the opposite direction of each other at the contact point.
Even if the Developer Roller carries more toner than required, the Regulation Roller limits
the amount of toner that can pass between the 2 rollers. So a very small amount of toner
passes between the rollers and the rest is returned back to the inside.
Since the voltage of the Developer Roller is 80V higher than that of the Regulation Roller
(Center), the toner which has passed through the rollers is firmly attracted to the Developer
Roller.
A very thin layer of toner is evenly formed on the surface of Developer Roller as a result.
4. Much of the toner sticks on the Regulation Roller when it is returned back to the inside.
This toner is scraped off by the Scraper which is contacting the Regulation Roller.
Scraper

4
3
Toner Supply Roller

(Same voltage with the Developer Roller)
3-15
Developer Roller
(-180V against GND)
K116sm3e1
5. The voltage of both sides of Regulation Roller is 0V as these parts are connected to
Ground through both side roller bearings and brackets.
This potential is higher than that of the Developer Roller (-180V).
When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, all of it moves onto the
Regulation Roller and is scraped off by the Scraper.
The side areas of the Developer Roller are not covered with the toner as a result, this helps
prevent toner from dropping into the machine from the sides.
Regulation Roller: Both Sides

Developer Roller
(-180V against GND)

(-80V against Developer Roller voltage)
Toner area
(Drum side)

Non-toner area
Developer Roller
(-180V against GND)
3-16
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 4
Toner Collection Process
As explained in [3.1.2.7 Drum Cleaning] on the page 3-12, the Cleaning Roller is supplied with
+450V to remove the remained toner from the Drum during the print cycle.
This toner gathered by the Cleaning Roller is returned to the Developer Unit in the following 3
cases.
(1) When the printer has finished printing out all the accumulated print jobs and prepares to
stop.
(2) When the used roll paper is ended and changed with another one.
(3) When the used roll paper is changed from one to another because the print size specified in
the job is different.
This process to return the toner to the Developer Unit is called Toner Collection Process.
When the trailing edge of the last sheet passes over the Separation Area, the printer will take the
Toner Collection Process as follows rotating the Drum for 2 revolutions.
1. The Eraser Lamp throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges from
the Drum. The potential of Drum becomes 0V. The Charge Unit remains turned off.
2. The voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller is changed to -550V in the Toner Collection
Process.
As the potential of Drum becomes higher than that of Cleaning Roller, toner on the Cleaning
Roller moves onto the Drum.
0V
0V
550V
Remained toner
0V
Drum
Cleaning Roller
3-17
K116sm3e1
3. The voltage supplied to the Developer Roller changes to +350V (+/-5V) during the Toner
Collection Process.
As the potential of Developer Roller becomes higher than that of Drum, toner on the Drum
moves onto the Developer Roller.
Then the toner is carried into the Developer Unit by both the Developer Roller and the Toner
Supply Roller.
Remained Toner
0V
0V
Drum
350V
0V
Developer Roller
3-18
K116sm3e1
Reference
Voltages supplied to the Regulation Roller and Toner Supply Roller during the Toner
Collection Process; shown below:
Name of roller
Developer Roller
Regulation Roller
(Center)
Regulation Roller
(Both sides)
Toner Supply Roller
Supplied voltage
+350V +/-5V against the ground
0V (Ground)
Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias

Developer Roller
(+350V against GND)

Toner Supply Roller

(Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias)
3-19
K116sm3e1
3. 1. 5
Density Compensation Process
On rare occasion, loss of image density may occur under special usage. The KIP 3100 has the
ability to reduce such loss of image density and is able to maintain a satisfactory image quality
regardless of the machine usage.
In the Density Compensation Process, toner density on the surface of Photoconductive Drum is
measured by the Density Sensor at regular time intervals. According to the result, the Developer
Roller / Regulation Roller Bias will be automatically adjusted to compensate image density.
The Density Measurement starts at regular intervals of 18 hours of Main Motor operating time,
after the completion of the current print queue.
1. Several solid toner patches are created on the surface of Photoconductive Drum as follows.
Solid toner patch
Photoconductive Drum
Density Sensor
2. The Density of all the patches is measured by Density Sensor (Density Measure). The average
of the patches (Density Value) is calculated.
3. If the Density Value falls short of the lowest density limit (Minimum Density), one of the
Compensation Levels listed below will be applied. The Developer Roller / Regulation Roller
Bias will be adjusted based on the current Compensation Level.
Default
upon shipment
Developer Roller Bias
(Negative)
Regulation Roller Bias
against Developer Roller Bias
-180V
No
Compensation
-180V
Compensation
Level 1
Compensation
Level 2
Compensation
Level 3
-230V
-230V
-230V
120V
160V
200V
remain default
120V
120V
remain default
4. Due to The Developer Roller / Regulation Roller Bias Adjustment, image density will stabilize
and provide a satisfactory image quality regardless of the machine usage.
3-20
K116sm3e1
NOTE
(1) While the Density Value exceeds the Minimum Density, the current Compensation Level
will remain.
(2) Manual Switching of Compensation Level is not provided.
(3) An applied Compensation Level should be reset after replacing the Developer Roller.
3-1. Complete the replacement procedure and return all the parts to their proper positions.
3-2. Remove the cover from the front face of the
machine to access the Sub UI.
3-3. Turn on the machine while pressing the [MENU] button to unlock the Keys.
P r i n t er
R1 : 36
MENU
r ea dy
ENTER
3-4. Press and hold the [ * ], and then press the keys in the following order,
[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] to enter the Service Mode.
3-5. Press [MENU] until (9) Clear Mode appears. When it appears, press [ENTER].
( 9 ) C l ea r Mode
3-6. Press [MENU] until Bias 3 Count Clr appears. When it appears, press [ENTER].
. B i a s3 Coun t C l r
C l ea r
03
3-7. Press and hold the [ * ], then press [Enter] to reset the Density Compensation Level.
The applied bias adjustment by the Density Compensation will be set back to the default
value.
3-21
K116sm3e1
3. 2
Scan Process
3. 2. 1
Data flow in scan and copy
There are CIS Units, CIS Controller PCBs and a Data Controller PCB in the scanner unit, which
reads the image and processes the data.
1. The CIS Units read the image pattern of the original, and then sends the analog data to the
CIS Controller Boards.
2. The CIS Controller Boards convert the analog data into digital data, and then sends it to the
Data Controller PCB.
3. The Data Controller PCB completes the correct image processes according to the UI setting.
Then it outputs the image data to the IPS through the USB 2.0 cable.
4. The IPS then outputs the image data to the printer part of the KIP 3100 through the Interface 8
in case of copy, or it outputs to the Network PC through the LAN cable in case of scan to file.
CIS
CIS
CIS
CIS
CIS
Analog data
CIS Controller PCB
(A/D Conversion)
CIS Controller PCB

(A/D Conversion)
CIS Controller PCB

(A/D Conversion)
CIS Controller PCB

(A/D Conversion)
CIS Controller PCB

(A/D Conversion)
Digital data
Data Controller PCB

(Several image process)
USB 2.0
IPS (Controller)
Interface 8
LAN
Printer part
Network PC
Printing out
of the Copy
Saving as an
image file
3-22
K116sm3e1
3. 2. 2
Positioning process of Image Block
The KIP 3100 scanner reads the image of the original using 5 CIS units (Contact Image Sensors).
Since the CIS units are arranged in 2 rows, a vertical gap of image occurs among the image blocks.
It is necessary to remove this gap by the vertical positioning process (Y offset).
Also, the reading area of these 5 CIS units overlaps each other by some degree. This means some
image pixels are commonly included in the neighboring two Image Blocks. It is very hard to
recognize the image because many images are duplicated. To prevent this kind of problem, it is
necessary to remove the duplication of image pixels by the horizontal positioning process (X
overlap). The Data Controller PCB performs these positioning processes.
NOTE
The KIP 3100 performs these positioning processes (X overlap & Y offset) according to the
setting specified through the KIP Scanner Utility.
Please refer to [8.12. 4. 3 Position] (page 8-205) for this setting.
[Explanation]
There are 5 CIS units arranged in 2 rows with some amount of their reading area overlapping each
other. Shown in the following illustration
The reading data is initially inputted to the Data Controller PCB as follows.
(1) A vertical gap of image occurs among the image blocks.
(2) Some image pixels are commonly included (duplicating) in the neighboring two Image
Blocks.
Reading areas
Duplicate Image
CIS
Vertical Gap
The image data before the positioning process

3-23
K116sm3e1
The Data Controller PCB removes the vertical gap among the Image Blocks according to the
positioning setting (Y offset) specified through the KIP Scanner Utility.
The image data before the positioning process
The image data after the positioning process (Y offset)
3-24
K116sm3e1
Also the Data Controller PCB removes the duplication of image pixels among the Image Blocks
according to the positioning setting (X overlap) specified through the KIP Scanner Utility.
The image data after the positioning process (Y offset)
The image data after the positioning process (X overlap)
3-25
K116sm3e1
Chapter 4
Electrical
4. 1
Page
4- 2
General Information
4. 2 Electrical Components Location

4. 2. 1 Right side
4. 2. 2 Left side
4. 2. 3 Back side
4. 2. 4 Front side
4. 2. 5 LED Head Frame
4. 2. 6 Main Frame
4. 2. 7 Developer Unit
4. 2. 8 Fuser Unit
4. 2. 9 Roll Deck
4. 2.10 Cutter Unit
4. 2.11 Inner Transport Unit
4. 2.12 Scanner Unit
4- 3
4- 3
4- 7
4- 8
4-12
4-13
4-15
4-18
4-19
4-21
4-24
4-25
4-26
4. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Output from HV Power Supply

4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog output
4. 3. 2 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Image Corona
4. 3. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona
4. 3. 4 Check & Adjustment of AC Component to the Separation Corona
4. 3. 5 Check & Adjustment of DC Component to the Separation Corona
4. 3. 6 Check & Adjustment of Negative Developer Bias
to the Developer Roller
4. 3. 7 Check & Adjustment of Positive Developer Bias
to the Developer Roller
4. 3. 8 Check & Adjustment of the Bias gap
between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller
4. 3. 9 Check & Adjustment of Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle)
4. 3.10 Check & Adjustment of Negative Cleaning Roller Bias
(Toner Collection Process)
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-33
4-35
4-37
4-1
4-39
4-41
4-43
4-45
4-47
K116sm4e1
4. 1
General Information
This machine is mainly controlled by a microcomputer, which is located on the DC Controller.

This microcomputer reads the input signals from the sensors, and outputs the operation signals
to the motors, SSRs, solenoid, clutches and blowers on programmed timing.
Sensor
Driver
Micro Computer
(CPU & ROM)
DC Load
The DC Controller has an LED which identifies that 5VDC is applied on this DC Controller safely.
Generally the color of the wiring is separated depending on the voltage.

0VDC
Blue
5VDC
Yellow
12VDC
Brown
24VDC
Orange
Signal in to DC Controller (sensors)
Purple
Signal out from DC Controller
Gray
CAUTION
There is a battery (CR2032) on the Motherboard of IPS Controller.
There is a Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
As for the waste disposal of battery, dispose in accordance with local state and federal
relations.
4-2
K116sm4e2
4. 2
Electrical Components Location
4. 2. 1
Right Side
3
2
6
1
(230V model only)
Item
1
2
Symbol
SW1
MS1
Name
Switch
Switch
Type
AJ8R2004BBCF
FA1L-AA22
SSR1
Solid State Relay
SSR2
Solid State Relay
HV1
HV2
HV3
HVP4
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT5
HV Power Supply
AQJ416V (US)
AQJ426V (EU)
AQJ416V (US)
AQJ426V (EU)
EUK1MGA60HA
Phase Control PCB
PW5724B
PW5724B
Signal name
(POWER-OFF)
HV_IM
HV_TR
HV_AC
BIAS_TRG
BIAS_SW
4-3
Function
Turns on and off the machine
Detects whether or not the Toner
Hatch or the Engine Unit is opened.
(It shuts off the AC Power to the
DCP1 when either of them are
opened)
ON / OFF control of the Fuser
ON / OFF control of the Fuser
Outputs the high voltage to each of
the following components.
(1) Image Corona (HV1)
(2) Transfer Corona (HV2)
(3) Separation Corona (HV3)
(4) Developer Roller (OUTPUT2)
(5) Regulation Roller (OUTPUT3)
(6) Cleaning Roller (OUTPUT5)
Flicker Reduction
Used on 230V model only
K116sm4e2
NOTE
Developer Bias (OUTPUT 2, 3) is outputted (or stopped) by the signal BIAS_TRG.
The polarity of Bias is decided by the signal BIAS_SW
4-4
K116sm4e2
11
10
16
13
14
12
15
(120V model)
(230V model)
4-5
K116sm4e2
Item
7
Symbol
DCP1
Signal name
-
F1
F2
F3
Name
DC Power Supply
Fuse
Type
LEB225F0524-U
Walter
TSC3.15AH
PW10810
PW10810 PCB ASSY
PW10810
10
SW2
Switch (Option)
SDDJE1
11
RY1
Relay
G7L-2A-TUB
(DC24V)
12
LF1
Noise Filter
13
CB1
Breaker
X28-XQ1A-15
14
LF1
Noise Filter
RG-208F2
15
INLET
Inlet
16
CB1
Breaker
X28-XQ1A-10
4-6
Function
Outputs each of the following:
24VDC, 5VDC and 0VDC
Protects the 24VDC output from
over-current
If you replace the fuses, make
sure to use the following
specified one.
(Manufacturer)
LITTEL FUSE INC.
(Type)
Walter TSC3.15AH
(250V / 3.15A)
Protects the circuit from the
surge caused by thunder
Turning on and off the
Dehumidify Heater
Supplies the power to the Lamp
(H1).
(It stops supplying the power to
the Lamp when Switch (MS3) or
Thermostat (TS1) is open)
Removes the noise from the AC
line
Used on 120V model
Protects the AC line from the
over-current
Used on 120V model
Removes the noise from the AC
line
Used on 230V model
Inputting the AC Power
Used on 230V model
Protects the AC line from the
over-current
Used on 230V model
K116sm4e2
4. 2. 2
Left Side
4
1
Item
1
Symbol
PW11620
Signal name
-
Name
PW11620 PCB
Type
PW11620
PW6654B
Driver PCB B
PW6654B
MS4
Switch
V-162-1C25
10E
CL1
REGIST_CL
Clutch
MIC5NE-45
4-7
Function
Overall sequence control with
Interface to IPS and (Image
Process for LED)
Driver for the Toner and Press
motors, Er. Lamps and Blowers
Detects whether or not the Toner
Hatch or the Engine Unit is
opened
(The machine does not shut off
the AC power even if MS4
detects either of them is opened)
Aligns the leading image formed
on the Drum with the leading
edge of the paper
K116sm4e2
4. 2. 3
Back Side
Item
1
Symbol
BL7
Signal name
-
Name
Blower
BL8
Fan
DCP2
DC Power Supply
Type
D12F-24BL
05
ASFN90372
90
LDA15F-12
PW10523
PC Controller PCB
PW10523
M1
MAMTR
DC Motor
DRG-6236-226
M2
HEAT_M
DC Motor
DRG-6236226B
4-8
Function
Assists with transporting the
paper on the Inner Transport Unit
Cools down the IPS Controller
Supplies the 12V DC power to
both the UI and the PW10523
Switches AC Power On and
Off to the IPS Controller.
(Sends Shut Down signal to
IPS Controller)
Drives the Drum, Developer Unit
and Paper Feeding section
Drives the Fuser Unit
K116sm4e2
(Fuser Unit omitted)
Item
7
Symbol
BL5
BL6
Signal name
Name
Fan
Type
ASFN60372
Fan
ASFN60372
4-9
Function
Controls the temperature on the
right area of Fuser Roller
Controls the temperature on the
left area of Fuser Roller
K116sm4e2
10
Item
10
Symbol
MS8
Signal name
Name
Switch (Optional in USA)
4-10
Type
FA2L-BA22
Function
It stops supplying the AC power
to the Dehumidify Heater when
the Roll Deck is opened.
K116sm4e2
12
13
11
11
Item
11
Symbol
BL3 & BL4
12
13
Signal name
HEAT_BL_L
HEAT_BL_R
Name
Blower
Type
D12F-24BL 05
MS2
Switch
FA1L-AA22
MS3
Switch
V-162-1C25 10E
4-11
Function
Exhausts the heated inside air.
(They are equipped with the
Ozone Filters)
Detects whether or not the
Heater Hatch is opened.
(It shuts off the AC power to the
DCP1 when the Heater Hatch is
opened.)
Detecting whether or not the
Heater Hatch is opened.
(The machine does not shut off
the AC power even if the MS3
detects the Heater Hatch is
opened.)
K116sm4e2
4. 2. 4
Front Side
Item
1
Symbol
LCD
PW10570
EC1
Signal name
COUNT
Name
LCD
Type
L168200J000
PW10570 PCB
PW10570
Counter
E760PC10DC
24-551
4-12
Function
Several kinds of messages are
indicated.
Several kinds of service
operations are available.
Counts the total linear meter
(linear foot) or square meter
(square foot).
It is possible to change the
counting unit in the Service
Mode.
K116sm4e2
4. 2. 5
LED Head Frame

1
Item
1
Symbol
PW6631
Signal name
ER1
Name
Eraser PCB A
Type
PW6631
4-13
Function
Removes the negative electric
charges from the Drum at the
beginning of the Print Process
K116sm4e2
(Image Corona Unit omitted)
Item
2
Symbol
LED HEAD
PW6693
Signal name
Name
LED Head
Type
LH6604
HV-ZD Assy
PW6693
4-14
Function
Creates the Electrostatic Latent
Image on the Drum
Keeps the Grid Voltage constant
(Control of the surface potential)
K116sm4e2
4. 2. 6
Main Frame
(Drum omitted)
1
Item
1
Symbol
PW6631
Signal name
ER2
DENS-S
PH11
Name
Eraser PCB A
Type
PW6631
Toner Density Sensor
GP2Y40010K0
F
4-15
Function
Assists with paper separation by
removing the electric charges
from the Drum at the time of the
Separation Process
Detects the toner density on the
drum surface for the analog
voltage adjustment on PW11620
K116sm4e2
4
3
Item
3
Symbol
M4
Signal name
PRESS_M
Name
DC Motor
Type
DU2422-1
PH4
PRESS_S
Sensor
GP1A73A000J
PH1
REGIST_S
Sensor
PS117ED1
PH5
MAN_IN
Sensor
PS117ED1
4-16
Function
Presses the Developer Unit
against the Drum
(Or keeps the Developer Unit
away from the Drum)
Detects the Developer Unit is
pressed or kept away from the
Drum.
Detects the paper at the
Registration Area
Detects and sets the cut sheet
paper
K116sm4e2
Item
7
Symbol
MS5
Signal name
DOOROPEN
Name
Switch
Type
CS1A-B2CA
4-17
Function
Detection for the Roll Deck Open
Error
K116sm4e2
4. 2. 7
Developer Unit
Item
1
Symbol
TLS1
Signal name
TONER_S
M3
TONER_M
Name
Sensor
Type
TSP15DA10C01
DU2431-2
DC Motor
4-18
Function
Detects whether or not toner
exists in the Developer Unit
Drives the Toner Cartridge to
supply the toner to the Developer
Unit
K116sm4e3
4. 2. 8
Fuser Unit
Item
1
Signal name
Name
Thermostat
Symbol
TS1
TS2
TH1
TH1
Thermistor
Type
CH-152-35170
FS-K0113
TH2
TH2
Thermistor 3
FS-K0113
4-19
Function
Preventing over-heat
Detects the temperature on the
central area of Fuser Roller
Detects the temperature on the
driven side of Fuser Roller
K116sm4e3
Item
4
Symbol
H1
H2
PH3
Signal name
HEAT_EXIT
Name
Lamp
120V : Z166800001
230V : Z166800003
Lamp
120V : Z166800002
230V : Z166800004
Sensor
4-20
Type
Function
Heats up the central part of
Fuser Roller
Heats up the right and the left
part of Fuser Roller
GP1A73A000J
Detects paper mis-feeds at the

exit area
K116sm4e3
4. 2. 9
Roll Deck
Item
1
Symbol
CL3
Signal name
FEED_CL
Name
Clutch
Type
MIC5NE-45
2
3
4
5
6
7
CL4
CL5
CL6
CL7
PH8
PH10
R1FD_CL
R1BK_CL
R2FD_CL
R2BK_CL
R1ENC_S
R2ENC_S
Clutch
Clutch
Clutch
Clutch
Sensor
Sensor
MIC8NE-23
MIC8NE-09
MIC8NE-23
MIC8NE-09
GP1A73A000J
GP1A73A000J
4-21
Function
Feeds roll paper from both Roll 1
and Roll 2 (Forward)
Feeds Roll 1 (Forward)
Rewinds Roll 1 (Reverse)
Feeds Roll 2 (Forward)
Rewinds Roll 2 (Reverse)
Detects paper end of Roll 1
Detects paper end of Roll 2
K116sm4e3
Item
8
Symbol
H3
H4
H5
H6
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
Signal name
Name
Resister
Type
120V 1K 15W
230V 3.5K
15W
Function
Dehumidifies the roll paper with
heat.
Thermostat
2455RM-15837
Controlling the temperature of

Resister
(The Resisters turn on when the
Thermostat detects some
decided temperature, and they
turn off when it detects another
decided temperature.)
4-22
K116sm4e3
10
11
13
12
Item
10
Symbol
PH6
Signal name
R_EDGE
Name
Sensor
Type
PS117ED1
11
PH7
R1SET_S
Sensor
PS117ED1
12
PH12
FEED_ENC
Sensor
GP1A73A000J
13
PH9
R2SET_S
Sensor
PS117ED1
4-23
Function
Detects the trailing edge of the
roll paper
Detects the paper set position for
Roll 1
Detects the length of the
proceeding paper to be cut
Detects the paper set position for
Roll 2
K116sm4e3
4. 2. 10
Cutter Unit
2
1
Item
1
2
Symbol
M5
MS6
MS7
Signal name
Name
Cutter Motor
Cutter Home Position
Sensor
4-24
Type
-
Function
Moves the Cutter Blade
Detects the Home Position of the
Cutter Blade.
K116sm4e3
4. 2. 11
Item
1
Symbol
PH2
Signal name
STRIP_S
Name
Sensor
Type
GP1A73A000J
4-25
Function
Detects the paper mis-feed at the
Separation Area
K116sm4e3
4. 2. 12
Scanner Unit
2
Item
1
Symbol
Signal name
Name
Data Controller Board
CIS Controller Board
Sensor
Type
TLP1201A
4-26
Function
Data Controller Board makes
several image processes to the
digital data sent from the CIS
Controller Board.
And then it sends the processed
image data to the IPS Controller.
Converts the analog data read by
the CIS to the digital data
Scanner Upper Unit is opened.
K116sm4e3
Item
1
Symbol
Signal name
Name
Data Controller Board
Type
CIS Controller Board
Sensor
TLP1201A
Switch
CS1A-B2CA
4-27
Function
Data Controller Board makes
several image processes to the
digital data sent from the CIS
Controller Board.
And then it sends the processed
image data to the IPS Controller.
Converts the analog data read by
the CIS to the digital data
Scanner Upper Unit is opened.
Emergency stop button (Stops
original drive)
K116sm4e3
10
11
12
Item
6
Symbol
Signal name
Name
Sensor
Type
PS117ED1
Sensor
PS117ED1
Sensor
PS117ED1
Sensor
PS117ED1
10
Sensor
PS117ED1
11
Sensor
PS117ED1
12
Sensor
PS117ED1
4-28
Function
It detects the insertion of original.
Also it detects original widths A4,
8.5 and 9.
It detects original widths A3, 11
and 12.
and 18.
and 24.
It detects original widths A1, and
30.
It detects original widths 34 and
36.
It detects the original mis-feed.
It is also used to detect the
leading edge when the original is
returned.
K116sm4e3
13
13
15
13
Item
13
14
15
Symbol
Signal name
14
Name
CIS Unit
Type
CIPS218CF601
Motor Assembly
Power Board
4-29
Function
CIS Units read the image of
original, and then sends the
analog data to the CIS Controller
Board
Transports the original.
Converts the +24V to each +12V,
+5V and +3.3V.
Also it is the Driver Circuit of the
Motor.
K116sm4e3
4. 3
Check & Adjustment of Analog

Output from HV Power Supply
4. 3. 1
Situations necessary to check the analog

output
It is necessary to check the analog output from High Voltage Power Supply after replacing the
following parts.
PW11620 PCB (DC Controller)
HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA)
Please check the analog output for each of the following parts, and adjust if they are out of the
specified range.
Go to the Reference page indicated on the list below to see how to check and adjust each item.
Check Item
Analog Voltage to the Image Corona
Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona
AC Component to the Separation Corona
DC Component to the Separation Corona
Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller
Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller
Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller
Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle)
Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process)
Reference page
4-31
4-33
4-35
4-37
4-39
4-41
4-43
4-45
4-47
Reference
Please try replacing PW11620 PCB or HV Power Supply PCB if you have the following kinds
of problems.
PW11620 PCB
(1) When the UI indicates abnormal indication although the UI has no problem.
(2) When the electric components such as motors or lamps dont work properly during
normal operation; although such components have no problem.
HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA)
When the output to the Image Corona / Transfer Corona / Separation Corona /
Developer Roller / Toner Supply Roller / Regulation Roller and Cleaning Roller is abnormal.
4-30
K116sm4e4
4. 3. 2
Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the

Image Corona
The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Image Corona
is 1.30 +/-0.05V.
Check and adjust the output current in the following way.
1. Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the CP11 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Connect the - cable to ground.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.
CP11
multimeter
(DC)
ground
2. Make a Test Print (Refer to [8. 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141)
As the high voltage is supplied to the Image Corona during the Test Print, check the voltage
with the multi-meter.
Standard value of the output voltage to the Image Corona is 1.30 +/-0.05V.
4-31
K116sm4e4
3. Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy 1.30 +/-0.05V.

To adjust it, rotate VR101 with a screwdriver.
VR101
multimeter
(DC)
ground
4-32
K116sm4e4
4. 3. 3
Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the

Transfer Corona
The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Transfer
Corona is specified to each type of paper as follows.
Plain paper
Tracing paper
Film
1.20 +/-0.05V
1.00 +/-0.05V
1.00 +/-0.05V
Check and adjust the output current in the following way.
NOTE
The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment.
Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Connect the - cable to the CP22 pin.
CP21
CP22
multimeter
(DC)
4-33
K116sm4e4
2. Select the Test Print Mode, and make a test print using each type of paper (plain
paper, tracing paper & Film). (Refer to [8. 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141)
As the high voltage is supplied to the Transfer Corona during the Test Print, check the voltage
Standard values of the output voltages to the Transfer Corona are:
Plain paper
1.20 +/-0.05V
Tracing paper
1.00 +/-0.05V
Film
1.00 +/-0.05V
3. Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy the above specifications.
Select the Adjustment Mode (Mode No.4), select each of following Sub Mode Numbers, and
change the setting value so that the output voltage satisfies the above specifications.
(Refer to [8. 5. 4.13 Transfer Voltage (No.029 to 034)] on page 8-47 for the details.)
Sub Mode No.
029
030
031
032
033
034
Contents
Transfer Voltage (Plain paper)
Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper)
Transfer Voltage (Film)
Transfer Voltage (Plain paper : Special)
Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper : Special)
Transfer Voltage (Film : Special)
4-34
K116sm4e4
4. 3. 4
Check & Adjustment of AC Component to the

Separation Corona
The standard value of the AC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the
Separation Corona is 5.00 +/-0.05V.
Check and adjust the AC Component in the following way.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Connect the - cable to the CPCOM pin.
multimeter
(DC)
CP31
CPCOM
Standard value of the AC Component to the Separation Corona is 5.00 +/-0.05V.
4-35
K116sm4e4
3. Adjust the AC Component if it does not satisfy 5.00 +/-0.05V.

multimeter
(DC)
VR302
4-36
K116sm4e4
4. 3. 5
Check & Adjustment of DC Component to the

Separation Corona
The standard value of the DC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the
Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V.
Check and adjust the DC Component in the following way.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
CP33
multimeter
(DC)
ground
Standard value of the DC Component to the Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V.
4-37
K116sm4e4
3. Adjust the DC Component if it does not satisfy -250 +/-5V.

VR303
multimeter
(DC)
ground
4-38
K116sm4e4
4. 3. 6
Check & Adjustment of Negative Developer

Bias to the Developer Roller
The Negative Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the Print
Cycle.
The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias is as follows for each type of paper.
Plain paper
Tracing paper
Film
-180 +/-5V against the ground

Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way.
NOTE
The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment.
Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition.
1. Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the OUTPUT2 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
multimeter
(DC)
ground
OUTPUT 2
4-39
K116sm4e4
As the Negative Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller during the Test Print, check
the voltage with the multi-meter.
The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias for each type of media is:
Plain paper
Tracing paper
Film

If the above values are not satisfied, go to the next step.
3. If the value (voltage) is -230 +/- 5V, the Developer Bias may be adjusted by the Density
Compensation Process.
Enter Clear Mode (Mode No.10) and Density Compensation Reset Mode (Sub Mode No. 7).
Check the current Compensation Level.
C l ea r
03
A voltage of -230V +/- 5V is correct when the above 2 digits corresponds to the
Compensation Level showing 01, 02 or 03.
If not, go to the next step for the adjustment.
Current
Compensation Level
00
01, 02, 03
Developer Bias
-180 +/-5V
-230 +/-5V
Refer to [8. 10. 2. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode] on page 8-160 for checking the
current Density Compensation Level.
Refer to [8. 5. 4.112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No.652)] on page 8-129 for Density
4. Select the Adjustment Mode (Mode No.4), select each of following Sub Mode Numbers, and
change the setting value so that the output voltage satisfies -180 +/-5V against the ground.
(Refer to [8. 5. 4.13 Developer Bias (No.022 to 027)] on page 8-49 for details)
Sub Mode No.
022
023
024
025
026
027
Contents
Developer Bias (Plain paper)
Developer Bias (Tracing paper)
Developer Bias (Film)
Developer Bias (Plain paper : Special)
Developer Bias (Tracing paper : Special)
Developer Bias (Film : Special)
4-40
K116sm4e4
4. 3. 7
Check & Adjustment of Positive Developer

Bias to the Developer Roller
The Positive Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the
Cleaning Cycle.
The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is +350 +/-5V against the ground.
Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
multimeter
(DC)
ground
OUTPUT 2
4-41
K116sm4e4
The Positive Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller for some seconds after the
printed paper has been ejected.
Check the voltage with the multi-meter during that period.
The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is +350 +/-5V against the ground.
If this is not satisfied, go to the next step for the adjustment.
3. Adjust the Positive Developer Bias by rotating VR401 so that the output voltage satisfies
+350 +/-5V against the ground.
VR401
multimeter
(DC)
ground
4-42
K116sm4e4
4. 3. 8
Check & Adjustment of the Bias gap between

Developer Roller and Regulation Roller
The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller is 120 +/-5V.
Check and adjust it in the following way.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the - one to the OUTPUT2 Pin.
multimeter
(DC)
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 2
As the Bias is supplied to both the Developer Roller and the Toner Supply Roller, check the
Bias gap between them with the multi-meter.
The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller is
120 +/-5V.
If the above value is not satisfied, go to the next step for the adjustment.
4-43
K116sm4e4
3. If the value (voltage) is 160 +/-5V or 200 +/- 5V, the Regulation Bias may be adjusted by the
Density Compensation Process.
Enter Clear Mode (Mode No.10) and Density Compensation Reset Mode (Sub Mode No. 7).
Check the current Compensation Level.
C l ea r
03
A voltage of 160V +/- 5V is correct when the above 2 digits corresponds to the Compensation
Level showing 02, and 200V +/- 5V is correct when the digits show 03.
If not, go to the next step for the adjustment.
Current Density
Compensation Level
00, 01
02
03
Regulation Bias
120 +/-5V
160 +/-5V
200 +/-5V
Refer to [8. 10. 2. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode] on page 8-160 for checking the
current Density Compensation Level.
Refer to [8. 5. 4.112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No.652)] on page 8-129 for Density
Compensation Process.)
4. Select the Adjustment Mode (Mode No.4), select Sub Mode No. 622, and change the value
so that the output voltage satisfies 120 +/-5V.
(Refer to [8. 5. 4.102 Regulation Bias (No.622)] on page 8-123 for the details)
4-44
K116sm4e4
4. 3. 9
Check & Adjustment of Positive Cleaning

Roller Bias (Print Cycle)
The Positive Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the
Print Process.
The standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V.
1. Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the OUTPUT 5 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(AHKG-067).
OUTPUT 5
multimeter
(DC)
ground
As the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is supplied during the Test Print, check the voltage value
Standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V.
4-45
K116sm4e4
3. Adjust the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy +450 +/-5V.
multimeter
(DC)
ground
VR001
4-46
K116sm4e4
4. 3.10
Check & Adjustment of Negative Cleaning

Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process)
The Negative Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the
Toner Collection Process, which is done after the completion of the Print Process.
The standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V.
1. Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the OUTPUT 5 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
OUTPUT 5
multimeter
(DC)
ground
The Toner Collection Process works for some seconds after the printed paper has been
ejected.
Check the voltage value with the multi-meter during that period.
Standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V.
4-47
K116sm4e4
3. Adjust the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy -550 +/-5V.
multimeter
(DC)
ground
VR002
4-48
K116sm4e4
Chapter 5
Mechanical
page
5- 3
5- 3
5- 5
5- 6
5. 1 Outer Covers
5. 1. 1 Removal of Side Covers
5. 1. 2 Removal of Cover 15
5. 1. 3 Removal of Cover 14
5. 2 Developer Unit
5. 2. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit
5. 2. 2 Replacement of Developer Unit Components
5. 2. 3 Replacement of Toner Supply Roller
5. 2. 4 Replacement of Screw Assy
5. 2. 5 Replacement of DC Motor
5. 2. 6 Replacement of Sensor (TLS1)
5. 2. 7 Adjustment of the space between gears
(Necessary to adjust after replacing the Developer Unit)
5. 2. 8 Readjustment of the pressure of Regulation Roller
5-47
5-53
5. 3 Fuser Unit
5. 3. 1 Removal of the Fuser Unit
5. 3. 2 Replacement of Fuser Unit Components
5. 3. 3 Replacement of Roller Pressure
5. 3. 4 Replacement of Thermistors
5. 3. 5 Replacement of Thermostat
5. 3. 6 Replacement of Exit Sensor
5-67
5-67
5-71
5-86
5-96
5-98
5-100
5. 4 Roll Deck
5. 4. 1 Replacement of Cutter Assembly
5. 4. 2 Replacement of Clutches (CL3, CL4 & CL5) of Roll 1
5. 4. 3 Replacement of Clutches (CL6 & CL7) of Roll 2
5. 4. 4 Replacement of Timing Belt 633
5. 4. 7 Replacement of Sensors (PH6, PH7, PH9 PH12)
5. 4. 8 Replacement of Sensors (PH8)
5. 4. 9 Replacement of Sensors (PH10)
5. 4.10 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 1)
5. 4.11 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 2)
5. 4.12 Installation of Dehumidify Heater Kit (Optional in USA)
5. 4. 12. 1 Installation of 1 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N: Z168080040)
5. 4. 12. 2 Installation of 2 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N: Z168080050)
5. 4.13 Installation of Roll Deck 2 Kit (Optional in USA)
5-102
5-102
5-105
5-107
5-109
5-112
5-114
5-115
5-118
5-119
5-120
5-123
5-127
5-127
5-136
5-141
5. 5 Photoconductive Drum
5. 5. 1 Replacement of the Photoconductive Drum
5. 5. 2 How to fix the Aluminum Blocks
5. 5. 3 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum
5. 5. 4 Replacement of Belt 4
5-155
5-155
5-163
5-169
5-170
5-1
5- 7
5- 7
5-10
5-33
5-36
5-44
5-46
K116sm5e1
5. 6 LED Head
5. 6. 1 Replacement of the LED Head Unit
5. 6. 2 LED focus adjustment
5. 6. 2. 1 Check of the Test Pattern Image
5. 6. 2. 2 Positioning of the Aluminum Blocks
5. 6. 2. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers
5-171
5-171
5-179
5-179
5-180
5-191
5. 7 Image Corona
5. 7. 1 Removal of the Image Corona Unit
5. 7. 2 Replacement of the Corona Wire
5-197
5-197
5-204
5. 8 Transfer / Separation Corona

5. 8. 1 Removal of the Transfer / Separation Corona
5. 8. 2 Replacement of Corona Wires
5-209
5-209
5-211
5. 9 Engine Frame
5. 9. 1 Replacement of DC Motor (M4) and Developer Press Sensor (PH4)
5. 9. 2 Replacement of Manual Set Sensor (PH5) & Registration Sensor (PH1)
5. 9. 3 Replacement of Fans (BL5 & BL6)
5. 9. 4 Replacement of Blowers (BL3 & BL4)
5-214
5-214
5-218
5-220
5-221
5.10 Inner Transport Unit

5.10. 1 Removal of the Inner Transport Unit
5.10. 2 Replacement of Sensor (PH2) & Belt
5-223
5-223
5-224
5.11 Main Frame

5.11. 1 Replacement of DC Motors (M1, M2), Belt8, Belt9, Belt 7
5.11. 2 Replacement of Clutch (CL1)
5.11. 3 Replacement of Blower (BL7)
5.11. 4 Replacement of Fan (BL8)
5-227
5-227
5-235
5-239
5-240
5.12 Scanner Unit

5.12. 1 Removal of the Scanner Unit
5.12. 2 Replacement of Belt
5.12. 3 Replacement of Motor Assy
5.12. 4 Replacement of Drive Rollers 1 and 2
5.12. 5 Replacement of Pinch Roller Assy
5.12. 6 Replacement of Sensor
5.12. 7 Replacement of CIS
5.12. 8 Replacement of Scan Glass Assy
5-241
5-241
5-247
5-249
5-252
5-259
5-262
5-265
5-269
5-2
K116sm5e1
5. 1
5. 1. 1
Outer Covers
Removal of Side Covers
1. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit.
3. Remove 4 pieces of screw (3) at both sides.
5-3
K116sm5e2

(2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left)
4
4
5. Remove both Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6).
5. 1. 2
Removal of Cover 15
1. Remove 4 pieces of screw (1), loosen 4 pieces of screw (2), and then remove the Cover 15 (3).
1
5-4
K116sm5e2
5. 1. 3
Removal of Cover 14
1. Remove 2 pieces of Guide 3 (1).

1
2. Loosen 4 pieces of screw (2) on the back, and remove 4 pieces of screw (3) on the front.
3. Remove Cover 14 (4).

4
5-5
K116sm5e2
5
5
5. Remove Shield Cover N (6).

6
5-6
K116sm5e2
5. 2
5. 2. 1
Developer Unit
Removal of the Developer Unit
2. Remove the 4x6 screws and washers (2) at both sides to make the Bands (3) free.
2
5-7
K116sm5e3
3. There are Pins (4) at both sides.

Pull them up and then slide them inward to remove the Cover 4 (1).
1
5-8
K116sm5e3
6. Remove 4 pieces of 4x8 screw (7).
7. Close the Bypass Feeder (6), and then open the Developer Press Unit (8).
8
6
8. Disconnect the connector (9). Holding both Side Plates (10), remove the Developer Unit (11)
from the machine.
9
10
11
NOTE
If you replace the whole Developer Unit, it is necessary to adjust the space between
developer driving gears.
Refer to [5. 2. 7 Adjustment of the space between gears (Necessary to adjust after replacing
the Developer Unit)] on page 5-47.
5-9
K116sm5e3
5. 2. 2
Replacement of Developer Unit Components

NOTE
(1) The following parts are Developer Unit components.

A periodic replacement for the following parts is recommended.
This section shows how to replace all of them in one sequent operation.
Item
Scraper
Sheet
Sheet 2
Roller Developer
Sheet 3
Sheet 4
Blade Roller
Seal R2 Assy
Seal L2 Assy
Seal 1
Seal 23
Seal 3
Seal 4
Number
of article
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Remarks
All of these parts are contained in
Developer Maintenance Kit A
(Z160980030).
(2) Remove all the toner from Developer Unit before replacing the above parts.
(3) After replacing Developer / Blade Rollers, an applied Auto Adjustment Level should be
reset manually with Service Mode - Clear Mode.
1. Remove the Developer Unit from the machine

making reference to [5. 2. 1 Removal of the
Developer Unit] on the page 5-7.
5-10
K116sm5e3
3. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (2) which fix the Hopper Assembly.
2
5-11
K116sm5e3
5. Remove 3 pieces of M4x6 screws (4) to remove Cover (5).

4
5
6. Remove Separator (6).
6
6
7. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) to remove Scraper Assembly (8).
5-12
K116sm5e3
8. Remove 10 pieces of screw (9), and then disassemble Scraper Assembly.

Replace Scraper (10) with a new one.
9
9
10
NOTE
(1) Please install the new Scraper so that one of
its 4 edges pointed by an arrow mark should
touch the surface of Blade Roller.
(2) The edge must be straight after the
installation. Otherwise the toner will not be
scraped off well.
Arrow mark
(3) Carry Scraper Assembly ends so that the
touching edge to Blade Roller is in downward
direction.
11
If Scraper falls or slips, Seal 5 (P/N: Z054601260) should be applied on Bracket 14 (11)
so that Scraper Assembly housing catches Scraper firmly.
9. Remove all the toner from Developer Unit.
NOTE
Do not reuse the removed toner.
5-13
K116sm5e3
10. On the driving side, remove Retaining Ring-C (11: C6) to remove Gear Helical 30T (12),
Parallel Pin (13: 2.5x10) and Collar 3 (14) from Blade Roller shaft.
12
14
13
12
11
NOTE
Blade Roller (15) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (16) by Bracket 4 (17) (on
the driving side) and Bracket 5 (18) (on the electrode plate side).
When reassembling, Blade Roller (15) should be pressed onto Roller Developer (16).
Pressurizing will be required prior to reinstallation of Gear Helical 30T (12).
16
15
16
not pressurized
15
pressurized
18
17
Pressurize without Gear Helical 30T (12)
5-14
K116sm5e3
11. Remove 5 screws (19: M4x8) (20: M4x6) to remove Pin 4 (21), Plate 9 (22), Collar (23).
20
23
22
20
19
21
12. Remove Washer (24: 8.1x14x0.5t) and Gear 29T-34T Assy (25)
24
25
24
13. Remove Gear Helical 30T (26) and Parallel Pin (27: 3x20) from Toner Supply Roller shaft.
If you cannot remove Parallel Pin (27) at this time, remove it after the later step 15.
27
26
26
14. Remove Retaining Ring-E (28: E7) to remove Washer (29: 8.1x12x0.2t) and Gear Helical 28T
Assy (30).
30
28
29
5-15
28
K116sm5e3
15. Remove Retaining Ring-E (31: E10) to remove Washer (32: 12.2x20x0.5t) and Counter Roller
(33) from Developer Roller shaft.
31
33
32
31
16. Remove 2 screws (34: M4x8) to remove Bracket 4 (17) and Spring (35).
At this time, Blade Roller on the driving side will be released from Roller Developer by
unsecured Bracket 4 (17).
34
17
35
17. On the electrode plate side, remove 3 screws (36) to remove Holder 2 Assy (37).
36
37
18. Remove 3 screws (38: M4x6) and 2 Retaining Ring-E (39: E10) to remove Bracket 10 Assy
(40) and Collar (41).
39
41
40
39
38
5-16
K116sm5e3
43
42
42
20. Remove Washer (44: 12.1x20x0.2t), Gear Helical 25T (45), Parallel Pin (46: 3x16), Counter
Roller (47) from Roller Developer shaft.
44
47
46
45
44
At this time, Blade Roller on the electrode plate side will be released from Roller Developer by
unsecured Bracket 5 (18).
48
18
49
22. Loosen 2 screws (50) to remove Bracket 19 (51).

50
51
5-17
K116sm5e4
23. On the driving side, remove 1 pan head screw (52: M4x8 W/ SW FW) to remove 1 flat washer
(53: M4) and Bracket 6 Assy (54).
52
54
53
24. On the electrode plate side, remove 1 pan head screw (55: M4x8 W/ SW FW) and Retaining
Ring-E (56: E8) to remove Washer (57: 10.1x16x0.5t), Flat Washer (58: M4), Bracket 7 Assy
(59).
55
59
56
58
57
25. Remove Blade Roller (15) from Developer Unit.

Replace Blade Roller with a new one.
15
15
15
(continued on the next page)
5-18
K116sm5e4
NOTE
(1) Attach both Sheet (60) / Sheet 2 (61) on
each side of the new Blade Roller.
61
60
(2) Note the installation direction. The longer shaft should be placed to the driving side.
electrode plate side
driving side
(3) Seal 1 (62) on each side should be seated in position along the boss (63).
63
62
out of position
Correct
Wrong
5-19
K116sm5e4
26. On the driving side, remove 3 screws (64: M4x6) and Retaining Ring-E (65: E10) to remove
Washers (66: 12.2 x 20 x 0.5t), Bracket 8 Assy (67).
64
65
67
66
65
64
27. On the electrode plate side, remove Retaining Ring-E (68: E10) to remove Washer (69:
12.2x20x0.5t), Bearing (70).
68
70
68
69
28. Remove Roller Developer (16).

Replace Roller Developer with a new one.
16
16
16

5-20
K116sm5e4
NOTE
(1) Attach both Sheet 4 (71) and Sheet 3 (72) on
each side of the new Roller Developer.
72
71
(2) Note the installation direction. The shorter shaft should be placed to the driving side.
driving side
(3) Seal 1 (62) on each side should be seated in position along the bosses.
out of position
62
Correct
Wrong
(4) Push Roller Developer against Seal 1 on the

electrode plate side (A) to hold and keep its
original position when reassembling.
(5) While installing toward (A) then (B), be careful

not to damage Sheet 3 and Sheet 4 on Roller
Developer shaft.
C
(6) Do not bump Roller Developer on the frame
rim (C).
B
5-21
K116sm5e4
29. On each side, remove 2 screws (73) to remove Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy (74) and Collar 5
(75).
Replace Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy with new ones.
73
75
74
73
NOTE
Do not tighten the screws (73) so much as the seals will be transformed as the following bad
example.
Seal is straight.
Seal is transformed.
Correct
Wrong
(2) Fix Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy (74) with the screws in proper clamping. Fixing them too tight
may result in deform on Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy.
5-22
K116sm5e4
30. On each side, remove Seal 23 (75: upper), Seal 4 (76: lower), Seal 3 (77: under).
Replace Seal 23, Seal 4 and Seal 3 with new ones.
75
77
76
NOTE
Align the bottom end of Seal 3 (77) to the rib
inside the side plate.
Align the far ends of Seal 23 (75) and Seal 4 (76)
to the top and bottom ends of Seal 3 (77)
respectively.
75
76
77
5-23
K116sm5e4
31. Reinstall Scraper Assembly.
NOTE
(1) For Scraper Assembly and Blade Roller, please reinstall Scraper Assembly first and then
locate Blade Roller in position later. This will avoid making Scrapers edge waving.
(2) After reinstalling Scraper Assembly, check
that neither Scraper (10) nor Seal 1 (62) flips
up on both sides.
10
62
(3) Tighten the screws (7) with pushing Scraper Assembly (8) to the arrow direction to be
close to Blade Roller.
5-24
K116sm5e4
32. Reinstall Blade Roller.
NOTE
(1) Push Blade Roller (15) against Seal 1 (A) on
the driving side to hold and keep its original
position, then push on the electrode plate side
(B).
(Scraper Assembly omitted in the right picture)
15
(2) During locating toward (A) then (B), be careful

not to damage Sheet (60) and Sheet 2 (61) on
Blade Roller shaft.
61
15
60
(3) After locating, check that Seal 1 (62), Sheet
(60), Sheet 2 (61) are not damaged or
deformed.
10
(4) After locating, check that Scraper (10) is not

wavy.
62
15
(5) Blade Roller (15) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (16) by Bracket 4 (on
the driving side) and Bracket 5 (on the electrode plate side).
Now Blade Roller (15) has been located in position, it should be pressed onto Roller
Developer (16) at the later step.
16
15
16
not pressurized
15
pressurized
5-25
K116sm5e4
33. Replace all the components except Gear Helical

30T (12), Separator (4) and Hopper Assy (3) in
position.
34. Make sure that the 6 screws (48) (55) (34) (52) are installed loose. If not, loosen them.
48
34
55
52
35. On the electrode plate side, fully press down the

top of Bracket 5 (18). With pressing, tighten 2
screws (48) to secure Bracket 5 (18).
48
18
48
36. On the driving side, fully press down the top of

Bracket 4 (17). With pressing, tighten 2 screws
(34) to secure Bracket 4 (17).
17
34
34
5-26
K116sm5e4
37. Turn the screw (52) in just enough revolution to hold its spring washer.
spring washer on (52)
52
released
held
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw (52) (55) firmly at this time. Otherwise proper and even
pressurization of Blade Roller between both the sides may be failed, and this will make the
toner layer on Roller Developer get thicker than required.
55
released
held
39. Turn the screw (52) in just enough revolution to thrust its spring washer.
52
held
thrust
55
held
5-27
thrust
K116sm5e4
41. Slowly tighten the screw (52) to secure Bracket 6

Assy (54).
52
54
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw (52) (55) quickly at this time. Otherwise proper and even
toner layer on Roller Developer get thicker than required.

Assy (57) in the same way with the previous step.
55
57
43. On the driving side, reinstall Collar 3 (14), Parallel Pin, Gear Helical 30T (12) and Retaining
Ring-E to Blade Roller shaft.
12
14
44. Shake the Starting Toner Bottle (78) well, and

evenly add the toner to Developer Unit.
5-28
78
K116sm5e4
Do not push it in.
6
to be placed
along the guide
NOTE
at this time. Doing so may damage the plastic screw mylars (79) on the 2 shafts
Unseated
79
6
79
5-29
K116sm5e4
Handle (80).
80
80
NOTE
Developer Handle.
If not in position, the plastic screw mylars may be damaged at the next step.
Wrong:
Unseated
Correct:
Seated
6
6
3
1
5-30
K116sm5e4
48. Install Developer Handle (80) to Roller Developer shaft. Rotate Roller Developer several times
so that the roller surface is covered with the toner.
80
NOTE
If the pressures of Blade Roller on either or both sides are weaker than required, the toner
layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker than required when you rotate the Roller
Developer in the above procedure 48.
Pressurize the Blade Roller in the correct way in this case.
Refer to [5. 2. 8 Readjustment of the Pressure of Regulation Roller] on page 5-47.
49. Reinstall Developer Unit to the machine.

50. With pressing [MENU] on the sub UI, turn on the machine to unlock the sub UI operation.
P r i n t er
R1 : 36
MENU
r ea dy
5-31
ENTER
K116sm5e4
51. With pressing [ * ], press [] [] [] [] to enter Service Mode.

All segments on the sub UI LCD will light when you enter Service Mode.
Release [ * ] and the sub UI LCD displays ROM version.
ROM
Ver . 11 6X0 2A
FPGA Ver . 1. 1
52. Press [Menu] until 9 Clear Mode appears. When it appears, press [Enter].
( 9 ) C l ea r Mode
53. Press [Menu] until Bias 3 Count Clr appears to reset the bias adjustment by Density
C l ea r
03
54. Press [ * ] and [Enter] at the same time to reset.

NOTE
The 2 digits 01, 02 or 03 show that the current Developer / Regulation Roller Bias are
automatically adjusted by Density Compensation Process.
(The digits correspond to the current Auto Adjustment Level.)
C l ea r
03
After replacing Developer / Blade Rollers, an applied Auto Adjustment Level should be reset
manually with Service Mode - Clear Mode.
Relacing the rollers without adjustment reset may cause a darker image problem, because
the adjustments was intended to suit the previously equipped rollers and will not suit the new
rollers.
Refer to the related section for further details for the function.
[8. 5. 4.112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No.652)] on page 8-129
[8. 10. 2. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode] on page 8-160
5-32
K116sm5e4
5. 2. 3
Replacement of Roller Supply
1. Remove Blade Roller and Roller Developer

from Developer Unit making reference to
[5. 2. 2 Replacement of Developer Unit Components]
on the page 5-10.
2. Remove Retaining Ring-E (1: E10) to remove Bearing (2).
2
1
3. On the electrode plate side, remove Retaining Ring-E (3: E10) to remove Bearing (4).
4
3
4. Turn the whole Developer Unit frame to the arrow direction to be laid down.
5-33
K116sm5e5
5. Remove 9 screws (5) to remove Frame 2 (6).
6. Remove 2 screws (7) to remove Bracket Assy (8).
8
7
5-34
K116sm5e5
7. Remove Toner Supply Roller (9).

9
NOTE
(1) Sheet 6 (10), Sheet 5 (11), Seal R Assy or
Seal L Assy (12) are attached on each side
shaft of Roller Supply.
12: reuse
Remove them from the old Roller Supply and

then install them to the new Roller Supply.
(Be careful not to dispose them.)
10
11
(2) Note the installation direction. The shaft with three grooves should be placed to the
driving side.
groove
driving side
5-35
K116sm5e5
5. 2. 4
Replacement of Screw Assy
1. Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machine

3. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (3) which fix the Hopper Assembly (4).
3
3
5-36
K116sm5e5
5. Remove Separator (5).

5
6. Remove all the toner from Developer Unit.
NOTE
Do not reuse the removed toner.
7. Remove 5 screws (6: M4x8) (7: M4x6) to remove Pin 4 (8), Plate (9), Collar (10).
10
9
8
6
8. Remove Retaining Ring-E (11: E7) to remove Spacer (12), Gear 16T-34T (13).
13
11
12
5-37
11
K116sm5e5
9. Remove Retaining Ring-E (14: E5) (15: E7) to remove Washer (16), Gear 15T (17), Gear 16T
(18) and Parallel Pin (19).
15
20
16
17
16
19
18
15
10. Remove Retaining Ring-E (20) to remove Washer (21) and Bush (22).
20
22
21
20
23
24
12. Remove Retaining Ring-E (25) to remove Washer (26) and Bush (27).
25
27
26
5-38
25
K116sm5e5
13. Remove Screw A Assy (28: near Roller Supply), Screw B Assy (29: far from Roller Supply).
Remove Side Seal (30) and Washer (31) on both ends of Screw A Assy (28) and Screw B
Assy (29).
28
29
31
29
28
30
31
30
29
29
28
28
5-39
K116sm5e5
14. Remove each 2 screws (32: M3x5) to remove Screw A (33) / Screw B (34).
32
34
32
33
NOTE
When replacing Screw A (33) / Screw B (34), please note the followings.
(1) Note the twisting direction around the shaft.
(2) Each Screw A (33) / Screw B (34) has a 3 twist between the screws (32).
32
32
(3) Screw A (33) / Screw B (34) are fragile. Gently turn the screws (32) to fix Screw A (33) /
Screw B (34).
Screw B Assy (far from Roller Supply)
32
32
34
32
33
32
Screw A Assy (near Roller Supply)
5-40
K116sm5e5
15. Replace all the components except Separator (5) and Hopper Assy (4) in position.
16. Shake the Starting Toner Bottle (35) well, and evenly add the toner to Developer Unit.
35
5-41
K116sm5e5
Do not push it in.
5
to be placed
along the guide
NOTE
at this time. Doing so may damage Screw A (33) and Screw B (34).
Unseated
33
5
34
5-42
K116sm5e5
Handle (36).
36
36
NOTE
Developer Handle.
If not in position, the plastic screwing sheets may be damaged at the next step.
Wrong:
Unseated
Correct:
Seated
5
5
4
2
5-43
K116sm5e5
5. 2. 5
Replacement of DC Motor
1. Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw (1) to remove the Cover 2 (2).

1
2. Disconnect the connector (3), remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (4), and then remove the motor
assembly.
4
3. Pressing the stoppers (5) inside, remove the Joint R (6).
5-44
K116sm5e6
4. Remove 3 pieces of 3x20 screw (7) to remove the Bracket 19 (8).

Replace the DC Motor (9) with the new one.
5-45
K116sm5e6
5. 2. 6
Replacement of Sensor (TLS1)

2. Disconnect the connector (2), and then remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (3) to remove the
Sensor (4).
Replace the Sensor (4) with the new one.
2
4
3
5-46
K116sm5e6
5. 2. 7
Adjustment of the space between gears

(Necessary to adjust after replacing the
Developer Unit)
NOTE
You do not have to adjust the space between gears basically as it has been adjusted in the
factory.
But please do it only when you replace the whole Developer Unit.
The Developer Unit is driven by the Gear Helical 20T on the machine and the Gear Helical 28T on
the Developer Unit.
There must be a little mechanical play between these gears. (In another word there must be a little
space between them.)
Gear Helical 20T
Gear Helical 28T
If there is no space between these gears, the gear may be broken.

In this case it is necessary to add Adjustment Plates to keep a space.
Not correct
Correct
Add Adjustment Plates.

There is not enough
space between gears.
(Gears may be broken)
Some space is kept between

gears.
Refer to the next page how to add the Adjustment Plates.

5-47
K116sm5e6

2. Remove 2 screws (2) to remove each Bracket 32 (3) on the left and Bracket 33 (4) on the right.
You will find Adjustment Plate (5) and Adjustment Plate 2 (6).
5-48
K116sm5e6
3. On the left side, add (or remove) as many Adjustment Plate (5) as required, cover them with
the Bracket 32 (3), and then fix with 2 screws (2).
NOTE
The following 3 kinds of Spacers are used on the left side of the machine.
Spacer
Spacer 5
Spacer 3
Z053101200 (thickness is 0.05mm)

Z053101350 (0.1mm)
Z053101330 (0.2mm)
5-49
K116sm5e6
4. On the right side, add (or remove) as many Adjustment Plate 2 (6) as required, cover them with
the Bracket 33 (4), and then fix with 2 screws (2).
NOTE
The following 3 kinds of Spacers are used on the left side of the machine.
Spacer 2
Spacer 6
Spacer 4
Z053101210 (thickness is 0.05mm)

Z053101360 (0.1mm)
Z053101340 (0.2mm)
5-50
K116sm5e6
5. Put back the Developer Unit (1) to the machine.
6. There is Gear Helical 28T (7) on Developer Unit side. There is Gear Helical 20T (8) on Engine
Unit, and also there is Gear Helical 34T (9) on Engine Unit.
Gear Helical 28T (7) and Gear Helical 20T (8) are contacted each other when the Developer
Unit is on the machine. Gear Helical 34T (9) drives Gear Helical 20T (8).
(Top of Engine Unit)
9
(Bottom of Engine Unit)
5-51
K116sm5e6
Holding the Gear Helical 28T (7) firmly with one hand, move the Gear Helical 34T (9) with
another hand whether there is any mechanical play between Gear Helical 28T (7) and
Gear Helical 20T (8).
Hold the Gear Helical 28T with one hand.
Move Gear Helical 34T (instead of Gear Helical 20T) with another hand.
7. There must be a little mechanical play between Gear Helical 28T (7) and Gear Helical 20T (8).
(In another word there must be a little space between them.)
If the gear could not be moved at all when you check them on the former procedure 6, it means
there is not enough space between gears. The gear may be broken in this case.
In this case, add more Adjustment Plates by the way instructed at the procedures 3 and 4.
Add Adjustment Plates

There is not enough
space between gears.
(Gears are not movable)
The space between gears

becomes wider.
(Gears become movable)
5-52
K116sm5e6
5. 2. 8
Readjustment of the Pressure of Regulation

Roller
If the pressure of Blade Roller is weak, the toner layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker
than required when you rotate the Developer Roller.
Pressurize the Blade Roller in the correct way as shown below in this case.
(You will not be able to pressurize it successfully by the usual way of pressurization once a too
thick toner layer is created.)
To correct the pressure of Blade Roller against Developer Roller, remove the thicker toner layer on
the contact point between Blade Roller and Developer Roller.
2
3
5-53
K116sm5e7
4
5. Remove 3 pieces of M4x6 screws (5) to remove Cover (6).
5
6
6. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) to remove Scraper Assembly (8).
5-54
K116sm5e7
7. On the driving side, remove Retaining Ring-C (9: C6) to remove Gear Helical 30T (10), Parallel
Pin (11: 2.5x10) and Collar 3 (12) from Blade Roller shaft.
10
12
11
10
NOTE
Blade Roller (13) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (14) by Bracket 4 (15) on
the driving side, by Bracket 5 (16) on the electrode plate side. When reassembling, repressurization should be required prior to reinstallation of Gear Helical 30T (10).
14
13
14
not pressurized
13
pressurized
16
15
5-55
K116sm5e7
8. Remove 5 screws (17: M4x8) (18: M4x6) to remove Pin 4 (19), Plate 9 (20), Collar (21).
18
21
20
18
17
19
9. Remove Washer (22: 8.1x14x0.5t) and Gear 29T-34T Assy (23)
22
23
22
10. Remove Helical 30T (24) and Parallel Pin (25: 3x20) from Toner Supply Roller shaft.
If you cannot remove Parallel Pin (25) at this time, remove it after the later step 12.
25
24
25
11. Remove Retaining Ring-E (26: E7) to remove Washer (27: 8.1x12x0.2t) and Gear Helical 28T
Assy (28).
28
26
27
5-56
26
K116sm5e7
12. Remove Retaining Ring-E (29: E10) to remove Washer (30: 12.2x20x0.5t) and Counter Roller
(31) from Developer Roller shaft.
29
31
30
29
32
17
33
34
35
15. Remove 3 screws (36: M4x6) and 2 Retaining Ring-E (37: E10) to remove Bracket 10 Assy
(38) and Collar (39).
37
39
38
37
36
5-57
K116sm5e7
41
40
40
17. Remove Washer (42: 12.1x20x0.2t), Gear Helical 25T (43), Parallel Pin (44: 3x16), Counter
Roller (45) from Developer Roller shaft.
42
45
44
43
42
46
16
47
19. Loosen 2 screws (48) to remove Bracket 19 (49).

48
49
5-58
K116sm5e7
20. On the driving side, remove 1 pan head screw (50: M4x8 W/ SW FW) to remove 1 flat washer
(51: M4) and Bracket 6 Assy (52).
50
52
51
21. On the electrode plate side, remove 1 pan head screw (53: M4x8 W/ SW FW) and Retaining
Ring-E (54: E8) to remove Washer (55: 10.1x16x0.5t), Flat Washer (56: M4), Bracket 7 Assy
(59).
53
57
54
56
55
22. Remove Blade Roller (13) from Developer Unit.

Clean Blade Roller if it gets dirt.
13
13
13
5-59
K116sm5e7
NOTE
Blade Roller shaft.
59
58
(2) Note the reinstallation direction. The longer shaft should be placed to the driving side.
driving side
(2) Seal 1 (60) on each side should be seated in position along the boss (61).
60
61
out of position
0
Correct
Wrong
5-60
K116sm5e7
23. On Developer Roller (14), vacuum the toner around the contact point against Blade Roller (13).
Vacuum toner stuck
around the contact area
13
14
NOTE
If some toner remains on the surface of Roller Developer, the toner will cushion the pressure
by Blade Roller. This will prevent a proper pressurization.
31. Reinstall Scraper Assembly (8).
NOTE
(1) For Scraper Assembly and Blade Roller, please reinstall Scraper Assembly first and then
locate Blade Roller in position later. This will avoid making Scrapers edge waving.
(2) After reinstalling Scraper Assembly, check
that neither Scraper (62) nor Seal 1 (60) flips
up on both sides.
62
60
(3) Tighten the screws (7) with pushing Scraper Assembly (8) to the arrow direction to be
close to Blade Roller.
5-61
K116sm5e7
25. Reinstall Blade Roller.
NOTE
(1) Push Blade Roller (13) against Seal 1 (A) on
the driving side to hold and keep its original
position, then push on the electrode plate side
(B).
60
(Scraper Assembly omitted in the right picture)
13

Blade Roller shaft.
59
13
58
(3) After locating, check that Seal 1 (60), Sheet
(58), Sheet 2 (59) are not damaged or
deformed.
62
(4) After locating, check that Scraper (62) is not

wavy.
61
13
(5) Blade Roller (13) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (14) by Bracket 4 (on
the driving side) and Bracket 5 (on the electrode plate side).
Now Blade Roller (13) has been located in position, it should be pressed onto Roller
Developer (14) at the later step.
14
13
14
not pressurized
13
pressurized
5-62
K116sm5e7
26. Replace all the components except Gear Helical 30T (10) and Hopper Assy (3) in position.
27. Make sure that the 6 screws (46) (53) (32) (50) are installed loose.
46
32
53
50
28. On the electrode plate side, fully press down the

top of Bracket 5 (16). With pressing, tighten 2
screws (46) to secure Bracket 5 (16).
46
16
46
29. On the driving side, fully press down the top of

Bracket 4 (15). With pressing, tighten 2 screws
(32) to secure Bracket 4 (15).
15
32
32
5-63
K116sm5e7
50
released
held
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw (50) (53 on the next step) firmly at this time. Otherwise proper and
even pressurization of Blade Roller between both the sides may be failed, and this will make
the toner layer on Developer Roller get thicker than required.
53
released
held
50
held
thrust
53
held
5-64
thrust
K116sm5e7

Assy (52).
50
52
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw (50) (53) quickly at this time. Otherwise proper and even
toner layer on Developer Roller get thicker than required.
Assy (57).
53
57
36. On the driving side, reinstall Collar 3 (12), Parallel Pin, Gear Helical 30T (10) and Retaining
Ring-E to Blade Roller shaft.
10
12
5-65
K116sm5e7
37. Install Developer Handle (63) to Developer Roller

shaft. Rotate Developer Roller several times so
that the roller surface is covered with the toner.
63
NOTE
If the pressures of Blade Roller on either or both sides are weaker than required, the toner
layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker than required when you rotate the Roller
Developer.
Retry to pressurize the Blade Roller in the correct way in this case.
4
2
5-66
K116sm5e7
5. 3
5. 3. 1
Fuser Unit
Removal of Fuser Unit
1
5-67
K116sm5e8
4
4
5. Remove Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6).
6. Disconnect 4 connectors (7).
5-68
K116sm5e8
7. There are 2 pieces of Bracket (8) on the back of the machine.

Remove the screws (9) (10) to remove both Bracket (8).
10
8. Open Cover Assembly (11). Loosen 1 screw (12) fixing Fuser Unit inside the machine.
12
11
9. With Engine Unit open, remove Fuser Unit (13).

2427
13
5-69
K116sm5e8
NOTE
To reinstall Fuser Unit, follow the instruction below.
(1) With Engine Unit open, mount Fuser Unit (13) to the machine.
(2) On the left side of the machine, rotate Pulley (14) counterclockwise to check the gear
engagement between Fuser Unit and the machine.
If the gears on Fuser Unit and Pulley (14) do not move together, the engagement may fail.
With pushing Fuser Unit (13) to the machine inside, rotate Pulley (14) again to obtain the
correct engagement.
gears
13
14
14
13:
Cover Assembly
omitted
(3) Install Bracket (8) with the screws (9) (10).

9
8
10
(4) Open Cover Assembly (11) and tighten the screw (12) to fix Fuser Unit (13) to the
machine.
12
13
11
(5) Replace Cover Assembly (11), the connectors (7), Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6).
Close Engine Unit.
5-70
K116sm5e8
5. 3. 2
Replacement of Fuser Unit Components
NOTE
The following parts are Fuser Unit components.
A periodic replacement for them is recommended.
This section shows how to replace all of them in one sequent operation.
Item
Roller Fusing
Bush
Nail Stripping (Upper)
Nail Lower
Number
of article
1
2
13
6
Remarks
Fuser Maintenance Kit (Z160980040)
1
5-71
K116sm5e8
4
4
5-72
K116sm5e8
8. Remove 1 screw (10: M4x6) to remove Plate (11) on the left side.
10
11
NOTE
(1) Please remove the Plate (11) while holding Cover Assembly (8).
Otherwise you may drop the Cover Assembly.
(2) There is the Plate 2 on the right side of machine, which is a symmetric part of Plate (11).
You may remove it instead of Plate (11).
9. Remove the Cover Assembly (8).
8
8
10. Remove the 4x6 screw (12) to remove each Nail Stripping Assembly (13).
13
13
12
5-73
K116sm5e8
11. Disassemble the Nail Stripping Assembly as the following photo.

Replace the Nail Stripping (14) with the new one.
14
12. There are 2 pieces of the bracket (15) on the back of the machine.
Remove the screws (16) to remove both Bracket (15).
16
16
15
17
17
5-74
K116sm5e8
NOTE
correct engagement.
gears
17
17:
18
18
Cover Assembly
omitted
(3) Install Bracket (15) with the screws (16).

16
15
16
(4) Tighten the screw (9) to fix Fuser Unit (17) to the machine.
17
Close Engine Unit.
5-75
K116sm5e8
15. Disconnect the connectors (19). Remove 4 screws (20) to release IR Lamps (21).
Remove 2 screws (22) to release the connector brackets.
22
20
21
19
20
22
21
19
16. Remove Cover (23) on both sides of Roller Fusing.

Gently pull IR Lamps (24: red) (25: white) toward either way to remove them.
23
23
24
24
25
25
5-76
K116sm5e8
NOTE
(1) Do not touch the glass part of the Lamp with a bare hand.
(2) Do not interchange the IR Lamps. One with red connectors (24) should be installed to the
media entrance side, and the other with white connectors (25) to the media exit side.
25
24
exit
24
entrance
25
entrance
exit
(3) There is a bubble on the glass part of IR Lamp.

When the bubbles of both IR Lamps touch each other, IR Lamps will be broken because
of the vibration or heat.
Make sure to make these bubbles face to the other directions, or please install the IR
Lamps so that the bubbles will be located far from each other.
cross section of bubble part
Correct
Correct
Wrong:
touching
17. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (26) to release Bracket 10 Assy (27).
26
27
5-77
K116sm5e8
18. On both sides, remove 4 grip rings (28) to remove Arm 4 (29) and Arm 3 (30).
28
29
30
28
19. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (31) to remove Cover 2 (32). Disconnect the harness
(33).
33
32
31
20. Remove 2 screws (34) to remove Bracket 6 Assy (35).
34
35
35
5-78
K116sm5e9
21. On the gear side, remove 1 screw (36) to remove Bracket 20 (37).
36
37
22. Remove 2 screws (38) to remove Bracket 7 Assy (39).

39
38
23. Remove 2 screws (40) on the media exit side.
40
40
5-79
K116sm5e9
24. On the connector side, loosen 1 screw (41) to release Bracket 2 (42).
42
42
41
25. On the gear side, loosen 1 screw (43) to release Bracket 3 (44).
44
44
43
NOTE
Reinstall Bracket 2 (42) and Bracket 3 (44) in the correct position.
(1) Fully push to slide the bracket to the arrow direction so that the fold portion on the bracket
will fit into the notch on Fuser Upper Unit.
(2) The 2 positioning bosses locate the bracket. The bracket should not ride over them.
fold
boss
5-80
K116sm5e9
26. On the media entrance side, remove 2 screws (45) to release Thermostat Bracket (46).
45
46
27. Turn Fuser Upper Unit (47) to the back. Lift Fuser Upper Unit (47) upward to remove it.
47
47
NOTE
Place Fuser Upper Unit in the direction as removed for protecting Thermostat / Thermistor.
28. On the gear side of Fuser Upper Unit, remove Retaining Ring-E (48) to remove Gear 30T (49).
48
49
5-81
K116sm5e9
29. Remove Stopper (50) to remove Gear 60T (51).

51
50
51
50
30. Remove 2 screws (52) to remove Bearing Holder (53).
52
53
31. On the connector side of Fuser Upper Unit, remove 2 screws (54) to remove Bearing Holder
(55).
54
55
32. On both sides, remove Bush (56).

Replace Bush with new ones.
56
56
5-82
K116sm5e9
33. Remove Roller Fusing (57).
57
57
NOTE
Install Roller Fusing to the frame in the correct
direction. One end with a cutting should be place
to the gear side.
cutting
34. Remove 1 screw (58) to remove Collar (59) from Roller Fusing (60).
Replace Roller Fusing with a new one.
60
58
5-83
59
K116sm5e9
35. On the media exit side of Fuser Lower Unit, remove 2 screws (61) to remove Guide Plate 2
Assy (62).
61
61
62
62
36. Remove 1 screw (63) to remove each Nail Lower Assy (64).
63
64
5-84
K116sm5e9
37. Turn Nail Lower (65) to remove it from the bracket.

Replace Nail Lower with a new one.
65
65
5-85
K116sm5e9
5. 3. 3
Replacement of Roller Pressure
1
4
4
5-86
K116sm5eA
5-87
K116sm5eA
10
11
NOTE
8
8
5-88
K116sm5eA
10. There are 2 pieces of the brackets (12) on the back of the machine.
Remove the screws (13) (14) to remove both Bracket (12).
14
13
12
15
15
5-89
K116sm5eA
NOTE
correct engagement.
gears
15
15:
16
16
Cover Assembly
omitted
(3) Install Bracket (12) with the screws (13) (14).

13
12
14
(4) Tighten the screw (9) to fix Fuser Unit to the machine.
15
Close Engine Unit.
5-90
K116sm5eA
12. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (17) to release Bracket 10 Assy (18).
17
18
13. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (19) to remove Cover 2 (20). Disconnect the harness
(21).
21
19
20
14. Remove 2 screws (22) on the media exit side.
22
22
5-91
K116sm5eA
15. On both sides, remove 4 grip rings (23) to remove Arm 4 (24) and Arm 3 (25).
24
23
23
25
16. On the connector side, loosen 1 screw (26) to release Bracket 2 (27).
27
27
26
17. On the gear side, loosen 1 screw (28) to release Bracket 3 (29).
29
29
28
5-92
K116sm5eA
NOTE
Reinstall Bracket 2 (27) and Bracket 3 (29) in the correct position.
(1) Fully push the bracket to the arrow direction so that the fold portion on the bracket will fit
into the notch on Fuser Upper Unit.
(2) The 2 positioning bosses locate the bracket.
The bracket should not ride over them.
fold
boss
18. Turn Fuser Upper Unit (30) to the back. Lift Fuser Upper Unit upward to remove it.
30
30
NOTE
Place Fuser Upper Unit in the direction as removed for protecting Thermostat/Thermistor.
5-93
K116sm5eA
19. On the media exit side of Fuser Lower Unit, remove 2 screws (31) to remove Guide Plate 2
Assy (32).
31
31
32
32
20. Remove 2 screws (33) to remove Washer (34) and Guide Plate (35).
34
33
33
35
NOTE
When reassembling, make sure that the holes of Guide Plate fit the bosses on the frame.
5-94
K116sm5eA
21. Remove Pressure Roller Assy (36) from the unit.
36
22. Remove Retaining Ring-C (37) to remove Collar (38) (39: only on the gear side), Bearing (40)
from each shaft end of Roller Pressure (41).
Replace Roller Pressure with a new one.
(gear side)
(connector side)
37
37
39
37
38
40
41
5-95
40
38
37
K116sm5eA
5. 3. 4
Replacement of Thermistor (TH1, TH2)
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine

Fuser Unit] on the page 5-67.
1
1
2. Release the harness from the clamps (2).
Remove the connector (3: TH1, white) (4: TH2, black) from Bracket 10 Assy (5).
2
5
4
2
3. Release the harness from the clapms (6).
6
5-95
K116sm5eB
4. Remove 1 screw (7) to release Thermistor 3 Assy (8: TH1, long harness) and Thermistor Assy
(9: TH3, short harness).
7
5. Remove Thermistor form the bracket.

Replace Thermistor or Thermistor 3 with a
new one.
NOTE
Be careful of the direction of Thermistor when
reassembling.
The projection (10) nearer to the harness should
be inserted to the positioning hole (11).
10
11
5-96
K116sm5eB
5. 3. 5
Replacement of Thermostat
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine

2. Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (2) to remove Thermostat Assy (3).

3
2
3. Remove 2 pieces of 3x4 screw (4) to remove the Thermostat (5).
Replace the Thermostat (5) with the new one.
5-97
K116sm5eB
5. 3. 6
Replacement of Exit Sensor
1
4
4
5-98
K116sm5eB
5-99
K116sm5eB
10
11
NOTE
8
8
5-100
K116sm5eB
10. Remove the harness (12) and remove the screw (13) to remove Exit Sensor Assy (14).
Remove Exit Sensor (15) form Exit Sensor Assy (14). Replace Exit Sensor with a new one.
12
14
13
15
5-101
K116sm5eB
5. 4
Roll Deck
5. 4. 1
Replacement of Cutter Assembly
1. Draw out the Roll Deck (1).
2. Remove 4 screws (2) to remove Cover 1 (3).
NOTE
Make sure to insert the hooking part to the slit as
the following photo when you put back the Cover
1 (3).
hook
5-102
K116sm5eC

4
NOTE
Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 14 (5) is inside the bottom frame.
step
frame
5. Open the wire saddle (6) and disconnect the connector (7) to release the harness.
5-103
K116sm5eC
6. Remove 2 screws on the front (8) to remove Cutter Assy (9).

Replace Cutter Assy with a new one.
9
NOTE
(1) Put the Cutter Assembly with the Cutter Motor up.
If you put it with the Cutter Motor down, you will break the Cutter Motor Harness.
Harness may
be broken.
Good
No good
(2) There is the Height Guide (10) on the right side.

Please fix the Cutter Assembly aligning the plate (11) and the central line of Height
Guide (10) each other.
11
5-104
10
K116sm5eC
5. 4. 2
Replacement of Clutches (CL3, CL4, CL5) of

Roll 1

2
NOTE
step
frame
5-105
K116sm5eC
3. Remove Retaining Ring-C (4) and disconnect the harness (5) to remove each Clutch (6: CL3)
or Clutch (7: CL4).
Replace Clutch with a new one.
6
5
4
6, 7
4. Remove 2 screws (8) and disconnect the harness (9) to remove Clutch (10: CL5).
9
10
10
5-106
K116sm5eC
5. 4. 3
Replacement of Clutches (CL6, CL7) of Roll 2

3
NOTE
step
3
frame
5-107
K116sm5eC
6
5
9
8
5-108
K116sm5eC
5. 4. 4
Replacement of Timing Belt 633

2
NOTE
step
frame
5-109
K116sm5eC
3. Open 6 wire saddles (4) and release 4 connectors (5) to release the harness (6).
4
5
5
6
4. Remove Retaining Ring-C (7) to remove Clutch (8: CL4).
5. Remove 4 screws (9) to remove Bracket 33 (10).

10
5-110
K116sm5eC
11
12
7. Loosen 1 screw (13) to release Pulley 3 (14). Remove Timing Belt 633 (15).
Replace Timing Belt 633 with a new one.
13
15
14
14
15
NOTE
You do not have to adjust the belt tension.
As the Spring Coil 12 (16) gives a proper tension
to the Timing Belt 480, tighten the screw (14).
5-111
16
14
K116sm5eC
5. 4. 5

2
2
3
NOTE
step
frame
5-112
K116sm5eC
3. Loosen 1 screw (4) to release Pulley 3 (5). Move Pulley 3 (5) upward and fix it the screw (4) to
release Timing Belt 453.
5
4

Replace Timing Belt 453 (8) with a new one.
7
8
6
8
NOTE
You do not have to adjust the belt tension.
As the Spring Coil 11 (9) gives a proper tension
to the Timing Belt 480, tighten the screw (4).
4
5-113
K116sm5eC
5. 4. 6
1
2
2
3
NOTE
Make sure that the step part on the bottom side
of Cover 22 (3) is inside the bottom frame.
step
frame
3. Remove Retaining Ring-E (4) to remove Collar (5). Remove Timing Belt 330 (6).
Replace Timing Belt 330 with a new one.
6
4
6
5
5-114
K116sm5eC
5. 4. 7
Replacement of Sensor (PH6, PH7, PH9, PH12)

Remove a roll media if mounted.
2. Remove 1 screw (2) to release the sensor bracket. Remove and replace Sensor (3: PH6) with
a new one.
3. Remove 8 screws (4) to remove Plate (5).

4
5
5-115
K116sm5eD
a new one.
a new one.
9
8
5-116
K116sm5eD
6. Remove 1 screw (10) to release the sensor bracket. Remove and replace Sensor (11: PH9)
with a new one.
11
10
5-117
K116sm5eD
5. 4. 8
Replacement of Sensor (PH8)

2
NOTE
step
frame
3. Remove 1 screw (4) and disconnect the harness (5). Remove and replace Sensor (6: PH8)
with a new one.
6
5-118
K116sm5eD
5. 4. 9
Replacement of Sensor (PH10)
2. Remove 3 screws (2) to remove Cover (3).

3
NOTE
step
3
frame
3. Remove 1 screw (4) and disconnect the harness (5). Remove and replace Sensor (6: PH10)
with a new one.
5
4
5-119
K116sm5eD
5. 4. 10 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 1)

2. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the middle.

3
5-120
K116sm5eD

5
5
6
NOTE
step
frame
5. Disconnect 1 connector (7).
5-121
K116sm5eD
6. Remove 6 screws (8). Move Heater Assy 1 (9) to the arrow direction to remove it.
8
7. Remove 2 screws (10) and 1 connector (11) from each Resistor (12).
Replace Resistor with a new one.
12
10
12
10
11
10
11
5-122
K116sm5eD
5. 4. 11 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 2)

3
4. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the far end.
5-123
K116sm5eD
5. Remove 2 screws (4) to remove Slide Guide 2 R Assy (5).

4
6. Remove 1 screw (6) to move Cover 7 (7).
7
7
7. Disconnect 1 connector (8).
5-124
K116sm5eD
8. Move Cover 4 (9) to the arrow direction to remove it.

9
9. Remove 3 screws (10). Move Case Assy (11) to the arrow direction to remove it.
10
11
11
5-125
K116sm5eD
10. Disconnect 1 connector (12). Remove 2 screws (13).

Remove and replace Resistor with a new one.
12
12
13
13
5-126
K116sm5eD
5. 4.12
5. 4. 12. 1
Installation of Dehumidify Heater Kit

Installation of 1 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N :Z168080040)
1. Confirm the following parts are included in the kit.

Item
Case Assy
Number of article
1
Item
4x6 Bind Screw
Number of article
10
Bush
Bracket 23 Assy
Snap Band
Bracket Connector 2 Assy
Switch Label
Label
1
1
Switch
4x6 Bind Screw (Fe+Ni)

Tooth Washer
5-127
K116sm5eE


3
5-128
K116sm5eE
5. Install Case Assy (5) to Roll Deck with 6 Bind Head Screws (6).
5
5-129
K116sm5eE
6. Replace Cover 15 (4).

7
7
8
NOTE
step
frame

10
5-130
K116sm5eE
9. Attach 2 Bush (11) to the square holes on the right side of Roll Deck.
11
rear
front
10. Put the harness (12) of Bracket 23 Assy (13) through the rear bush to the bottom side.
13
12
10. Install Bracket 23 Assy (13) with 2 Bind Head Screws (14).
13
14
12. Put the harness (12) through the front bush to the upper side.
front
12
5-131
K116sm5eE
13. Connect J109 connector (15) to the connector of Heater Assy 1 (16).
16
15
15
14. Tie the harness firmly with the snap bands (17).
17
15. Replace Cover 9 (10).
10
18
5-132
K116sm5eE
19
19
19
20
18. Remove 2 screws (21: M3x6) to remove Cover 5 (22).
21
22
5-133
K116sm5eE
19. Install Bracket Connector 2 Assy (23) with 2 Bind Head Screws (24).
23
23
24
20. Apply Switch Label (25) and Label (26). Install Switch (27) to the square hole.
(The white dot should be upside.)
27
25
26
25
27
26
27
5-134
K116sm5eE
21. Put the harness (28) of Bracket Connector 2 Assy through the square hole from rear to front.
Connect the connectors (29).
28
29
28
22. Fix the ground wires (30) with 2 Tooth Washer Screws (31).
31
30
23. Replace all the parts in position.
5-135
K116sm5eE
5. 4. 12. 2
Installation of 2 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N :Z168080050)

Item
Case Assy
Number of article
1
AC Paper Harness 2
Item
Number of article
1
Bush
4x6 Bind Screw

5-136
K116sm5eE
3
5. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the far end.
6. Remove 2 screws (4) to remove Slide Guide 2 R Assy (5).

4
7. Remove 1 screw (6) to move Cover 7 (7).

6
7
5-137
K116sm5eE
8. Move Cover 4 (9) to the arrow direction to remove it.

9
9. Install Case Assy (10) to Roll Deck with 3 Bind Head Screws (11).
10
11
10
5-138
K116sm5eE
10. Replace Cover 4 (9) and Slide Guide 2 R Assy (5).

5

12
12
13
12
NOTE
step
frame
13
12. Attach Bush (14) to the square holes on the right side of Roll Deck.
14
14
5-139
K116sm5eE
13. Pass AC Paper Harness 2 (15) through and connect its J125 connector to the connector (16).
16
15
NOTE
There are labels at both sides of the AC Paper
Harness 2.
Please connect J125 to the connector.
14. Connect the other end of AC Paper Harness 2 to the connector (17) of Case Assy.
17
5-140
K116sm5eE
5. 4.13
Installation of Roll Deck 2 Kit

It is possible to install two Roll Deck Units to the KIP 3100 in maximum.
If your KIP 3100 is installed with only one unit, it is possible to add one more unit optionally.
NOTE
After installing the Kit it is necessary to make the KIP 3100 recognize the Roll Deck 2 in the
Service Mode, which you can do in the Item Number 058 of the Adjustment Mode.
Refer to [8.5.4.31 Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No.058)] on the page 8-60.
Item
Roll Deck 2 Drive Assy
Number of article
1
Item
Roll Deck 2 Assy
Number of article
1
Guide Plate
Bracket 7
Bracket 9 Assy
Bracket 45 Assy
Spring 11
Timing Belt 453
Bracket 5 Assy
5-141
K116sm5eF
Item
Bracket 12
Number of article
1
Bind Head Screw (M4x6)
26
Item
Cover 16
Cap Assy
Number of article
1
2
The machine will
have the same 4 Cap
Assy totally.
1. Pull up Lever 2 (1) to open Engine Unit.
1
2. Remove 2 screws (2) on the front.
5-142
K116sm5eF
3. Remove 4 screws (3) on the sides.
4. Remove 5 screws (4) on the rear.
4
4
6. Close Engine Unit.
5-143
K116sm5eF

8. Remove 1 screw (8) and loosen 1 screw (9) on each side.
9
9
9. Turn Bracket 26 (10) on the screw (9) in a 180 degree arc like the arrow direction.
10
10
5-144
K116sm5eF
NOTE
This is the limited position of Bracket 26 (10).
You can not open the Roll Deck so widely in this
situation because the Stopper restricts to do so.
Limited position
vacant
10
Free position
This is the free position of Bracket 26 (10).

You can open the Roll Deck widely in this
situation.
10
vacant
10. Fix Bracket 26 in the free position with the screws (8) (9).
8
8
9
9
5-145
K116sm5eF

12
11
11
NOTE
step
12
frame

13
13
14
13
NOTE
step
frame
5-146
14
K116sm5eF
16
15
NOTE
Make sure to insert the hooking part (17) to the
slit as the following photo when you put back the
Cover 1.
17
5-147
K116sm5eF
14. Mount Roll Deck 2 Drive Assy (18) onto the railing at the front bottom of Roll Deck.
18
18
NOTE
Be careful not to hit the gear (19) to the cutting on the frame.
19
15. Secure Roll Deck 2 Drive Assy with 2 Bind Head Screws (20).
20
5-148
K116sm5eF
16. Remove 1 screw (21) to remove Cover 7 (22) from Roll Deck 2 Assy (23).
21
23
22
17. Mount Roll Deck 2 Assy (23) to the rails of the back of Roll Deck 1.
23
23
18. Secure Roll Deck 2 Assy to the rails with 2 Bind Head Screws (24) from the upper.
24
24
5-149
K116sm5eF
19. Install Cover 7 (22) to the original position with the screw (21).
21
22
22
20. Pushing Roll Deck 2 Assy toward the front, secure it to the rear frame of Roll Deck 1 with 2
Bind Head Screws (25).
25
25
Left: from rear
Right: from front
21. Install Guide Plate (26) on the joint of the decks and fix it with 8 Bind Head Screws (27).
27
27
26
5-150
K116sm5eF
22. Install Bracket 7 (28) with 1 Bind Head Screw (29).
28
29
23. Install Bracket 9 Assy (30) on the left side with 2 Bind Head Screws (31)
31
30
5-151
K116sm5eF
24. Connect the harness (32) on Roll Deck 2 Assy to the connector of the rail.
32
25. Install Bracket 45 Assy (33) with 1 Bind Head Screw (34). Hook Spring 11 (35) on between
Bracket 45 Assy (33) and the latch. With pushing the pulley upward, fix it with the screw (34).
34
33
35
34
26. Place Bracket 5 Assy (36) and route Timing Belt 453 (37) on the gears.
37
5-152
36
K116sm5eF
27. Secure Bracket 5 Assy (36) with 3 Bind Head Screws (38).
38
36
38
38
28. Install Bracket 12 (39) to the gears with 2 Bind Head Screws (40).
39
40
29. Loosen the screw (34) to apply tension to Timing Belt 453 (37). After tensioning, tighten the
screw (34).
34
34
37: slack
37: tensioned
5-153
K116sm5eF
30. Install Cover 16 (41) with 3 Bind Head Screws (42).

42
41
NOTE
step
41
frame
31. Replace all the removed parts in position.
NOTE
After installing the Kit it is necessary to make the KIP 3100 recognize the Roll Deck 2 in the
Service Mode, which you can do in the Item Number 058 of the Adjustment Mode.
Refer to [8.5.4.31 Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No.058)] on the page 8-60.
5-154
K116sm5eF
5. 5
5. 5. 1
Photoconductive Drum
Replacement of the Photoconductive Drum
1
5-155
K116sm5eG

4
4
7. Remove the Guides 3 (7).

7
5-156
K116sm5eG
8
9
8
9. Disconnect the connector (10), and open the wire
saddles (11) to release the harness.
11
10
11
NOTE
Wind excessive length of the harnesses into loop with the wire saddles (11) in the way the
above picture shows.
Do not bundle the 2 cables in any of the wire saddles (11) together.
12
5-157
K116sm5eG
11. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14).
13
13
14
14
12. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward.
15
13. There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides, which lock the LED Head Frame.
Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame.
16
17
Lock position
Unlock position
5-158
K116sm5eG
14. Open the LED Head Frame (18).

18
NOTE
The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically
to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down.
19
Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if you

will close the LED Head Frame.
20
5-159
K116sm5eG
16. Remove the 4x6 screw (21), and remove the Plate (22) and Pulley Gear (23).
21
22
23
NOTE
The Belt 4 (24) is automatically loosed if you open
the Engine Unit.
It will be strained if you close the Engine Unit.
24
5-160
K116sm5eG
17. Remove the Collar (25) from the left Drum Shaft.
25
NOTE
The new (spare) Drum Assembly does not include the Collar (25).
So please reuse it.
18. There are 2 pieces of screw (26) on the left which fix the Block (27).
Loosen these screws (26) and rotate the Block (27) as the arrow marks.
26
27
NOTE
Loosen the screws (26) and (28: to be introduced in the next step) in a quarter turn to
release Block (27). An excess turn will prevent Block form efficient relocation.
Refer to [5.5.2 How to fix the Aluminium Blocks] on page 5-163.
5-161
K116sm5eG
19. Similarly loosen 2 pieces of screw (28) on the right and rotate the Block 2 (29) as the
arrow marks.
28
29
20. Remove the Photoconductive Drum (30), and replace it with the new one.
30
NOTE
The Aluminium Block (27) and (29) maintain the focus of the LED Head.
Therefore it is necessary to re-position them correctly after replacing the Photoconductive
Drum.
Please fix them making reference to [5.5.2 How to fix the Aluminium Blocks] on the
page 5-163.
5-162
K116sm5eG
5. 5. 2
How to fix the Aluminium Blocks
There are Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft.

As they maintain the focus of LED Head, it is necessary to re-position them correctly after
replacing the Photoconductive Drum.
Aluminium Blocks
Print out the Test Pattern No.3 to check if the Aluminium Blocks are fixed at the correct position.
The density of halftone is uniform as the following left image if the Aluminium Blocks are fixed at
the correct positions (focus is good).
But the density of halftone is different among image blocks as the following right image if blocks
are not fixed correctly (focus is not good).
Good
(Gray looks uniform)
No good
(Gray looks not uniform)
Density of halftone is different

among image blocks.
If the focus of LED Head is not good, fix the Aluminium Blocks properly making reference to the
next page.
5-163
K116sm5eG
There are Aluminium Blocks (A) (B) at both sides, and each of them is fixed with 2 screws (C) (D).
Left side
Right side
D
C
Do as follows to fix the Aluminium Blocks correctly.

a) Always fix the Aluminium Block of the left (A) first and then right (B).
b) When you tighten 2 screws (C) (D) to fix each Aluminium Block, always tighten the lower one
(C) first and then the upper one (D).
The following picture shows the order to tighten the screws. Tighten in the order as 1 to 4
necessarily.
2
Drum
1
Left side
3
Aluminium Blocks
Right side
NOTE
The focus of LED Head will become defective if you do not satisfy the above requirements.
Refer to the later pages for greater details.
5-164
K116sm5eG
1. Rotate the left Block (1) fully to the arrow direction (A: to front) and also press it to the arrow
direction (B: to outside). This will remove any gap between Block (1) and the side frame of the
machine.
With holding Block (1), tighten the screws (2) (3) just enough turn to fix Block (1) temporarily.
A
B
no gap
3
2
1
(Seen from the top of machine)
(Seen from the outside of machine)
NOTE
There should be no space between the Bearing and U-shape opening.
The LED focus will become defective if there is any space.
Correct
Incorrect

Space
2. Loosen the screws (2) (3) in a (approximately)
quarter turn to release Block (1). Check that no
excessive backlash to sideways appears.
3
2
5-165
K116sm5eG
3. Put your finger inside the U-shape opening (4) of Block (1). Put the other finger on the pin (5) of
the frame.
Push the fingers toward each other (C: inside). Note that the entire Block (1) is shifted towards
the pin (5) by the finger at the U-shape opening (4).
While pushing and holding, tighten the lower screw (2) and then the upper screw (3) to secure
Block (1).
1
4
4
3
2
5-166
K116sm5eG
4. Similarly to step 1, rotate the right Block (6) fully to the arrow direction (D: to front) and also
press it to the arrow direction (E: to outside). This will remove any gap between Block (6) and
the side frame of the machine.
With holding Block (6), tighten the screws (7) (8) just enough turn to fix Block (6) temporarily.
D
E
no gap
7
6
5. Loosen the screws (7) (8) in a (approximately) quarter turn to release Block (6). Check that no
excessive backlash to sideways appears.
8
7
5-167
K116sm5eG
6. Similarly to step 3, put your finger inside the U-shape opening (9) of Block (6) and put the other
finger on the pin (10) of the frame.
Push the fingers toward each other (F: inside). Note that the entire Block (6) is shifted towards
the pin (10) by the finger at the U-shape opening (9).
While pushing and holding, tighten the lower screw (7) and then the upper screw (8) to secure
Block (6).
9
10
10
8
7
7. Print out the Test Pattern No.3, and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform.
If it is still not uniform, fix Blocks again.
Good
No good
5-168
K116sm5eG
5. 5. 3
Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum
1. Remove the Photoconductive Drum from the

machine making reference to [5. 5. 1 Replacement
of the Photoconductive Drum] on the page 5-155.
2. Wipe the surface of Photoconductive Drum with a dry cloth.

3. If the toner strongly sticks on the surface and it is impossible to remove it, wipe with the cloth
impregnated with the alcohol.
4. After using the alcohol, wipe all surface of Drum with a cloth impregnated with water so that
there should be no unevenness of cleaning.
5. Wipe all surface of Drum with a dry cloth, and dry the Drum leaving in a dark place for about
10 minutes.
6. Put back the Drum to the machine.
NOTE
(1) A defective image may be printed right after the cleaning (about 10 to 20 sheets of A0),
but it will be fixed naturally as the time passes.
(2) Wipe the surface always to one direction.
You will damage the Drum if you wipe in other ways.
Good
No good
No good
5-169
No good
K116sm5eG
5. 5. 4
Replacement of Belt 4
1
2
2
2
3. Remove the Belt 4 (4).
NOTE
Belt 4 is automatically unfastened if only you open the Engine Unit.
5-170
K116sm5eG
5. 6
5. 6. 1
LED Head
Replacement of the LED Head Unit
1
5-171
K116sm5eH

4
4

7
5-172
K116sm5eH
8
9
8
11
10
11
NOTE
12
5-173
K116sm5eH
13
13
14
14
15
16
17
Lock position
Unlock position
5-174
K116sm5eH

18
NOTE
19

5-175
K116sm5eH
15. Remove the 4x6 screw (20) to remove the Fixing Bracket (21) on the right.
20
21
NOTE
You do not have to put back the Fixing Bracket (21) at the time of reassembly, because it is
a part required only before the delivery of machine.
16. Loosen 2 pieces of 4x10 screw (22) to make the Plate (23) enough movable.
23
22
22
5-176
K116sm5eH
17. Move the Plate (23) to the right to release the pin (24) of Corona Block.
Then remove the Image Corona Unit (25).
25
23
25
24
25

26
5-177
K116sm5eH
19. Remove the screw (27) to remove the Bracket 2 (28).
27
28
20. Move the right end of LED Head Unit (29) a little to the front side, and then slide the whole unit
to the right.
Replace the LED Head Unit (29) with the new one.
29
29
NOTE
It is necessary to check and adjust the focus of LED Head after its replacement.
Refer to [5. 6. 2 LED focus adjustment] on the page 5-179.
5-178
K116sm5eH
5. 6. 2
LED focus adjustment
Please adjust the focus of LED Head after the replacement of LED Head.
Also adjust it if you have lost the correct focus by some reason.
Adjust the focus by the following 3 steps.
(1) Check of the Test Pattern Image
(2) Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks
(3) Focus Adjustment with Spacers
5. 6. 2. 1
Check of the Test Pattern Image
Print out the Test Pattern No.3 in the Service Mode, and check its halftone image.
If the density of halftone is uniform as the following left image, you do not have to make anything
because the focus is correctly adjusted.
But it is different among image blocks as the following right image, it is necessary to adjust the
focus.
Go to [5. 6. 2. 2 Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks] on the next page in this case.
Good
No good
(Adjustment is required.)

among image blocks.
5-179
K116sm5eH
5. 6. 2. 2
Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks
There are Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft, which adjust the distance between
LED Head and Drum.
If the LED focus is not correct, at first it is necessary to place them at the correct positions in the
following way.
Aluminium Blocks
1
5-180
K116sm5eH

4
4
5-181
K116sm5eH

7
8
9
8
11
10
11
NOTE
12
5-182
K116sm5eH
13
13
14
14
15
16
17
Lock position
Unlock position
5-183
K116sm5eH

18
NOTE
19

20
5-184
K116sm5eH
16. Remove the 4x6 screw (21), and remove the Plate (22) and Pulley Gear (23).
21
22
23
NOTE
The Belt 4 (24) is automatically loosed if you open
the Engine Unit.
It will be strained if you close the Engine Unit.
24
5-185
K116sm5eH
17. There are Aluminium Blocks (A) (B) at both sides and each of them is fixed with 2 screws (C) (D).
Left side
Right side
D
C
Do as follows to fix the Aluminium Blocks correctly.

a) Always fix the Aluminium Block of the left (A) first and then right (B).
b) When you tighten 2 screws (C) (D) to fix each Aluminium Block, always tighten the lower one
(C) first and then the upper one (D).
The following picture shows the order to tighten the screws. Tighten in the order as 1 to 4
necessarily.
2
Drum
1
Left side
3
Aluminium Blocks
Right side
NOTE
The focus of LED Head will become defective if you do not satisfy the above requirements.
Refer to the later pages for greater details.
5-186
K116sm5eH
17-1. Rotate the left Block (25) fully to the arrow direction (A: to front) and also press it to the arrow
direction (B: to outside). This will remove any gap between Block (25) and the side frame of
the machine.
With holding Block (25), tighten the screws (26) (27) just enough turn to fix Block (1)
temporarily.
A
B
25
no gap
27
26
25
NOTE
There should be no space between the Bearing and U-shape notch.
The LED focus will become defective if there is any space.
Correct
Incorrect

Space
17-2. Loosen the screws (26) (27) in a
(approximately) quarter turn to release Block
(25). Check that no excessive backlash to
sideways appears.
25
27
26
5-187
K116sm5eH
17-3. Put your finger inside the U-shape opening (28) of Block (25). Put the other finger on the pin
(29) of the frame.
Push the fingers toward each other (C: inside). Note that the entire Block (25) is shifted
towards the pin (29) by the finger at the U-shape opening (28).
While pushing and holding, tighten the lower screw (26) and then the upper screw (27) to
secure Block (25).
25
28
28
29
29
25
27
26
5-188
K116sm5eH
17-4. Similarly to step 17-1, rotate the right Block (30) fully to the arrow direction (D: to front) and
also press it to the arrow direction (E: to outside). This will remove any gap between Block
(30) and the side frame of the machine.
With holding Block (30), tighten the screws (31) (32) just enough turn to fix Block (30)
temporarily.
D
E
30
32
no gap
31
30
17-5. Loosen the screws (31) (32) in a (approximately) quarter turn to release Block (30). Check
that no excessive backlash to sideways appears.
30
32
31
5-189
K116sm5eH
17-6. Similarly to step 17-3, put your finger inside the U-shape opening (33) of Block (30) and put
the other finger on the pin (34) of the frame.
Push the fingers toward each other (F: inside). Note that the entire Block (30) is shifted
towards the pin (34) by the finger at the U-shape opening (33).
While pushing and holding, tighten the lower screw (31) and then the upper screw (32) to
secure Block (30).
33
33
30
34
34
30
32
31
18. Reassemble the machine in the reversed order.
5-190
K116sm5eH
19. Print out the Test Pattern No.3, and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform.
Good
No good
If it is still not uniform although you have fixed the Aluminium Blocks correctly, it is necessary
to make focus adjustment with Spacers.
Go to [5. 6. 2. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers] on the next section in this case.
5. 6. 2. 3
Focus Adjustment with Spacers
There may be the case that the focus of LED is not correct even if you have placed the Aluminium
Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft correctly.
This is because the height of the LED is mechanically different between left and right by some
reason.
In this case adjust the height by adding or removing the Spacers.

3
5-191
K116sm5eH

5
4
NOTE
7
7
5-192
K116sm5eH

9
10
11
Lock position
Unlock position
5-193
K116sm5eH

12
NOTE
13

5-194
K116sm5eH
9. There are Spacers (14) on each Aluminium Block at both sides.

The height of the LED Head can be adjusted by adding more Spacer or removing some of
them.
Remove the screw (15), and remove all Spacers (14) at first.
And then adjust the height of LED Head adding or removing the Spacers (14).
14
15
14
14
NOTE
(1) The number of Spacers initially installed is individually different machine to machine.
(2) There are 3 kinds of spacers such as 0.1mm, 0.08mm and 0.05mm in thickness.
Please find the best combination by making several times of trial.
(3) Basically thinner Spacers (0.08mm &
0.05mm ones) must be held between the
0.1mm Spacer as the right picture.
0.08mm & 0.05mm
0.1mm
5-195
K116sm5eH
NOTE
(4) It is quite not clear which of addition or removal of Spacer is effective to solve the
focus problem.
(Even if the defective image caused by the focus problem looks same, for example, it is
fixed by addition in some case but in another case it is fixed by removal.
Only the way to find the best focus is just trial.
Please try both removal and addition to find which way the image becomes better.
After finding the better way, try several combinations of Spacers to find the best height.
Removal of Spacer
(Worse result)
Addition of Spacer
(Better result)
Addition of Spacer is the better way.
Try several combinations of Spacers by adding the Spacers gradually.
5-196
K116sm5eH
5. 7
5. 7. 1
Image Corona
Removal of the Image Corona Unit
5-197
K116sm5eI

4
4

7
5-198
K116sm5eI
8
9
8
11
10
11
NOTE
12
5-199
K116sm5eI
13
13
14
14
15
16
17
Lock position
Unlock position
5-200
K116sm5eI

18
NOTE
19

5-201
K116sm5eI
15. Remove the 4x6 screw (20) to remove the Fixing Bracket (21) on the right.
20
21
NOTE
You do not have to put back the Fixing Bracket (21) at the time of reassembly, because it is
a part required only before the delivery of machine.
16. Loosen 2 pieces of 4x10 screw (22) to make the Plate (23) enough movable.
23
22
22
5-202
K116sm5eI
17. Move the Plate (23) to the right to release the pin (24) of Corona Block.
Then remove the Image Corona Unit (25).
25
25
23
24
25
5-203
K116sm5eI
5. 7. 2
Replacement of the Corona Wire
NOTE
A periodical replacement for the following parts is recommended.
Item
Corona Wire (1) Assy
Spring 2
Number
of article
1
1
Remarks
Corona Wire Kit (Z160980200)
1. Remove the Image Corona Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 7. 1 Removal of
the Image Corona Unit] on the page 5-197.
1
2. Loosen the Set Screw (2) with hexagon wrench.
The Block 3 (3) moves to the arrow mark and the Grid Plate is unfastened.
5-204
K116sm5eI
NOTE
Check the following when reassembling.
(1) The side edge of Block 3 (3) should stop at 0.5mm short of the side face (4) of the corona
block for a proper tension.
Rotate a hexagon wrench in either direction with pressing down Grid Plate (5).
0.5mm
0.5mm
press down
4
5
5
(2) Carry Image Corona Unit (1) by both corona blocks so that Grid Plate (5) faces the floor.
Make sure that Grid Plate (5) has no excess slack (in less than 1mm) on the middle of the
housing.
1
1
5
Correct: no slack in Grid Plate
5
Incorrect: slack in Grid Plate
5-205
K116sm5eI
3. Remove the Grid Plate (5).

5
NOTE
If Grid Plate is dirty, wash it with the neutral detergent and then with water. Dry it well after
washing.
4. Loosen 3 pieces of 3x6 screw (6), and then remove Corona Housing (7) and Plate
Electrode (8).
5-206
K116sm5eI
5. Remove the Flush Head Screw (9), and remove each Cover (10) and Cover 2 (11).
10
11
6. Loosen the screws (12) to lower the Height Adjuster.

(It becomes easy to remove the Corona Wire as it is unfastened by this treatment.)
12
12
5-207
K116sm5eI
7. Remove Spring 2 (13) and Corona Wire 1 Assy (14).

Replace Spring 2 (13) and Corona Wire 1 Assy (14) with new ones.
14
13
NOTE
(1) Please keep 11mm between Corona
Wire (14) and bottom plate of the Corona Unit
after the replacement.
11mm
(2) Fit the Corona Wire into the groove of Height

Adjuster (15).
Also fit the beads (16) into the correct
positions.
5-208
15
16
K116sm5eI
5. 8
5. 8. 1
Transfer / Separation Corona

Removal of the Transfer / Separation Corona
2. Holding both Corona Blocks (2), remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (3) from the
machine.
5-209
K116sm5eJ
NOTE
There is the Drum above the Transfer / Separation Corona.
Do not touch it.
5-210
K116sm5eJ
5. 8. 2
Replacement of Corona Wires
NOTE
A periodical replacement for the following parts is recommended.
Item
Corona Wire
Wire Spring
Number
of article
2
4
Remarks
Corona Wire Kit (Z160980200)
1. Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1)

Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-209.
2. There are 5 pieces of Corona Guards A (2) and Corona Guards B (3) on the housing.
Remove them pressing the stoppers (4) with such tool as a screwdriver.
4
NOTE
Do not replace the position of Corona Guards A (2) and Corona Guards B (3) at the time of
reassembly.
5-211
K116sm5eJ
3. Remove both Covers 3 (5) (6) pulling their sides outward.
5-212
K116sm5eJ
4. Remove 4 pieces of Wire Springs (7) and Corona Wires (8).

Replace Wire Springs (7) and Corona Wires (8) with new ones.
7
7
NOTE
(1) Keep 11mm distance (height) between each Corona Wire and bottom plate of the
housing.
To adjust the distance, rotate the screws (9)

with a flathead screwdriver.
(2) Fit the Corona Wire into the groove of Height

Adjuster (10).
Also fit the beads (11) into the correct
positions.
10
11
5-213
K116sm5eJ
5. 9
5. 9. 1
Engine Frame
Replacement of DC Motor (M4) and
Developer Press Sensor (PH4)
2. Remove the 4x6 screws and washers (2) at both sides to make the Bands (3) free.
5-214
K116sm5eJ
3. There are Pins (4) at both sides.

Slide them inside to remove the Cover 4 (1).
4
4
5-215
K116sm5eJ
6. Close the Bypass Feeder, and then open the Developer Press Unit (7).
7. Disconnect the connector (8) and remove 3 pieces of screw (9), and remove the
DC Motor (10).
Replace the DC Motor (10) with the new one.
8
10
5-216
K116sm5eJ
8. Remove the 4x6 screw (11), release the harness from the Edge Saddle (12), and disconnect
the connector (13).
12
11
13
9. Pressing the stoppers (14) with such tool as a screwdriver, remove the Developer Press
Sensor (15).
Replace the Developer Press Sensor (15) with the new one.
5-217
K116sm5eJ
5. 9. 2
Replacement of Manual Set Sensor (PH5) &

Registration Sensor (PH1)
1. Remove the Developer Unit from the machine making reference to [5. 2. 1 Removal of the
2. Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (2), and then turn over the Bracket 11 (3).
5-218
K116sm5eJ
3. Remove the screw (4) and disconnect the connector (5) to remove each Sensor (6 : Manual
Set Sensor or Registration Sensor).
Replace the Sensor (15) with the new one.
4
6
5-219
K116sm5eJ
5. 9. 3
Replacement of Fans (BL5 & BL6)
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 3. 1 Removal of the
2. Disconnect the connector (2), remove 2 pieces of screw (3), and remove each
Fan (4 : BL5 & BL6) with the bracket.
Remove 2 screws from the bracket and replace the Fan (4 : BL5 & BL6) with the new one.
3
5-220
K116sm5eJ
5. 9. 4
Replacement of Blowers (BL3 & BL4)

2
2. Open the Cover Assembly (3).
3
3. Moving the stopper levers (4) to the inside, remove each Duct 5 (5) with Filter 4.
5-221
K116sm5eJ
4. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (6), and then slide the Duct 6 (7) to the left.
7

8
6. Remove the Blower (9 : BL3 & BL4) moving as the following photos.
9
5-222
K116sm5eJ
5. 10 Inner Transport Unit

5. 10. 1 Removal of the Inner Transport Unit
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 3. 1 Removal of the
3. Disconnect the connector on the left (3), and then remove the Inner Transport Unit (4).
3
5-223
K116sm5eJ
5. 10. 2
Replacement of Sensor (PH2) & Belt
1. Remove the Inner Transport Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.10. 1 Removal
of the Inner Transport Unit] on the page 5-223.
2. Tuck the rim of Belts (2) under Guide Plate (3)
2
3. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (4) to remove Guide Plate (5).
4
5-224
K116sm5eJ
4. Remove 1 screw (6) and the harness (7) to release the sensor bracket.
Remove Sensor (8) from the bracket and replace Sensor with a new one.
7
5. Remove Retaining Ring-E (9) to remove Gear (10) and Parallel Pin (11).
11
10
6. Remove Retaining Ring-E in the middle (12) to release Bearing (13).
13
12
5-225
K116sm5eJ
7. Release the shorter shaft (14) to remove the longer shaft (15) from the unit.
Remove and replace Belt (16) with new ones.
14
15
15
16
NOTE
Be careful of the outside/inside of the Belt (16).
The smooth and shiny side of it should be inside.
Outside
5-226
Inside
K116sm5eJ
5. 11 Main Frame
5. 11. 1
Replacement of DC Motors (M1, M2),

Belt 8, Belt 9, Belt 7
1
2
2
5-227
K116sm5eK
3. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (4), loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (5), and then remove the
Cover 15 (6).
4
5
7
8
7
5-228
K116sm5eK
6. Loosen the 4x6 screw (10), move the Pulley 3 (11) toward the arrow mark to slacken Belt 8
(12: 90S3M756).
11
10
12
NOTE
To adjust the tension of the Belt 8, do as follows.
If you do not make the following works, the Belt 8 may slip because the tension is not
correct.
a) Giving the spring tension to the Belt 8, tighten the screw of each Pulley 3.
b) Turn on the machine, and then turn it off some seconds later.
The Belt 8 is driven by the motor, and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this
time.
c) Loosen the screw to release the Pulley 3.
The slack of Belt 8 generated by the above b) is removed because the Tension
Spring pulls the Pulley 3.
Then tighten the screw again.
5-229
K116sm5eK
7. Remove 2 screws (13) and Bearing (14) to remove Bracket (15).

Replace the Belt 8 (12: 90S3M756) with the new one.
13
15
14
13
12
5-230
K116sm5eK
8. Loosen 2 screws (16), move the Pulley (17) (18) toward the arrow mark to slacken Belt 9 (22:
90S3M576) and Belt 7 (19: 90S3M699).
17
18
19
20
16
16
NOTE
To adjust the tension of the Belt 9 and Belt 7, do as follows.
If you do not make the following works, the belts may slip because the tension is not
correct.
a) Giving the spring tension to the belts, tighten the screw of each Pulley 3.
The belts are driven by the motor, and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this
time.
The slack of the belts generated by the above b) is removed because the Tension
5-231
K116sm5eK
9. Remove 5 screws (21), Retaining Ring-C and Bearing (22) to remove Bracket (23).
Remove and replace Belt 9 (19: 90S3M576) and Belt 7 (20: 90S3M699) with new ones.
21
21
22
21
22
23
19
20
5-232
K116sm5eK
10. Remove 7 pieces of 4x10 screw (24) to remove the Plate 6 Assembly (25).
24
24
25
NOTE
When reassembling, do not bump DC Motor (26) and its PCB on the frame rim.
Do not hit here
26
26
5-233
K116sm5eK
11. Remove Set Screws (27) on the side surface to remove each Pulley 4 (28).
27
28
NOTE
The tip of the motor shaft should be aligned with the outside surface of Pulley 4.
not sticked out
12. Remove 4 pieces of 4x10 screws (29) to remove each DC Motor (30: Main) (31: Fuser).
Replace each DC Motor (30) (31) with new ones.
29
29
31
29
30
29
5-234
K116sm5eK
5. 11. 2
Replacement of Clutch (CL1)
1
2
2
5-235
K116sm5eK
3. Loosen the 4x6 screw (4), move the Pulley 3 (5) toward the arrow mark to slacken Belt 8
(6: 90S3M756) and remove it.
Replace the Belt 8 (6) with the new one.
NOTE
To adjust the tension of the Belt 8, do as follows.
If you do not make the following works, the Belt 8 may slip because the tension is not
correct.
a) Giving the spring tension to the Belt 8, tighten the screw of each Pulley 3.
The Belt 8 is driven by the motor, and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this
time.
The slack of Belt 8 generated by the above b) is removed because the Tension
5-236
K116sm5eK
4. Remove 2 screws (7) and Bearing (8) to remove Bracket (9).
5-237
K116sm5eK
5. Remove the Hex. Cap Screw (10) to remove

the Pulley 13 (11).
11
10
6. Disconnect the connector (12), and remove the 4x6 screw (13) to remove Bracket Clutch (14),
Bush (15).Clutch (16).
Replace Clutch (16) with the new one.
13
12
14
15
16
5-238
K116sm5eK
5. 11. 3
Replacement of Blower (BL7)
Cover 15 (3).
1
2
4
5
4
3. Disconnect the connector (7), remove 1 screw (8), and then remove the Bracket Blower (9).
Remove and replace Blower (10) with the new one.
8
7
10
5-239
K116sm5eK
5. 11. 4
Replacement of Fan (BL8)
Cover 15 (3).
1
2
2. Disconnect the connector (4), remove 1 screw (5), and then remove the Fan Blower (6).
Remove and replace Fan (7) with the new one.
5-240
K116sm5eK
5. 12
5. 12. 1
Scanner Unit
Removal of Scanner Unit
1. Remove 2 pieces of Guide 3 (1).

1
2. Loosen 4 pieces of screw (2) on the back, and remove 4 pieces of screw (3) on the front.

4
5-241
K116sm5eL
5
5
5. Remove Shield Cover N (6).

6
6. Remove 2 screws (6) to remove Cover 10 (7)

7
5-242
K116sm5eL
7. Pull up Lever 2 (8) to open the Engine Unit.
9
9
10
5-243
K116sm5eL
10. Open Cover 4 (11).
11
11
11. Remove 4 screws (12) to remove Bracket Right (13) on the right.
12
12
13
12
12
12
12. Remove 4 screws (14) to remove Bracket Left (15) on the left.
14
14
14
15
14
14
13. Loosen 4 screws (16) and remove 4 screws (17)

17
18
16
5-244
K116sm5eL
14. Disconnect the USB Connector (19) from the IPS, which runs from the Scanner Unit.
Open Wire Saddle (20) to release USB Cable.
19
20
15. Open the Wire Saddles (21) to release the USB Cable (19).
19
21
21
19

23
22
23
NOTE
5-245
K116sm5eL
CAUTION
Be sure to close the Engine Unit before removing the screws which fix the Scanner Unit.
Otherwise the Scanner Unit may fall down and damage.
18. Remove 4 screws (24) which fix the Scanner Unit.

(Right side)
(Left side)
24
24
19. Remove the Scanner Unit (25) from the machine.

25
25
CAUTION
Please carry the Scanner Unit by 2 persons as it is heavy.
5-246
K116sm5eL
5. 12. 2
Replacement of Belt
1. Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machine

making reference to [5.12. 1 Removal of the
Scanner Unit] on the page 5-241.
2. Pull up the Levers (2) and open Upper Unit.
3. Remove Spring (3) and loose 1 screw (4) to remove Belt (5).
Replace Belt (5) with a new one.
3
5
5-247
K116sm5eM
NOTE
Belt (5) requires its tensioning when reassembling.
(1) Be sure to close Upper Unit prior to tensioning.
Not doing so may prevent a proper tensioning.
Press down Upper Unit on both sides to close
it. Pressing only on the left side may result in
twisting the frame.
(2) Place Belt (5) in the original routing position.

(No tension is applied to Belt at this time.)
(3) Replace Spring (3) in the original position.

(A proper tension is applied to Belt.)
(4) Move Bracket (6) to the arrow direction until it

stops against Spring Hook (7).
Tighten the screw (4) to secure Bracket (6).
7
4
5-248
K116sm5eM
5. 12. 3
Replacement of Motor Assy

3
5
5-249
K116sm5eM
NOTE
twisting the frame.



7
4
5-250
K116sm5eM
4. Remove 6 screws (8) to remove Sheet Guide (9).
8
8
9
5. Disconnect the harness (10) from Motor Assy (11).
11
10
6. Remove 2 screws (12) to remove Motor Assembly (11).

Replace Motor Assembly with a new one.
12
11
5-251
K116sm5eM
5. 12. 4
Replacement of Drive Rollers 1 and 2

3
5
5-252
K116sm5eM
NOTE
twisting the frame.



7
4
5-253
K116sm5eM
4. Remove 1 screw (8) to remove Stay (9) Open Upper Unit fully.
8
5. Remove 7 screws (10) to remove Gap Roller Assy (11).

10
11
5-254
K116sm5eM
6. On the left side, remove Retaining Ring-E (12), Set Screw (13) to remove Pulley (14: on 1),
Pulley (15: on 2), Spacer (16), Bearing (17) from each roller shaft.
13
12
17
16
15
14
5-255
K116sm5eM
7. On the right side, remove Retaining Ring-E (18) to remove Washer (19), Bearing (20) from each
roller shaft.
18
20
19
5-256
K116sm5eM
8. Pressing Roller Holder Assy (21) down, slide Drive Roller 1 (22: front) and Drive Roller 2 (23:
rear) to the motor side and remove it.
Replace Drive Roller 1 and Drive Roller 2 with new ones.
22
20
23
20
23
22
5-257
K116sm5eM
NOTE
(1) The longer thin end of Drive Rollers should be placed at the left.
23
23
22
22
Left
Right
(2) Install Drive Roller 1 (22) and Drive Roller 2

(23) in place correctly.
The 2 Rollers have different rubber belt
pattern.
20: 2 bands
40
19: 4 bands
(3) Do not use water for cleaning Drive Rollers. Use alcohol.
10. Install Scanner Unit to the machine. Connect the USB cable of Scanner Unit to your PC.
11. Perform Feed Distance adjustment.
NOTE
Replacement of Drive Rollers requires Feed Distance adjustment.
Refer to [8. 12 KIP Scanner Utility] on page 8-184 for adjustment.
5-258
K116sm5eM
5. 12. 5 Replacement of Pinch Roller Assy

2. Remove Retaining Ring-E (2) from the shaft of Pinch Roller.
5-259
K116sm5eN
NOTE
For Pinch Rollers located under Data Controller PCB, follow the instruction below.
The location of the relevant Pinch Rollers is shown as follows.
(1) Remove all the connectors (3) from Data Controller PCB (4).
3
3
(2) Remove 6 screws (5) to remove Data Controller PCB (4) and Shield Sheet (6).
5
5-260
K116sm5eN
3. Pull up the Levers (7) and open Upper Unit slightly.

Put your hand in between Upper and Lower Unit and hold the Pinch Roller Assy (8) not to fall its
Spring (9) inside Upper Unit.
Remove Pinch Roller Assy (8) and Spring (9).
Replace Pinch Roller Assy with a new one.
9
9
8
8
5-261
K116sm5eN
5. 12. 6 Replacement of Sensor

2. Remove screws (2) to release the concerning sensor bracket (3) (4) (5) (6) (7).
3
(Data Controller PCB omitted)
5-262
K116sm5eN
NOTE
For the sensor bracket (3) located under Data Controller PCB, follow the instruction.
The location of the relevant sensor bracket (3) is shown as follows.
(1) Remove all the connectors (8) from Data Controller PCB (9).
8
8
(2) Remove 6 screws (10) to remove Data Controller PCB (9) and Shield Sheet (11).
10
11
10
5-263
K116sm5eN
3. Remove the Sensor (12) from the sensor bracket.

Replace Sensor with a new one.
12
12
5-264
K116sm5eN
5. 12. 7 Replacement of CIS

NOTE
A CIS is classified into classes according to wavelength variations of their LED.
Class
CIS Sensor A
CIS Sensor B
CIS Sensor C
CIS Sensor D
CIS Sensor E
CIS Sensor F
CIS Sensor G
CIS Sensor H
Part Number
Z168300410
Z168300420
Z168300430
Z168300440
Z168300450
Z168300460
Z168300470
Z168300480
Class
CIS Sensor I
CIS Sensor J
CIS Sensor K
CIS Sensor L
CIS Sensor M
CIS Sensor N
CIS Sensor O
CIS Sensor P
Part Number
Z168300490
Z168300500
Z168300510
Z168300520
Z168300530
Z168300540
Z168300550
Z168300560
All the 5 pieces of CIS on a certain scanner should be the same class to assure even image
quality (brightness, color quality and etc) among image blocks.
Be sure to check which CIS class is used to the scanner before replacing to avoid class
mixing. Otherwise even image quality can not be expected.
Equipped CIS class can be checked with the label on the rear of the scanner.
Label

5-265
K116sm5eN
2. Remove all the connectors (2) from Data Controller PCB (3).
2
2
3. Remove 6 screws (4). Remove Data Controller PCB (3) and Shield Sheet (5).
4
3
5-266
K116sm5eN
4. Remove the harnesses (6) from each CIS

Controller PCB (7).
5. Remove 9 screws (8) and open 1 wire saddle (9) to release Base Plate (10).
8
9
8
8
10
5-267
K116sm5eN
6. Remove the flexible cable (11) from CIS Controller PCB (7).
Remove 4 screws (12) to remove CIS Bracket (13).
Replace CIS (14) with a new one.
13
12
11
12
14
11
13
NOTE
When reassembling, fix CIS Bracket (13) with
pushing to the left. Otherwise a correct CIS
position may lose.
13

8. Install Scanner Unit to the machine. Connect the USB cable of Scanner Unit to your PC.
9. Perform Shading, Position adjustments.
NOTE
Replacement of CIS requires Shading, Position adjustments.
Refer to [8. 12 KIP Scanner Utility] on page 8-184 for adjustment.
5-268
K116sm5eN
5. 12. 8 Replacement of Scan Glass Assy

Reference
For more efficient operation, Scan Glass Assy
can be removed without dismounting Scanner
Unit.
1. Remove 1 screw (1) on top of Cover (2) and put it aside.

1
2
2. Remove 2 screws (3) and loosen 2 screws (4) to release Monitor Assy (5).
Lean Monitor Assy (5) back.
5-269
K116sm5eN
6
4. Remove 1 screw (7) to remove Stay (8) Open Upper Unit fully.
5. Remove 4 screws (9) to remove Scan Glass Assy (10).

Replace Scan Glass Assy with a new one.
9
10
5-270
K116sm5eN
Chapter 6
Maintenance
6. 1
6. 2
6. 3
page
6- 2
Recommended Periodic Maintenance

Lubrication
6. 2. 1 Drive Gears
6. 2. 2 Dev / Other
6- 4
6- 4
6- 5
PM Procedure
6- 6
6-1
K116sm6e1
KIP 3100 - PM Schedule
r1
-Please keep this form with the KIP 3100 ; Please perform PMs as scheduled
-As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned, please denote with an "X" in the Confirmation box. Please note nomenclature below.
Document Glass ( scanner )

Document Rollers ( scanner )
Photoreceptor
Main Charge Wire
Transfer Wire
Separation Wire
Grid Screen
LED Head
Developer Space Discs
Lube Gears
Developer Roller - Kit
Roll Compartment & Interior
Knife
Filters - Kit
Fuser - Kit
Lube Gears
Fuser Fingers
Pressure Roller
Thermostat
Thermistor
Exterior Covers / GUI
1
1
1
1
SUP3000-101
SUP9810-104
SUP3820-106
SUP3820-106
Z160980220
Z160980040
C
C
C
C
C
C
#
#
#
#
#
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
R
R
R
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
L
@
@
@
# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry

@ = Clean with vacuum
Subject to change without notice

Actual intervals may vary due to customer requirements / installation location
C = Clean
I = Inspect
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
R = Replace
A = Adjust position
C
R
C
C
C
C
C
L
C
C
C
R
R
R
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
L
C
C
L
R
C
Complete
500
C
L
Complete
Complete
450
C
C
C
C
L = Lubricate
400
C
L
R
C
L
C
L
R
350
Complete
300
Complete
Complete
250
Z160980020
200
#
#
#
1
150
Complete
100
Complete
50
Complete
Square Feet X 1000

Complete
Qty Part Number

Code
Part / Description
KIP 3100 - PM Schedule
r1
-Please keep this form with the KIP 3100 ; Please perform PMs as scheduled
-As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned, please denote with an "X" in the Confirmation box. Please note nomenclature below.
Document Glass ( scanner )

Document Rollers ( scanner )
Photoreceptor
Main Charge Wire
Transfer Wire
Separation Wire
Grid Screen
LED Head
Developer Space Discs
Lube Gears
Developer Roller - Kit
Roll Compartment & Interior
Knife
Filter - Kit
Fuser - Kit
Lube Gears
Fuser Fingers
Pressure Roller
Thermostat
Thermistor
Exterior Covers / GUI
1
1
1
1
SUP3000-101
SUP9810-104
SUP3820-106
SUP3820-106
#
#
C
C
#
#
#
#
#
C
C
C
R
R
R
C
C
C
C
C
C
#
1
C
L
R
Z050980280
Z050980050
Z050980060
@
@
@
C
C
C
# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry

@ = Clean with vacuum
Subject to change without notice

Actual intervals may vary due to customer requirements / installation location
C
C
C
C
C
C
C = Clean
I = Inspect
C
C
1000
C
C
C
C
C
C
R
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
R
R
R
C
C
R
R
R
C
C
C
L
R
C
C
C
C
C
L = Lubricate
C
L
C
L
R
C
L
R = Replace
A = Adjust position
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
L
L
C
C
C
C
C
C
Complete
950
Complete
900
Complete
850
Complete
800
Complete
750
C
L
C
700
Complete
650
Complete
600
Complete
550
Complete
Square Feet X 1000

Complete
Qty Part Number

Code
Part / Description
6. 2.
Lubrication
Please apply an adequate amount of grease to the components shown in the following section.
Recommended lubrication term is in every 18,000m.
6.2.1 Driving Gears on Machine Frame

Remove Developer Unit and Fuser Unit.
Apply grease to Gear 3 (1), Gear Helical 34T (2), Gear Helical 20T (3).
Apply heat-proof grease to Gear 36T (4).
2
3
1
Engine Unit from top, Developer Unit removed
Engine Unit from bottom, Developer Unit removed
From rear, Fuser Unit removed
6-4
K116sm6e1
6. 2. 2 Developer Unit
Remove Developer Unit.
Apply conductive grease to the contacting points for Developer / Regulation / Toner Supply Roller
on the metal plates (1).
Apply grease to Gear Helical 28T (2).
1
1
2
Other - Terminal Plates on Machine Frame

Open Engine Unit.
Apply conductive grease to the contacting points for Photoconductive Drum / Cleaning Roller on
the metal plates (1).
1
1
6-5
K116sm6e1
KIP 3100
Preventative Maintenance Procedure
- every 50,000 square feet Step #1 - Prepare Machine.
Ask User on Printer Performance / Image Quality

Run Test Print
Locate the KIP 3100 PM Schedule Form
And check as each item completed.
Replace noted items as this procedure progresses.
Remove Drum (into Box)

Remove side and top covers.
Step #2 - Corona Units
Clean Grid Screen (Simple Green, then rinse with water) let dry on paper towel.
Clean 1st Charge wires and case (Glass cleaner)
Clean transfer / separation wires and case. (Glass cleaner)
Step #3 - LED Print Head.
Clean Selfoc lens. (Glass cleaner.)

Step #4 - Clean Interior of Printer.
Separation fans / air guides.
Transport belts.
Transfer guide plates etc.
Step #5 - Development Unit.
Clean spacing rollers.

Vacuum any toner dust from ends of developer unit.
Vacuum around toner hopper inlet.
Clean /` lube gears ( only as needed with G501 grease / Lithium grease. - see Chapter 6 in
Service Manual)
Step #6 - Paper Decks.
Vacuum paper dust.

Inspect media spools.
Step #7 - Air Flow.
Vacuum Ozone Filters.

Confirm all fans and blowers are clean.
Step #8 - Fuser Section.
Clean upper Nails.

Clean lower Nails.
Clean and lube gears. (as needed with High temp. grease - see Chapter 6 in Service
Manual)
Step #9 - Cutter Assembly.
Clean paper dust.

Step #10 Run test pattern #1 and #3 and verify print quality. (save prints)
Step #11 Scanner
Remove all glass and clean both sides.
Clean original rollers
Step #12 Clean Panels and Covers.
Step #13 Make copies / prints
Step #14 Speak with key operator on your evaluation / status.
6-6
K116sm6e1
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Page
7- 3
7- 3
7- 3
7- 4
7- 5
7. 1 Troubleshooting - Printer Errors

7. 1. 1 Countermeasures - Call Operator Errors
7. 1. 1. 1 Roll 2 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0101)
7. 1. 1. 2 Roll 1 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0102)
7. 1. 1. 3 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0103) & Early (J-0303)
7. 1. 1. 4 Reg. Jam Delay (J-0104), Stay (J-0204)
Early (J-0304), Remained (J-1004)
7. 1. 1. 5 Internal Jam Delay (J-0106), Stay (J-0206)
7. 1. 1. 6 Fuser Jam Delay (J-0107), Stay (J-0207)
7. 1. 1. 7 Paper jam by opening the Roll Deck during printing (J-1100)
7. 1. 1. 8 Paper jam by opening the Exit Cover during printing (J-1200)
7. 1. 1. 9 Deck Open
7. 1. 1.10 Deck Jam
7. 1. 1.11 Manual Set NG
7. 1. 1.12 Toner Empty
7. 1. 1.13 The door opened during the print cycle
7. 1. 2 Countermeasures - Call Service Errors
7. 1. 2. 1 Fuser Error (E-000, E-002 & E-004)
7. 1. 2. 2 Fuser Error (E-001)
7. 1. 2. 3 Fuser Error (E-003)
7. 1. 2. 4 Main Motor Error (E-010)
7. 1. 2. 5 Fuser Motor Error (E-011)
7. 1. 2. 6 Developer Press Motor Error (E-012)
7. 1. 2. 7 Counter Error (E-020)
7. 1. 2. 8 High Voltage Output Error (E-031, E-032 & E-033)
7. 1. 2. 9 Bias Output Error (E-034)
7. 1. 2.10 Cutter Error (E-040)
7. 1. 2.11 FPGA Error (E-050)
7. 1. 2.12 Developer Error (E-070)
7. 1. 2.13 Density Sensor Error (E-080)
7. 1. 2.14 Density Sensor Output Error (E-081)
7- 7
7- 7
7- 7
7- 7
7- 8
7- 9
7-10
7-10
7-11
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-15
7-16
7-16
7-17
7-17
7-18
7-18
7-19
7-19
7-19
7-19
7. 2 Troubleshooting - Image Quality Defects

7. 2. 1 Basic Image Adjustment
7. 2. 2 Countermeasures - Image Quality Defects
7. 2. 2. 1 Halftone is too light
7. 2. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light
7. 2. 2. 3 The whole image is extremely light
7. 2. 2. 4 Density is uneven
7. 2. 2. 5 Totally appeared foggy image
7. 2. 2. 6 Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical)
7. 2. 2. 7 Clear black thin line (vertical)
7. 2. 2. 8 White line (Vertical)
7. 2. 2. 9 Void of image
7. 2. 2.10 Dirt on the back of the print
7. 2. 2.11 Defective fusing
7-20
7-20
7-21
7-21
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-25
7-26
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-29
7-1
7- 6
7- 6
K116sm7e1
7. 2. 2.12
7. 2. 2.13
7. 2. 2.14
7. 2. 2.15
7. 2. 2.16
7. 2. 2.17
7. 2. 2.18
7. 2. 2.19
7. 2. 2.20
Defective image placement, No Leading Edge

Jitter
Image looks not sharp
Uneven image density (vertical)
Completely white (No image)
Completely black
Crease of paper
Double image
Dirt on the print (Offset)
7-30
7-30
7-31
7-31
7-32
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-35
7. 3 Troubleshooting - Scanner Defects

7. 3. 1 Countermeasures - scanner operation
7. 3. 1. 1 Original can not be set (Scanner does not transport)
7. 3. 1. 2 Scanner does not start scanning from the original set position
7. 3. 1. 3 Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop)
7. 3. 1. 4 Original is mis-fed
7. 3. 1. 5 Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on
7. 3. 1. 6 Scanner is not recognized
7. 3. 2 Countermeasures - scanner image quality
7. 3. 2. 1 Completely black
7. 3. 2. 2 Vertical black lines
7. 3. 2. 3 Vertical white lines
7. 3. 2. 4 Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks
7. 3. 2. 5 Vertical image gap between Image Blocks
7. 3. 2. 6 Image quality is not good
7. 3. 2. 7 Density is different between left and right
7-36
7-36
7-36
7-36
7-36
7-37
7-37
7-37
7-38
7-38
7-38
7-39
7-39
7-39
7-39
7-39
7. 4
7-40
Touch Screen Calibration
7-2
K116sm7e1
7. 1
Troubleshooting - Printer Errors
7. 1. 1
Countermeasures - Call Operator Errors
7. 1. 1. 1
Roll 2 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0101)
Reference
Delay
Stay
Early
Remained
Cause
Installation of roll
paper
Roll 2 Set Sensor
(PH9)
: Paper arrives at the sensor much later than required timing.

: Paper exists on the sensor for a longer time than required.
: Paper arrives at the sensor much earlier than required timing.
: Paper exists on the sensor when turning on the machine.
Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Is the roll paper correctly installed in
Roll Deck 2?
Check the status of Roll 2 Set Sensor in
the Signal Status Mode of the Service
Mode.
Result
No
Install it correctly.
No
1. Is there any problem with

the Drawer Connector
which connects the
machine and the Roll
Deck.
Signal Code : 106 (Roll 2 Set Sensor)
2. Check if there is any

problem with the wire
connected to the Roll 2
Set Sensor.
Is the status H when the roll paper is

set?
(Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status
Mode.)
Roll 2 Feed Clutch

(CL6)
Check the operation of Roll 2 Feed

Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of
the Service Mode.
Treatment
No
3. Replace the Roll 2 Set

Sensor if there is no
problem with the wire.
Feed Clutch.
Device Code : 08 (Roll 2 Feed Clutch)

2. Replace the Roll 2 Feed
Clutch if there is no
Does the clutch operate when you

change the output signal from L to H?
Main Motor (M1)
(Refer to page 8-16 for the Device

Operation Mode.)
Mode while making the following
operation. (Signal Code : 106)
No

connected to the Main
Motor.
1. Set the leading edge of roll 2 between

feeding rollers. (Leading edge must
not pass over the Roll 2 Set Sensor.)
Does the status change from L to H
when the machine is transporting the
paper?
7-3
1. Check the driving belts

on the Roll Deck.
Yes
3. Replace the Main Motor

if there is no problem with
the wire.
1. Remove the whole Roll
Deck, and then re-install
it to the machine
correctly.
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 1. 2
Roll 1 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0102)
Cause
paper
Roll 1 Set Sensor
(PH7)
Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Is the roll paper correctly installed in
Roll Deck 2?
Mode.
Result
No
No

which connects the
Deck.

Set Sensor.
Is the status H when the roll paper is

set?
Mode.)
Roll 1 Feed Clutch

(CL4)
Check the operation of Roll 1 Feed

the Service Mode.
Treatment
No
3. Replace the Roll 1 Set

Feed Clutch.
Device Code : 06 (Roll 1 Feed Clutch)

2. Replace the Roll 1 Feed
Clutch if there is no
Does the clutch operate when you

change the output signal from L to H?
Main Motor (M1)

Operation Mode.)
Mode while making the following
operation. (Signal Code : 105)
No

Motor.
1. Set the leading edge of roll 1 between

not pass over the Roll 1 Set Sensor.)
paper?
7-4

on the Roll Deck.
Yes

the wire.
it to the machine
correctly.
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 1. 3
Feeding Jam Delay (J-0103) & Early (J-0303)
Cause
Mis-feed of paper
Feed Sensor
(PH6)
Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Result
Does the paper mis-fed occur between

Roll 1 Set Sensor and Feed Sensor?
Check the status of Feed Sensor in the
Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode.
Yes
Remove the mis-fed paper.
No

which connects the
Deck.
Signal Code : 108 (Feed Sensor)

Is the status L when the paper is not
passing beside the sensor?
And is it H when the paper is passing
beside the sensor?

connected to the Feed
Sensor.

Mode.)
Cutter Home
Position Sensor
(MS6 & MS7)
Check the status of Cutter Home Position

Sensors in the Signal Status Mode of the
Service Mode.
No
Signal Code :
094 (Cutter Home Position Right)
095 (Cutter Home Position Left)
Driving mechanism
3. Replace the Feed Sensor

the wire.
connected to the Cutter
Home Position Sensor.
2. Replace the Cutter Home
Position Sensors if there
is no problem with the
wire.
Is the status H when the Cutter is at

each home position?
And is it L when the Cutter is not at the
home position?
Mode.)
Check the operation of Feed Clutch in
the Device Operation Mode of the
Service Mode.
Treatment
No
Replace the Feed Clutch or

Main Motor if it is defective.
Device Code : 10 (Feed Clutch)

Also open and close the Roll Deck, and
check if the Main Motor rotates correctly.
Does each Feed Clutch and Main Motor
operate correctly?
Operation Mode.)
7-5
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 1. 4
Reg. Jam Delay (J-0104), Stay (J-0204)

Cause
Mis-feed of paper
Registration
Sensor (PH1)
Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Result
Treatment
Does the paper mis-fed occur around the

Registration Roller?
Check the status of Registration Sensor
in the Signal Status Mode of the Service
Mode.
Yes
No

connected to the
Registration Sensor.
Signal Code : 100 (Registration Sensor)

2. Replace the Registration

beside the sensor?
Engine Unit
Driving mechanism

Mode.)
Is the Engine Unit closed firmly until it is
locked?
(Is the pressure around the Registration
Roller correct?)
Check the operation of Registration

the Service Mode.
No
No
1. Close the Engine Unit

firmly.
2. Adjust the pressure
around the Registration
Roller.
Replace the Registration
Clutch or Main Motor if it is
defective.
Device Code : 11 (Registration Clutch)

Does each Registration Clutch and Main
Motor operate correctly?
Operation Mode.)
7. 1. 1. 5
Internal Jam Delay (J-0106), Stay (J-0206)

Cause
Mis-feed of paper
Separation Sensor
(PH2)
Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Result
Treatment

separation area?
Check the status of Separation Sensor in
Mode.
Yes
No

connected to the
Separation Sensor.
Signal Code : 010 (Separation Sensor)

2. Replace the Separation

beside the sensor?
Transfer /
Separation Corona
HV Power Supply

Mode.)
Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit
installed to the machine correctly?
Is the Corona Wire broken?
Is the output from the HV Power Supply
to the Separation Corona correct?
7-6
Yes
Yes
No
Install the Transfer /

Separation Corona Unit
correctly.
Replace the Corona Wire.
Replace the HV Power
Supply.
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 1. 6
Fuser Jam Delay (J-0107), Stay (J-0207)

Cause
Mis-feed of paper
Checking
order
1
Exit Sensor (PH3)
Checking
Result

fuser area?
Check the status of Exit Sensor in the
Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode.
Yes
No

connected to the Exit
Sensor.
Signal Code : 011 (Exit Sensor)
Treatment
2. Replace the Exit Sensor

the wire.

beside the sensor?
Mode.)
7. 1. 1. 7
Paper jam by opening the Roll Deck during printing (J-1100)
Cause
Checking
order
1
Opening the Roll

Deck
Lock of Roll Deck
7. 1. 1. 8
Cause
Opening the Exit
Cover
7. 1. 1. 9
Cause
Roll Deck
Switch (MS5)
Checking
Result
Treatment
Did you open the Roll Deck before the

completion of printing?
(Roll paper will be rewound after printing.
J-1100 will be indicated if you open the
deck at that time.)
Is the Roll Deck firmly locked?
Yes
Wait until the roll paper is

completely rewound.
No
Close it firmly.
Paper jam by opening the Exit Cover during printing (J-1200)

Checking
order
1
Checking
Did you open the Exit Cover during
printing?
Result
Yes
Treatment
Do not open it during
printing.
Deck Open
Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Result
Is the Roll Deck opened?

Check the status of the following signal in
Mode.
Yes
No
Treatment
Close it firmly.
connected to the Switch
(MS5).
Signal Code : 009 (Roll Deck Open)

Is the status L when the Roll Deck is
closed?
And is it H when the Roll Deck is
opened?
2. Replace the Switch

(MS5) if there is no

Mode.)
7-7
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 1.10
Deck Jam
Cause
Mis-feed of paper
paper
Roll 1 Set Sensor
(PH7)
Roll 2 Set Sensor
(PH9)
Checking
order
1
2
3
Checking
Result
Does the paper mis-fed occur in the Roll

Deck?
Is the roll paper correctly installed to the
Roll Deck 2?
Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor
and Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Signal
Status Mode of the Service Mode.
Yes
No
No

which connects the
Deck.

106 (Roll 2 Set Sensor)

connected to each
sensor.
Is the status of each sensor H when

you set the roll paper?
Mode.)
Roll 1 Feed Clutch

(CL4)
Roll 2 Feed Clutch
(CL6)
Roll 1 Back Clutch
(CL5)
Roll 2 Back Clutch
(CL7)
Check the operation of the following

clutches in the Device Operation Mode of
the Service Mode.
Treatment
No
3. Replace the concerning

sensor if there is no
connected to each clutch.
2. Replace the concerning
clutch if there is no
Device Code :
06 (Roll 1 Feed Clutch)
07 (Roll 1 Back Clutch)
08 (Roll 2 Feed Clutch)
09 (Roll 2 Back Clutch)
Does each clutch operate correctly?
Main Motor (M1)

Operation Mode.)
Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor
and Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Signal
Status Mode of the Service Mode while
making the following operation.
No

Motor.

106 (Roll 2 Set Sensor)
1. Set the leading edge of each roll
paper between the concerning
not pass over each Roll 1 (2) Set
Sensor.)

on the Roll Deck.
Yes

the wire.
it to the machine
correctly.

paper?
7-8
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 1.11
Manual Set NG
Cause
Mis-feed
Manual Set Sensor
Checking
order
1
Checking
Result
Treatment
Have you already set the cut sheet paper

to the Bypass Feeder before you turned
on the machine?
Check the status of Manual Feed Sensor
Mode.
Yes
Remove the paper.
No

connected to the Manual
Set Sensor.
Signal Code : 008 (Manual Set Sensor)

2. Replace the Manual Set

beside the sensor?
Registration
Sensor

Mode.)
Check the status of Registration Sensor
Mode.
No
Signal Code : 100 (Registration

Sensor)
2. Replace the Registration


beside the sensor?
Engine Unit
Driving mechanism

Mode.)
Is the Engine Unit closed firmly until it is
locked?
(Is the pressure around the Registration
Roller correct?)
Check the operation of Registration

the Service Mode.

connected to the
Registration Sensor.
No
No
1. Close the Engine Unit

firmly.
2. Adjust the pressure
around the Registration
Roller.
Clutch or Main Motor if it is
defective.
Device Code : 11 (Registration Clutch)

Does each Registration Clutch and Main
Motor operate correctly?
Operation Mode.)
7-9
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 1.12
Toner Empty
Cause
Checking
order
1
Toner Cartridge
Toner Supply
Motor (M3)
Checking
Is there enough toner in the Toner
Cartridge?
Check the operation of Toner Supply
Motor by the following 2 ways.
Result
Treatment
No
Replace the Toner

Cartridge.
problem with the wires
among the Toner Supply
Motor, Driver PCB B and
PW11620 PCB.
No
1. Turn on the machine, and check the

action of the Toner Supply Motor.
2. Replace the Toner

Supply Motor if there is
no problem with the
wires.
2. Select the Factory Adjustment Mode,

and carry out the Sub Mode No.05.
Press the [ * ] Key when the machine
is operating. (The Toner Supply Motor
rotates when you are pressing the [ * ]
Key.)
Does the Toner Supply Motor operate
correctly in both cases?
Toner Sensor
(TLS1)
(Refer to page 8-152 for the Factory

Adjustment Mode.)
Confirm that the Toner Sensor is not
buried in the toner.
Then check the status of Toner Sensor in
the Input/Output Mode of the Service
Mode.
No
Yes
Replace the Toner Sensor.

Replace the PW11620 PCB.
I/O Signal Code : 107 (Toner Sensor)

Is the status H when the Toner Sensor
is covered with the toner?
And is it L when the sensor is not
covered?
Mode.)
7. 1. 1.13
The door opened during the print cycle
Cause
Mis-feed of paper
Switch (MS5)
Checking
order
1
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is there paper anywhere in the machine?
Yes
Check the status of the following signal in

Mode.
No
Open the Exit Cover and the

Engine Unit, and then
remove the paper.
(Cut the paper manually if it
has not been cut yet.)
connected to the Switch
(MS5).
Signal Code : 009 (Roll Deck Open)

2. Replace the Switch
(MS5) if there is no
Is the status L when the Roll Deck is

closed?
And is it H when the Roll Deck is
opened?
Fuse

Mode.)
Does fuse (F2) have proper conductivity?
7-10
No
Replace the fuse (F2).
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 2
Countermeasures - Call Service Errors
The following are the names of the Service Call Errors and the conditions that cause them to occur.
Error Code
E-000
Error Indication
Fuser Temperature Rising Error
E-001
E-002
Fuser Over Temperature Error

Fuser Low Temperature Error
E-003
Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall

Error
E-004
Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall

Error
E-010
Main Motor Error
E-011
Fuser Motor Error
E-012
Developer Press Motor Error
E-020
Counter Error
E-031
Image Corona Output Error
E-032
Separation Corona Output Error
E-033
Transfer Corona Output Error
7-11
Conditions
Fuser Temperature does not reach 50 oC
within 120 seconds after turning on.
Fuser Temperature reaches over 230 oC.
1. Fuser Temperature at the time of
turning on was 50 to 100 oC, but it
does not rise up to 120 oC within 80
seconds after that.
2. Fuser Temperature at the time of
turning on was higher than 100 oC, but
it does not rise up to the setting
temperature within 330 seconds after
that.
The difference of temperature between
the center and side of the fuser becomes
50 oC or more.
The Lamp of fuser lights (Signal HEAT1
is H) to heat up the Fuser Roller in the
ready condition, but even 1 oC of
temperature rise can not be
accomplished within 15 seconds.
The Main Motor Output Detection Signal
(MAINM_LD) continues to be H for 3
seconds or longer when the Main Motor is
rotating.
The Fuser Motor Output Detection Signal
(HEATM_LD) continues to be H for 3
seconds or longer when the Fuser Motor
is rotating.
The Developer Press Sensor Signal
(PRESS_S) does not change to L within
30 seconds after turning on.
The Counter Connection Detection Signal
(COUNT_OPN) continues to be L for 1
second or longer after turning on.
The Image Corona Output Detection
Signal (IM_LD) continues to be L for 1
second or longer when the Image Corona
is ON.
The Separation Corona Output Detection
Signal (AC_LD) continues to be L for 1
second or longer when the Separation
Corona is ON.
The Transfer Corona Output Detection
Signal (TR_LD) continues to be L for 1
second or longer when the Transfer
Corona is ON.
K116sm7e1
Error Code
E-034
Error Indication
Bias Output Error
E-040
Cutter Error
E-050
FPGA Error
E-070
Developer Error
E-080
Density Sensor Error
E-081
Density Sensor Output Error
7-12
Conditions
Bias Output Detection Signal (BIAS_LD)
continues to be L for 1 second or longer
when a specified bias is supplied to the
corresponding Developer Unit
components.
1. The Cutter Home Sensor Signal
(MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not
change to H within 100 millisecond
since the Cutter has started the
operation.
2. The Cutter Home Sensor Signal
(MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not
change to L within 1 second since
the Cutter has started the operation.
Initialization of FPGA failed after turning
on the machine.
1. The Connector J-253 is not
connected.
2. The Switch (MS4) indicates an open
Condition. (MS4) detects open/close
of the Engine Unit or Toner Hatch.
The default output of the Density Sensor
reaches less than 0.1V or more than
1.3V.
The gap between the default output and
the standard output of the Density Sensor
reaches less than 2V.
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 1
Fuser Error (E-000, E-002 & E-004)
E-000 : Fuser Temperature Rising Error

E-002 : Fuser Low Temperature Error
E-004 : Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error
Cause
Error clearance
Checking
order
1
Wires
Lamp (H1, H2)
Thermistors
(TH1 & TH2)
Checking
Result
Treatment
Yes
No
Wait until the Fuser Unit has

cooled down enough.
Then select the Error Clear
Mode and clear the
concerning error.
Connect them properly.
No
Replace the Lamp.
No
Replace the concerning

Thermistor.
(Refer to page 8-12 for the Information

Mode.)
Confirm that the machine is turned on,
and then check the voltage of the orange
wire (J220-4).
No
Replace the DC Power

Supply if there is no problem
with the wires.
Is it 24V?
Confirm that the machine is turned off,
and then check whether or not each
Fuse is broken.
Yes
Replace the Fuse.
No
Replace the Relay.
Have you cleared the fuser error in the

Error Clear Mode?
(Refer to page 8-154 for the Error Clear
Mode.)
Are wires among Lamp (H1, H2), Solid
State Relay (SSR1) and Thermistors
(TH1 & TH2) connected properly?
Unplug the machine, and then check the
resistance of Lamp (H1, H2) with the
multi-meter.
Is it 15k ohm or lower?
Select the Information Mode, and then
check the temperature of fuser detected
by Thermistors (TH1 & TH2).
Item No. : 00 (Fuser temperature 1)
01 (Fuser temperature 2)
Is each temperature normal?
DC Power Supply
(DCP1)
or Fuse
Relay (RY1)
Is any Fuse broken?

Select the Device Operation Mode, and
then change the signal of the following
signal to H.
Device Code : 22 (Fuser Relay)
And check the resistance between the
following points.
Between RY1-2 and RY1-4
Between RY1-6 and RY1-8
Is the each resistance almost 0 ohm?
Operation Mode.)
7-13
K116sm7e1
Cause
Solid State Relay
(SSR1)
Checking
order
7
Checking
Select the Device Operation Mode, and
then change the signal of the following
signals to H.
Result
Treatment
Yes
Replace the Solid State

Relay
No
Replace the PW11620 PCB.
Result
Treatment
Yes

cooled down enough.
Mode and clear the
concerning error.
Device Code : 22 (Fuser Relay)

21 (Fuser Lamp 1)
Then check the voltage between J105-1
and J105-2.
Is it 0V?
Refer to page 8-16 for the Device
Operation Mode.)
CAUTION
Change the signal of 21
(Fuser Lamp 1) back to L after
checking!
7. 1. 2. 2
Fuser Error (E-001)
Cause
Error clearance
Checking
order
1
Wires
Solid State Relay

(SSR1)
Thermistors
(TH1 & TH2)
3
4
Checking
Error Clear Mode?
Mode.)
Does the error occur again even if you
have cleared it in the Error Clear Mode?
No
Yes
No
Replace the Solid State

Relay.
Thermistor.

Mode.)
7-14
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 3
Fuser Error (E-003)
Cause
Checking
order
1
Error clearance
Wires
Thermistors
(TH1 & TH2)
Checking
Error Clear Mode?
Mode.)
Result
Treatment
Yes

cooled down enough.
Mode and clear the
concerning error.
No
No

Thermistor.

Mode.)
7. 1. 2. 4
Main Motor Error (E-010)
Cause
Wires
DC Power Supply
(DCP1)
or Fuse
Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Result
Is the wire between the Main Motor and

PW11620 PCB connected properly?
wire (J220-4).
No
Connect it properly.
No

with the wires.
Yes
Replace the Fuse.
No
Replace the Main Motor.
Is it 24V?
Fuse is broken.
Main Motor (M1)
Is any Fuse broken?

Check the operation of Main Motor in the
Device Operation Mode of the Service
Mode.
Treatment
Device Code : 00 (Main Motor)

Does the Main Motor operate correctly?
Operation Mode.)
7-15
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 5
Fuser Motor Error (E-011)
Cause
Checking
order
1
Wires
DC Power Supply
(DCP1)
or Fuse
Checking
Result
Is the wire between the Fuser Motor and

wire (J220-4).
No
No

with the wires.
Yes
Replace the Fuse.
No
Replace the Fuser Motor.
Is it 24V?
Fuse is broken.
Fuser Motor (M2)
Is any Fuse broken?

Check the operation of Fuser Motor in
the Device Operation Mode of the
Service Mode.
Treatment
Device Code : 01 (Fuser Motor)

Does the Fuser Motor operate correctly?
Operation Mode.)
7. 1. 2. 6
Cause
Wires
Developer Press
Motor (M4)
Driver PCB B
(PW6654)
Developer Press
Sensor (PH4)
Developer Press Motor Error (E-012)

Checking
order
1
Checking
Result
Treatment
Are the wires among Developer Press

Sensor (PH4), PW11620 PCB, Driver
PCB B (PW6654) and Developer Press
Motor (M4) connected properly?
Turn off the machine, and then turn it on
again.
Did the Developer Unit move to the Drum
side?
Select the Signal Code 104 (Developer
Press Sensor) in the Signal Status Mode,
and then turn on the machine again.
No
No
Replace the Developer

Press Motor or Driver PCB
B.
No
Replace the Developer

Press Sensor.
No
Does the status change from H to L

after turning on?
Fuse

Mode.)
Does the fuse (F3) have proper
conductivity?
7-16
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 7
Counter Error (E-020)
Cause
Checking
order
1
Wires
DC Power Supply
(DCP1)
or Fuse
Checking
Result
Is the wire between the Counter and

wire (J220-5).
No
No

with the wires.
No
No
Replace the Counter.
Is it 24V?
Turn off the machine. Does the fuse (F1)
have proper conductivity?
Counter
Check the operation of the Counter in the

Mode.
Treatment
Device Code : 26 (Counter)

Does the Counter operate correctly?
Operation Mode.)
7. 1. 2. 8
High Voltage Output Error (E-031, E-032 & E-033)
E-031 : Image Corona Output Error

E-032 : Separation Corona Output Error
E-033 : Transfer Corona Output Error
Cause
Wires
Checking
order
1
Checking
Result
Image Corona
Are wires among Image Corona, HV

Power Supply PCB and PW11620 PCB
connected properly?
Is the Image Corona dirty?
Transfer Corona

Is the Transfer Corona dirty?
Yes
Yes
Separation Corona

Is the Separation Corona dirty?
Yes
Yes
HV Power Supply

Can you fix the problem if you replace
the HV Power Supply?
Yes
Yes
7-17
Treatment
No
Yes
Clean each Corona Wire,

Grid Plate and housing.
Clean each Corona Wire
and housing.
and housing.
OK
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 9
Bias Output Error (E-034)
Cause
Wires
Developer Unit
Checking
order
1
Checking
Are wires among Developer Unit, HV
Power Supply PCB and PW11620 PCB
connected properly?
Is the toner spilling out from the
Developer Unit?
(Or is there any similar problem?)
Is the high voltage for the Regulation
Roller leaking?
Treatment
Result
No
Yes

Grid Plate and housing.
Yes
Replace the Regulation

Roller.
Yes
OK
(The resistance between the central part

of the Regulation Roller and the Ground
is 5 mega ohm or smaller if its leaking.)
GND
Multi-meter
HV Power Supply
7. 1. 2. 10
Cause
Wires
Cutter Home
Position Sensors
(MS6 & MS7)

Cutter Error (E-040)

Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is the wire between the Cutter Unit and

Check the status of the following signals
Mode.
No
No
Replace the Cutter Unit.
No
Replace the Cutter Unit.
Signal Code :
094 (Cutter Home Position Right)
095 (Cutter Home Position Left)
Is the status L when the Cutter is at
each home position?
Developer Press
Sensor (PH4)

Mode.)
Check the operation of Cutter in the
Mode.
Device Code : 27 (Cutter Motor 1)
28 (Cutter Motor 2)
Does the Cutter operate?
Operation Mode.)
7-18
K116sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 11
Cause
PW11620 PCB
7. 1. 2. 12
Cause
Wires
Switch (MS4)
7. 1. 2. 13
Cause
Wires
Density Sensor
(PH11)
PW11620 PCB
7. 1. 2. 14
Cause
Wires
Density Sensor
(PH11)
PW11620 PCB
FPGA Error (E-050)

Checking
order
1
Checking
the PW11620 PCB?
Result
Yes
Treatment
OK
Developer Error (E-070)

Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Is the wire between Developer Unit and
Is the actuator of the Switch correctly
pressed down when you close the
Engine Unit or Toner Hatch?
Result
Treatment
No
No
Adjust the position of the

Switch (or Toner Hatch and
Engine Unit).
Density Sensor Error (E-080)

Checking
order
1
2
3
Checking
Is the wire between the Toner Density
Sensor and PW11620 PCB connected
properly?
the Density Sensor?
PW11620 PCB?
Result
Treatment
No
Yes
OK
No
OK
Density Sensor Output Error (E-081)

Checking
order
1
2
3
Checking
Is the wire between the Toner Density
Sensor and PW11620 PCB connected
properly?
the Density Sensor?
PW11620 PCB?
7-19
Result
Treatment
No
Yes
OK
No
OK
K116sm7e1
7. 2
Troubleshooting - Image Quality
7. 2. 1
Basic Image Adjustment
The following are the settings specified for the image creation components.
When a defective image is printed out, please check whether or not these settings are satisfied
first.
Component
Image Corona
Checking Point
(PW11620)
CP11 (+)
CPCOM (-)
Designated
voltage
1.3 +/-0.05VDC
Way of adjustment
Height of Corona
Wire
VR101
11mm
Transfer Corona
CP21 (+)
CP22 (-)
Plain paper:
1.2 +/-0.05VDC
other media:
1.0 +/-0.05VDC
VR201
Service Mode
04-029 (Plain)
04-030 (Tracing)
04-031 (Film)
11 mm
Separation Corona
(AC)
CP31 (+)
CPCOM (-)
5.0 +/-0.05V
VR302
Separation Corona
(DC)
Negative Developer
Roller Bias
CP33 (+)
Ground (-)
OUTPUT2 (+)
Ground (-)
-250 +/-5VDC
VR303
-180 +/-5VDC
Positive Developer
Roller Bias
Toner Supply Roller
Bias (On printing)
OUTPUT2 (+)
Ground (-)
OUTPUT1 (+)
OUTPUT2 (-)
+350 +/-5VDC
Service Mode
04-022 (Plain)
04-023 (Tracing)
04-024 (Film)
VR401
Toner Supply Roller

Bias (print interval)
OUTPUT1 (+)
OUTPUT2 (-)
Regulation Roller
Bias
Positive Cleaning
Roller Bias
Negative Cleaning
Roller Bias
OUTPUT2 (+)
OUTPUT3 (-)
OUTPUT5 (+)
Ground (-)
OUTPUT5 (+)
Ground (-)
11mm
the same voltage

as Developer
Bias
the same voltage
as Developer
Bias
-120 +/-5VDC
+450 +/-5VDC
Service Mode
04-622
OUT5 (+)
-550 +/-5VDC
OUT5 (-)
7-20
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2
Countermeasures - Image Quality
7. 2. 2. 1
Halftone is too light
Check the following matters with Test Pattern No.1 and No.3.
If necessary use other Test Patterns.
Cause
Checking
order
1
LED Head
Paper
2
3
Image Corona
Checking
Result
Treatment
Try to readjust each image creation

component according to [7.2.1 Basic
Image Adjustment] on page 7-20.
Is the problem fixed?
Is the Lens Array of LED Head dirty?
Can you fix the problem if you use a
newly unpacked paper?
Yes
OK
Yes
Yes
Yes
Is the input voltage to the Image

Corona correct?
No
Clean it.
1. If the paper was
humidified, instruct the
customer to properly
store the paper.
2. If the paper was not the
specified one, explain to
the customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Grid Plate and housing, or
replace the Corona Wire if it
is too dirty.
Readjust the input voltage.
Refer to [4. 3. 2 Check &
Adjustment of Analog
Voltage to the Image
Corona] on page 4-31.
Or replace the HV Power
Supply PCB.
1. Check the wire
connected to the Eraser
Lamp.
2. Check or replace the
Eraser Lamp.
1. Check the wire
connected to the
Separation Lamp.
2. Check or replace the
Separation Lamp.
and housing, or replace the
Corona Wire if it is too dirty.
Refer to
[4. 3. 3 Check & Adjustment
of Analog Voltage to the
Transfer Corona] on page
4-33.
Supply PCB.
Try to install the Developer
Unit so that they are
contacted to each other.
And supply the conductive
grease to the Electrode
Plates.
OK
Eraser Lamp
Does the Eraser Lamp light properly?
No
Separation Lamp
Does the Separation Lamp light

properly?
No
Transfer Corona
Is the Transfer / Separation Corona

dirty?
Yes
Is the input voltage to the Transfer

Corona correct?
No
Contact points of
Developer Bias
Is each Electrode Plate on the right of

the Developer Unit making contact to
the Electrode Plate on the machine
side?
No
HV Power Supply
PCB

the HV Power Supply PCB?
Yes
7-21
K116sm7e2
Cause
Installation of
Developer Unit
Developer Unit
Checking
order
10
11
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is the driving gear on the left of the

Developer Unit meshed with the driving
mechanism on machine side?
No
Is the Developer Roller evenly covered

with toner?
No
Check whether or not the

Cam of Developer Press
Unit surely presses the
Developer Unit.
Check the concerning gears.
Check the whole Developer
Unit to find the cause.
Replace the
Photoconductive Drum.
Yes
7-22
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 2
Halftone and solid black are too light
Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.3.
Cause
Checking
order
1
Transfer Corona
Paper
Lead Wire
Input voltage to the

Transfer Corona
Dirt of the LED

Head
Developer Unit
Checking
Turn off the machine in the middle of
printing, and then check the toner
image on the Drum.
Does the toner image look normal?
Is the Transfer/Separation Corona
Is the high voltage to the Transfer
Corona leaking?
Result
Yes
OK
Yes
No
Go on to the step 3.
No
Yes
Clean the Transfer Corona.
Yes
1. If the paper was

customer on the proper
way to store the paper.
image problem may
occur in that case.
Replace the Lead Wire.
Is the resistance of the Lead Wire about

10 kilo ohm? This wire connects
between the HV Power Supply and the
Transfer Corona.
Is the correct voltage supplied from the
HV Power Supply to the Transfer
Corona?
No
Is the LED Head dirty?
Yes

with toner?
Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed
toward the Drum? (Are the Counter
Rollers at both sides of the Developer
Roller touching the Drum Unit?)
No
No
No
Installation of
Developer Unit
10
Is the driving gear on the left of the

Developer Unit meshing properly to the
driving mechanism on machine side?
No
Toner Sensor
11
Is there enough toner in the Developer

Unit?
No
Yes
7-23
Treatment

Refer to
4-33.
Supply PCB.
Clean it.
Check the whole Developer
Unit to find the cause.
Remove the Developer Unit,
and then install it to the
machine correctly.
Check the Developer Press
Unit.
Cam of Developer Press
Unit surely presses the
Developer Unit.
Check the concerning gears.
1. Check the wire or the
connector connected to
the Toner Sensor.
2. Check the Toner Sensor.
Replace the
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 3
The whole image is extremely light
Cause
Paper
Checking
order
1
Transfer Corona
Checking
Result
Treatment

Yes
OK
Yes
Do you have the problem only when

you use film?
Yes

image on the Drum.
Yes
1. If the paper was

specified one, explain the
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Change the setting of Item
No.067 (Transfer Assist
Setting) in the Adjustment
Mode of Service Mode, so
that the Separation Lamp
works for the film.
No
No
Yes
Clean the Transfer Corona.
No
No

Refer to
4-33.
Supply PCB.
Check the driving
mechanism.
machine correctly.
Does the toner image look normal?

Is the high voltage of Transfer Corona
leaking?
Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10
kilo ohm? This wire connects between
the HV Power Supply and the Transfer
Corona.
Is the correct voltage inputted from the
HV Power Supply to the Transfer
Corona?
Lead Wire
Input voltage to the

Transfer Corona
Driving mechanism
of Developer Unit
Developer Unit
Is the Developer Unit driving normally?
No
No
Lead Wire
Developer Bias
10

Is the Lead Wire that supplies the
Developer Bias correctly connected?
Is the Developer Unit supplied with the
Developer Bias correctly?
7-24
No
No
Connect the Lead Wire

correctly.
Check the contact points of
Developer Bias, and also
check the HV Power Supply.
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 4
Density is uneven
Cause
Image Corona
Checking
order
1
Checking
Result
Treatment
Yes
Is the height of Corona Wire different

between left and right?
Yes
Clean the Image Corona, or

replace the Corona Wire.
Adjust the height properly.
Installation of
Developer Unit
LED Head
Eraser Lamp
3
4
Is the Lens Array dirty

Are all LED of the Eraser Lamp light
properly during the print?
Yes
No
Developer Unit

with toner?
No
Is the toner accumulating evenly in the

Developer Unit?
No

machine correctly.
Unit.
Clean it.
1. Replace the Eraser
Lamp.
2. Replace the PW11620
PCB.
1. Clean the Regulation
Roller.
2. Reinstall Scraper.
Level the machine correctly.
Result
Treatment
7. 2. 2. 5
No
Totally appeared foggy image
Cause
Checking
order
1
Checking
Is the Developer Roller insulated from
ground?
Is the foggy image printed even if you
print a completely white pattern?
Yes
OK
No
Check the Developer Roller

and connector.
Check the output voltage
from the HV Power Supply
to the Image Corona.
If it is not correct, readjust it.
Check the output voltage
from the HV Power Supply
to the Developer Unit.
If it is not correct, readjust it.
Supply PCB
Replace the
Developer Unit
Image Corona
Developer Bias
Is the Developer Unit supplied with the

correct Developer Bias during the
printing process?
No
Photoconductive
Drum
Have you used the Photoconductive

Drum longer than its part life?
Yes
7-25
Yes
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 6
Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical)
Cause
Checking
order
1
Light from the

outside
Image Corona
Developer Unit
7. 2. 2. 7
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is any light from the outside thrown onto

the Drum?
Yes
No
Install the outer cover

correctly.
Check if the Regulation
Roller is fixed at the proper
position.
If not, fix it at the correct
position.
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is there something like a filament on the

Grid Plate, which is contacting the
Drum?
Yes
Remove it.
Yes

Remove it.

with toner?
Yes
Clear black thin line (vertical)
Cause
Image Corona
Checking
order
1
Foreign substance
Photoconductive
Drum
Is there some foreign substance on

each Corona Unit or LED Head, which
is contacting the Drum?
Are there any black lines or damage on
the Drum which corresponds with the
positions of black lines on the print?
7-26
Yes
Yes
Clean the Drum.

Refer to [5. 5. 2 Cleaning of
Photoconductive Drum].
Replace the Drum if it is
damaged.
Be sure to find the cause of
the damage.
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 8
White line (Vertical)
Cause
Image Corona
Dirt of the LED

Head
Transfer/Separation
Corona
Developer Unit
Checking
order
1
2
3
4
Entrance of Fuser
Unit
Photoconductive
Drum
Checking
Result
Is there something like a filament on the

Grid Plate, which is contacting the
Drum?
Can you fix the problem if you clean the
LED Head?
Is there any foreign substance or dirt on
the Transfer/Separation Corona?
with the toner?
Yes
Remove it.
Yes
OK
Yes
Clean the Transfer /

Separation Corona.
Check whether or not there
is damage or foreign
substance on the Regulation
Roller.
Clean it off
Is there any foreign substance or dirt

around the entrance area of the Fuser
Unit?
Is there any damage on the Drum,
which runs to the direction of Drum
rotation.
7-27
No
Yes
Yes
Treatment
Clean the Drum

Replace the Drum if it is
damaged.
the damage.
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 9
Void of image
Cause
Checking
order
1
Paper
Developer Unit
Photoconductive
Drum
7. 2. 2.10
Checking
Result
Treatment
Print out the Test Patter No.7 (halftone).

Can you find voided image on the print?
Yes
Go to the step 2.
Yes
Does the void of image appear on the

print constantly keeping about 160mm
of interval?
Yes
Does the void of image mainly run

vertically as follows?
Yes
1. If the paper was humidified,

instruct the customer on
the proper way to store the
paper.
image problem may occur
in that case.
1. Clean the Counter Rollers
at both sides of the
Developer Roller.
2. Wipe the Developer Roller
with a dry cloth.
3. Replace the Developer
Roller if damaged.
1. Check if there is enough
toner in the Developer Unit.
2. Also select the Device
Status Mode and check the
Toner Sensor Signal
(Device Code: 107).
It must be L when the
toner is not covering the
Toner Sensor. If not,
replace the Toner Sensor.
Does the void of image appear on the

print constantly keeping about 251mm
of interval?
Yes
Clean the Drum.

Replace Drum if damaged.
the damage.
Dirt on the back of the print
Cause
Checking
order
1
Transfer Guides
Developer Unit
Fuser Unit
Checking
Result

Are the Transfer Guides of the Transfer
/ Separation Corona dirty with the
toner?
Yes
OK
Yes
Is too much toner accumulating under

the Developer Roller?
Is the Inner Transport Unit dirty with the
toner?
Is the Fuser Entrance Guide Plate dirty
with toner?
Are the Fuser Roller and Pressure
Roller dirty with toner?
Yes
Clean them.
After that, check the distance
between the Transfer Guide
and Drum. (It should be 0.6 to
0.7mm.)
Clean the Developer Unit.
7-28
Yes
Treatment
Yes
Clean it, and also find where

the toner came from.
Clean it.
Yes
Clean them
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2.11
Defective fusing
Cause
Fuser Unit
Paper
Fusing temperature
setting
Checking
order
1
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is the Fuser Roller properly heated up

after turning on the machine?
No
Is the type of paper selected on the UI

match the installed paper?
No
Refer to [7. 1. 2. 1 Fuser

Error (E-001, E-002 &
E-004)] to check the Fuser
Unit.
Select the correct paper type
on the UI.
1. If the paper was
image problem may
occur in that case.
Is there any part which is
burnt? Replace the part
thats burnt.
Set the fusing temperature
correctly.
Adjust the fusing pressure
correctly.
Does the fusing temperature specified

in the Service Mode suit the weight
(gram/square meter) of paper?
Yes
Yes
No
Fusing pressure
(Nip)
Print the Test Pattern No.2 with tracing

paper (36 or A0), and turn off the
machine in the middle of printing.
Remove the print from the machine and
check the nip width.
Is it 8.5 to 9.0mm?
No
(Measure at 2 mm from the edges.)

2mm
2mm
8.5 to 9.0mm
7-29
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2.12
Defective image placement, No Leading Edge
Correct leading margin is 5mm (+/-2mm).

Cause
Setting of Leading
Registration
Feed rollers
Checking
order
1
2
Registration Clutch
7. 2. 2.13
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is the Leading Registration properly

adjusted in the Service Mode?
Have you used the feeding rollers for a
very long term?
Does the Registration Clutch operate
correctly without slipping?
No
Adjust it properly.
Yes
Replace them.
No

Clutch.
Jitter
Cause
Photoconductive
Drum and its driving
mechanism
Checking
order
1
Developer Roller
Developer Unit
Fuser Unit
Checking
Result
Does the jitter appear on the print

constantly Keeping about 251mm of
interval?
Yes

interval?
Does a void of image appear on the
print constantly Keeping about 160mm
of interval?
constantly Keeping about 6.0mm of
interval?
Yes

interval?
Yes

interval?
Yes

interval?
Yes

interval?
Yes
7-30
Yes
Yes
Treatment
damage or foreign
substance on the driving
gears (80T & 50T).
foreign substance
between Drum and
Counter Rollers of
Developer Unit.
Check and correct the
engagement of Pulley Gear
on the Drum with Belt 4.
If the Developer Roller is
damaged, replace it.
Check if there is any
damage or foreign
gears (32T, 22T & 24T) on
the right side.
damage or foreign
gears (28T, 30T, 35T & 25T)
on the left side.
damage or foreign
gears (25/34T & 16/30T) on
the left side.
damage or foreign
gears (16T) on the left side.
Adjust (slightly slower) the
corresponding Fuser Motor
Speed 1 and 2.
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2.14
Image looks not sharp
Cause
Dirt on the LED
Head
Installation of LED
Head
Transfer /
Separation Corona
7. 2. 2.15
Checking
order
1
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is the LED Head dirty?
Yes
Clean it.
Remove the LED Head, and then reinstall it to the machine.

Yes
No
Is the Transfer / Separation Corona

dirty?
Yes
OK
Adjust the gap between LED
Head and Drum by adding or
removing the thin plates on
the Aluminium Block at both
sides of the Drum.
Clean it.
Result
Treatment
Uneven image density (vertical)
Cause
Image Corona
Transfer/Separation
Corona
Installation of LED
Head
Checking
order
1
2
3
Checking
dirty?
Remove the LED Head, and then reinstall it to the machine.
Is the density of any image block
different from that of other blocks?
Yes
Yes
Clean it.
Clean it.
Yes
OK
Yes
Adjust the gap between LED

Head and Drum by adding or
removing the Spacers on the
Aluminium Block.
Is the width of abnormal density area

about 8mm as follows?
Yes
Replace the LED Head.
8mm
7-31
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2.16
Completely white (No image)
Check the following matters with Test Pattern No.1.

Cause
Developer Press
Unit
Driving mechanism
of Developer Unit
Developer Bias
LED Head
Checking
order
1
2
3
Transfer/Separation
Corona
Lead Wire of
Transfer Corona
HV Power Supply
PW11620 PCB
7. 2. 2.17
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is the Developer Unit correctly pressed

to the Drum?
Does the Developer Roller rotate during
the print process?
Is each Electrode Plate on the right of
the Developer Unit surely contacted to
the Electrode Plate on the machine
side?
No
Are connectors of the signal cable firmly

connected to the LED Head?
image on the Drum.
No

Unit.
Check the driving
mechanism of Process Unit.
Try to install the Developer
Unit so that they are
contacting each other.
And supply the conductive
grease to the Electrode
Plates.
Connect them firmly.
No
Replace the LED Head.
Yes
No
Replace it.
Yes
Is there any toner image on the Drum?

Is the Transfer Corona Wire broken?
Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit
correctly installed to the machine?
If the high voltage leaking from the
Transfer Corona?
No
No
Is the connection of Lead Wire correct?
No
Check the Transfer /

Separation Corona to find
the cause for leaking.
Connect it correctly.
Is the resistance of the Lead Wire about

10 kilo ohm? This wire connects
between the HV Power Supply and the
Transfer Corona.
the PW11620 PCB?
No
Yes
OK
Yes
OK
Completely black
Cause
Image Corona or
HV Power Supply
PCB
PW11620 PCB
Checking
order
1
Checking
Result
Is the Image Corona Wire broken?

Is the tension of the Corona Wire
correct?
Is the Corona Wire correctly stretched
with the springs?
Is a proper high voltage supplied to the
Image Corona?
Yes
No
Replace it.
Replace it.
No
Is the housing of the Image Corona

insulated from the ground?
the PW11620 PCB?
No

springs are deformed.
Adjust the high voltage, or
replace the HV Power
Supply PCB
Replace the Zener PCB.
Yes
OK
7-32
No
Treatment
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2.18
Crease of paper
Cause
Paper
Lamp (H1, H2) of

Fuser
Blower (Separation)
Checking
order
1
3
4
Blower
(Fuser Cooler)
Fuser Entrance
Guide
Fusing pressure
(Nip)
Checking
Result
Make several prints continuously.

Can you find the crease on the 2nd or
later prints?
Does the type of paper selected on the
UI match the installed paper?
Yes
Go to the following 8.
No
Is the Dehumidify Heater ON although

the air is not humid.
Does the Lamp light correctly?
Yes
No

on the UI.
1. If the paper was
image problem may
occur in that case.
Turn off the Dehumidify
Heater.
Replace it.
Is this Blower working properly while

printing?
This Blower helps paper transportation.
Is this Blower working properly when
printing wide prints (30/ 34/ 36/ A0)?
This blower cools down the Fuser.
Is the Fuser Entrance Guide deformed?
Or Is there anything on the Fuser
Entrance Guide?
Remove the Pressure Roller and
measure the height of the Fuser
Entrance Guide. Is the height correct?
No
Replace it.
No
Replace it.
Yes
Clean or replace it.
No
Turn the adjuster screw(s) to

reach the correct height.
No

correctly.
Yes
Make the Fuser Motor speed

faster.
From the frame bottom surface,

Middle : 60.5 to 61.0mm
Side : 58.5 to 59.0mm
Print the Test Patter No.2 with tracing
Is it 8.5 to 9.0mm?
(Measure at 2 mm from the edge.)
2mm
Yes
Treatment
2mm
8.5 to 9.0mm
Fuser Motor speed
Is the paper slackened during the

transportation when you make a long
print?
7-33
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2.19
Double Image

Cause
Paper
Lamp (H1, H2) of

Fuser
Blower (Separation)
Checking
order
1
Result
Treatment

No
Does the Lamp light correctly?
No

on the UI.
1. If the paper was
image problem may
occur in that case.
Replace it.
Is this Blower working properly while

printing?
This blower helps paper transportation.
Is this Blower working properly when
printing wide prints (30/ 34/ 36/ A0)?
This blower cools down the Fuser?
Is the Fuser Entrance Guide deformed?
Or Is there anything on the Fuser
Entrance Guide?
Remove the Pressure Roller and
measure the height of the Fuser
Entrance Guide. Is the height correct?
No
Replace it.
No
Replace it.
Yes
Clean or replace it.
No
Turn the adjuster screw(s) to

reach the correct height.
No

correctly.
Yes
Is there any part which is

burnt? Replace the part
thats burnt.
Set the fusing temperature
correctly.
Blower
(Fuser Cooler)
Fuser Entrance
Guide
Fusing Pressure
(Nip)
Checking
From the frame bottom surface,

Middle : 60.5 to 61.0mm
Side : 58.5 to 59.0mm
Print the Test Patter No.2 with tracing
Is it 8.5 to 9.0mm?
(Measure at 2 mm from the edge.)
2mm
Yes
2mm
8.5 to 9.0mm
Fusing Temperature
Does the fusing temperature specified

in the Service Mode suit the weight
(gram/square meter) of paper?
No
7-34
K116sm7e2
7. 2. 2.20
Dirt on the print (Offset)

Cause
Paper
Developer Unit or
Transfer/Separation
Corona
Fuser Unit
Checking
order
1
2
Checking
Result
Treatment

Does the paper have dirt on it before it
enters the Fuser Unit?
No

on the UI.
Check the Developer Unit or
Transfer/Separation Corona
to find the cause.
Decrease the setting value
of fusing temperature (-3 to 5).
OK
Clean the Fuser Roller.

Do you still have the problem even after
the cleaning?
Yes
Yes
No
7-35
K116sm7e2
7. 3
Troubleshooting - Scanner Defects
7. 3. 1
Countermeasures - Scanner operation
7. 3. 1. 1
Original can not be set (Scanner does not transport)
Cause
Checking
order
1
Sensor
USB Cable
Data Controller
Board
7. 3. 1. 2
2
3
Checking
Result
Is the original detected?

(Is it shown on the UI?)
No
Is the USB Cable connected correctly?

the Data Controller Board?
No
Yes
Foreign substance
Checking
order
1
Checking
Result
Motor
Is there any foreign substance under

the Upper Unit?
Does the Motor rotate?
+24VDC
Is +24VDC supplied to the scanner?
No
Data Controller
Board

the Data Controller Board?
Yes
Cause
Sensor
Check the sensor which

detects the leading edge of
original.
If broken replace it.
Check this sensor.

Connect it correctly.
OK
Scanner does not start scanning from the original set

position
Cause
7. 3. 1. 3
Treatment
Treatment
Yes
Remove it.
No
Check the Motor, and

replace it if broken.
Check the DC Power Supply
on the printer part.
Replace it if broken.
OK
Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop)

Checking
order
1
Checking
Is any sensor broken?
7-36
Result
Yes
Treatment
Replace it.
K116sm7e2
7. 3. 1. 4
Original is mis-fed
Cause
Foreign substance
7. 3. 1. 5
Checking
the Upper Unit?
Result
Yes
Treatment
Remove it.
Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on
Cause
Foreign substance
7. 3. 1. 6
Checking
order
1
Checking
order
1
Checking
Result

the Upper Unit, which blocks the light to
the sensor?
Yes
Treatment
Remove it.
Scanner is not recognized
Cause
USB Driver
Checking
order
1
USB Cable
DC Power Supply
Data Controller
Board
Checking
Does the PC recognize USB?
Is there any problem with the USB
cable, such as breakage, short-circuit or
damage to connector pin?
Is the DC Power Supply on the printer
part normal?
Prepare another PC which can
recognize another type of USB
Scanner.
Is it also impossible to recognize the
scanner (of KIP 3100) with this PC?
7-37
Result
1
Yes
No
Yes
Treatment
Check the USB Driver in
Device Manager.
Replace the USB Cable.

Supply.
Replace the Data Controller
PCB.
K116sm7e2
7. 3. 2
Countermeasures Scan Image Quality
7. 3. 2. 1
Completely black
Cause
Calibration
Checking
order
1
Cable of CIS
LED of CIS
7. 3. 2. 2
Cause
Scan Glass
Calibration
Feeding rollers
CIS
3
4
Cause
Result
Treatment
Can you fix the problem if you complete

the Shading (Calibration)?
(Refer to [8.12.4.1 Shading].)
Is the cable of each CIS connected
properly?
Yes
OK
No
Is the LED of each CIS lighting?
No
Connect it properly, or
replace the cable if it is
broken.
1. Check the DC Power
Supply (+24V) in the
printer.
Replace it if broken.
2. Replace the CIS.
3. Replace the Data
Controller Board.
Vertical black lines

Checking
order
1
7. 3. 2. 3
Checking
Checking
Result
Treatment
Is there any dirt or damage on the Scan

Glass?
Are the feeding rollers dirty?
the CIS?
Yes
Clean / replace it.
Yes
OK
Yes
Yes
Clean them.
OK
Vertical white lines
Scan Glass
Checking
order
1
Calibration
Feeding rollers
CIS
3
4
Checking
Result

Glass?
Are the feeding rollers dirty?
the CIS?
Yes
Clean / replace it.
Yes
OK
Yes
Yes
Clean them.
OK
7-38
Treatment
K116sm7e2
7. 3. 2. 4
Cause
Calibration
7. 3. 2. 5
Cause
Calibration
7. 3. 2. 6
Cause
Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks

Checking
order
1
Checking
order
1
Resolution
Calibration

the Position adjustment?
(Refer to [8.12.4.3 Position].)
Yes
Treatment
OK
Checking
Result

the Position adjustment?
(Refer to [8.12.4.3 Position].)
Yes
Treatment
OK
Image quality is not good
Scan Glass
Cause
Result
Vertical image gap between Image Blocks
Checking
order
1
7. 3. 2. 7
Checking
Checking
Result
Treatment

Glass?
Is the resolution setting proper?
Yes
Clean / replace it.
No
Adjust it properly.
Density is different between left and right

Checking
order
1
Checking
Result

Yes
7-39
Treatment
OK
K116sm7e2
7. 4 Touch Screen Calibration

If the cursor position in the screen does not correctly match the tapped position on the panel, the
touch screen should be calibrated so that the cursor is located directly underneath your finger or a
stylus.
1. Press [?] at the lower right on the screen.
2. Press [Service] to enter Service Configuration screen.
7-40
K116sm7e3
3. A password entry window will pop up.

Type 8495107 and press [Enter].
4. Service Configuration screen is displayed. Press [OK].
5. Make sure that a wrench symbol is indicated at the upper right of the screen.
Press [Reset] to close UI operation window.
7-41
K116sm7e3
6. Tap Diagnostics folder twice as a double-click.

Run the shortcut TouchScreen Configure Utility for touch screen calibration.
7. Select [Tools] tab.
7-42
K116sm7e3
8. Press [Draw Test] to check that the touch screen

correctly detects a tapped position.
NOTE
Using a stylus is recommended for easy and accurate touch screen calibration.
Do not use any sharp instrument.
9. Test screen will appear.
7-43
K116sm7e3
10. Tap a certain point and check if the cursor appears directly underneath the stylus.
For example, suppose you tap the point shown
the next figure.
Tap this cross
The cursor will appear just underneath the tapped point in a correct condition (calibration is not
necessary).
Cursor matches the tap point
Cursor
Tap point
If the cursor appears at an unintended position, the touch screen should be calibrated.
Cursor does not match the tap point
Cursor
Tap point
7-44
K116sm7e3
11. Tap [Quit] to close Test screen.
12. Press [4 Points Calibration].
13. On the Calibration screen, a blinking X symbol appears on the bottom left corner.
Press the X until it stops blinking with a beep.
NOTE
Press the X symbol for several seconds before the progress bar at the bottom reaches the
end.
7-45
K116sm7e3
14. The X disappears and the next one will come in the following order:
bottom right, top right, top left.
Perform the same way for the other 3 points.
15. When all the 4 points are pressed successfully, Calibration screen disappears and the
following dialog appears. Press [OK].
16. Press [OK] to finish touch screen calibration.
7-46
K116sm7e3
17. Run the shortcut Restart KIP UI for KIP UI operation.
7-47
K116sm7e3
Chapter 8
Service Mode / KIP Scanner Utility
8. 1 Outline of Service Mode

8. 1. 1 Entering Service Mode
8. 1. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode
8. 1. 3 Cancelling the Service Mode
Page
8- 6
8- 6
8- 7
8- 8
8. 2 Signal Status Mode

8. 2. 1 Function
8. 2. 2 Indication and Operation
8. 2. 3 Device Signal List
8- 9
8- 9
8- 9
8- 10
8. 3 Information Mode
8. 3. 1 Function
8-12
8-12
8-12
8. 4 Device Operation Mode

8. 4. 1 Function
8-16
8-16
8-16
8. 5 Adjustment Mode
8. 5. 1 Function
8. 5. 3 Setting Item list
8. 5. 4 Explanation for each Setting Item
8. 5. 4. 1 Leading Registration (No. 000 & 001)
8. 5. 4. 2 Trailing Margin (No. 002 & 003)
8. 5. 4. 3 Side Margin (Left & Right) (No. 004)
8. 5. 4. 4 Side Registration (No. 005 to 007)
8. 5. 4. 5 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel of each Block (No.008 to 010)
8. 5. 4. 6 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) of each Block
(No.011 to 013)
8. 5. 4. 7 Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Blocks (No.014 & 015)
8. 5. 4. 8 Cut Length 1 (length information provided) (No.016)
8. 5. 4. 9 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) (No.017)
8. 5. 4.10 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of a long print) (No.018)
8. 5. 4.11 Leading Margin (No.019)
8. 5. 4.12 Cut Length 4 (Compensation of a long print) (No.020)
8. 5. 4.13 Developer Bias (No.022 to 027)
8. 5. 4.14 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution (No.028)
8. 5. 4.15 Transfer Voltage (No.029 to 034)
8. 5. 4.16 Separation Corona ON Timing (No.035)
8. 5. 4.17 Transfer Corona ON Timing (No.037)
8. 5. 4.18 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (No.038)
8. 5. 4.19 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (No.039 to 044)
8. 5. 4.20 Fuser Temperature to start idling (No.045)
8. 5. 4.21 Warm Sleep Fuser Temperature (No.046)
8. 5. 4.22 Fuser Temperature Control Range (No.048 & 049)
8. 5. 4.23 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor (No.050)
8. 5. 4.24 Toner Supply Motor ON Time (No.051)
8-18
8-18
8-18
8-20
8-36
8-36
8-36
8-37
8-38
8-39
8-41
8-43
8-44
8-44
8-45
8-47
8-48
8-49
8-50
8-50
8-51
8-51
8-52
8-53
8-54
8-54
8-55
8-56
8-56
K116sm8e1
8. 5. 4.25
8. 5. 4.26
8. 5. 4.27
8. 5. 4.28
8. 5. 4.29
8. 5. 4.30
8. 5. 4.31
8. 5. 4.32
8. 5. 4.33
8. 5. 4.34
8. 5. 4.35
8. 5. 4.36
8. 5. 4.37
8. 5. 4.38
8. 5. 4.39
8. 5. 4.40
8. 5. 4.41
8. 5. 4.42
8. 5. 4.43
8. 5. 4.44
8. 5. 4.45
8. 5. 4.46
8. 5. 4.47
8. 5. 4.48
8. 5. 4.49
8. 5. 4.50
8. 5. 4.51
8. 5. 4.52
8. 5. 4.53
8. 5. 4.54
8. 5. 4.55
8. 5. 4.56
8. 5. 4.57
8. 5. 4.58
8. 5. 4.59
8. 5. 4.60
Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No.052)

Feed Clutch (CL3) OFF time applied to long print (No.053 & 054)
Metric or Inch (No.055)
Language (No.056)
Interface Communication Setting (No.057)
Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No.058)
Counter Value (No.059)
Maximum Length (No.060)
Stacking Device setting (No.061)
Operation of Fuser Roller (No.062)
Cut Length 5 & 6 (Compensation for Tracing Paper / Film)
(No. 063 & 064)
Drum Reverse Rotation Period (No.065)
Fuser Motor Reverse Setting (No.066)
Operation of Separation Lamp (No.067)
Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper
(Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.070 to 075, 678, 679)
(Tracing paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.076 to 081, 680, 681)
(Film / A3, 12 & 11) (No.082 to 087, 682, 683)
(Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.088 to 093, 684, 685)
(Special tracing paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.094 to 099, 686, 687)
(Special film / A3, 12 & 11) (No.100 to 105, 688, 689)
(Film / A2, 18 & 17) (No.118 to 123, 694, 695)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.154 to 159, 706, 707)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.190 to 195, 718, 719)
8-1
8-57
8-58
8-59
8-59
8-59
8-59
8-59
8-60
8-60
8-60
8-61
8-62
8-62
8-63
8-64
8-67
8-68
8-69
8-70
8-71
8-72
8-73
8-74
8-75
8-76
8-77
8-78
8-79
8-80
8-81
8-82
8-83
8-84
8-85
8-86
8-87
K116sm8e1
8. 5. 4.61 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper

8. 5. 4.63 Main Motor Speed (No.310 to 315)
8. 5. 4.64 Fuser Motor Speed (36/34/30/24/22/A0/B1/A1) (No.316 to 321)
8. 5. 4.65 Separation Corona OFF Timing (No.322 to 327)
8. 5. 4.66 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper
(Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.328 to 333)
(Tracing paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.334 to 339)
(Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.340 to 345)
(Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.346 to 351)
(Special tracing paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.352 to 357)
(Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.358 to 363)
(Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.364 to 369)
(Tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.370 to 375)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.376 to 381)
(Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.382 to 387)
(Special tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.388 to 393)
(Special film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.394 to 399)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.412 to 417)
(Plain paper / 30) (No.436 to 441, 726, 727)
(Tracing paper / 30) (No.442 to 447, 728, 729)
(Film / 30) (No.448 to 453, 730, 731)
(Special plain paper / 30) (No.454 to 459, 732, 733)
(Special tracing paper / 30) (No.460 to 465, 734, 735)
(Special film / 30) (No.466 to 471, 736, 737)
(Plain paper / 30) (No.472 to 477)
(Tracing paper / 30) (No.478 to 483)
8-2
8-88
8-89
8-90
8-90
8-90
8-91
8-92
8-93
8-94
8-95
8-96
8-97
8-98
8-99
8-100
8-101
8-102
8-103
8-104
8-105
8-106
8-107
8-108
8-109
8-110
8-111
8-112
8-113
8-114
8-115
8-116
K116sm8e1

(Film / 30) (No.484 to 489)
(Special plain paper / 30) (No.490 to 495)
(Special tracing paper / 30) (No.496 to 501)
(Special film / 30) (No.502 to 507)
8. 5. 4.96 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge
(Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.508 to 510)
8. 5. 4.98 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge
8. 5. 4.99 Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length
for Non-standard Size Prints (No.613 to 616)
8. 5. 4.100 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints
(No.617 to 620)
8. 5. 4.101 Toner Supply Roller Bias (No.621)
8. 5. 4.102 Regulation Bias (No.622)
8. 5. 4.103 Density Sensor Default Output (No.623)
8. 5. 4.104 Density Sensor Standard Output (No.624)
8. 5. 4.105 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (12/11/A3) (No.625 to 630)
8. 5. 4.106 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (18/17/15/A2) (No.631 to 636)
8. 5. 4.107 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (24/22/A1) (No.637 to 642)
8. 5. 4.108 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (36/34/30/A0/B1) (No.643 to 648)
8. 5. 4.109 Density Sensor Output Information (No.649)
8. 5. 4.110 Regulation Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 2 & 3 (No.650)
8. 5. 4.111 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment (No.651)
8. 5. 4.112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No.652)
8. 5. 4.113 Minimum Density (No.653)
8. 5. 4.114 Regulation Bias Maximum (No.654)
8. 5. 4.115 Density Measure Interval (No.655, 656)
8. 5. 4.116 Developer Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 1 (No.657)
8. 5. 4.117 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (No.660 to 665)
8. 5. 4.118 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (No.666 to 671)
8. 5. 4.119 Fuser Motor Speed (18/17/15/12/11/A2/A3) (No.672 to 677)
8. 5. 4.120 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed 4 for Roll (No.678 to 736)
8. 5. 4.121 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (No.679 to 737)
8. 5. 4.122 Standby - Fuser Temperature (No.738, 739)
8. 5. 4.123 Assist Fan Off Timing (No.740 to 742)
(36/34/30/A0/B1) (No.643 to 648)
8-117
8-118
8-119
8-119
8-120
8-120
8-120
8-121
8-123
8-123
8-123
8-124
8-124
8-125
8-125
8-126
8-126
8-127
8-127
8-128
8-129
8-131
8-131
8-131
8-132
8-133
8-133
8-134
8-134
8-134
8-135
8-135
8-135
8. 6 Running Mode
8. 6. 1 Function
8-136
8-136
8-136
8. 7 Jam/Error Mask Mode

8. 7. 1 Function
8-138
8-138
8-138
8. 8 Test Print Mode

8. 8. 1 Function
8. 8. 2. 1 Print Start Mode
8. 8. 2. 2 Deck Selection
8. 8. 2. 3 Paper Length
8. 8. 2. 4 Print Count
8. 8. 2. 5 Image Pattern
8-141
8-141
8-141
8-143
8-143
8-144
8-145
8-145
8-3
K116sm8e1
8. 8. 2. 6
8. 8. 2. 7
8. 8. 2. 8
8. 8. 2. 9
8. 8. 2.10
8. 8. 2.11
8. 8. 2.12
8. 8. 2.13
8. 8. 2.14
Manual Type
Manual Size
Roll 1 Size
Roll 1 Size Setting
Manual Size
Roll 2 Size Setting
Mirror
Nega/Posi
Scale
8-147
8-147
8-148
8-148
8-149
8-149
8-150
8-150
8-151
8. 9 Factory Adjustment Mode (Factory Use Only)

8. 9. 1 Function
8-152
8-152
8-152
8.10 Clear Mode

8.10. 1 Function
8.10. 2 Indication and Operation
8.10. 2. 1 RAM Clear Mode
8.10. 2. 2 Error Clear Mode
8.10. 2. 3 Jam History Clear Mode
8.10. 2. 4 Error History Clear Mode
8.10. 2. 5 Software Counter Setting Mode
8.10. 2. 6 Total Counter Setting Mode
8.10. 2. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode
8-154
8-154
8-154
8-156
8-156
8-157
8-157
8-158
8-159
8-160
8.11 User Mode

8.11. 1 Construction of the User Mode
8.11. 2 Selecting each sub mode
8.11. 3 Status Indication (Normal Mode)
8.11. 4 Deck Information Mode
8.11. 4. 1 Function
8.11. 4. 2 Indication and Operation
8.11. 5 Setting Mode 1
8.11. 5. 1 Function
(1) Material setting
(2) Size setting
8.11. 6. 1 Function
(1) Selection of each Sub Mode
(2) ON / OFF setting of Warm Sleep Mode
(3) Timer setting of Warm Sleep Mode
(4) ON / OFF setting of Cold Sleep Mode
(5) Timer setting of Cold Sleep Mode
(6) ON / OFF setting of Auto Power OFF
(7) Timer setting of Auto Power OFF
(8) Transfer Assist setting
(9) Smoothing setting
(10) Dot Enhancement ON/OFF setting
(11) Full Image Mode setting
(12) Low Temperature Mode setting
8.11. 7 Command Mode
8.11. 7. 1 Function
8-161
8-161
8-161
8-161
8-163
8-163
8-163
8-165
8-165
8-165
8-165
8-167
8-169
8-169
8-169
8-170
8-171
8-172
8-173
8-174
8-175
8-176
8-177
8-178
8-179
8-180
8-181
8-182
8-182
8-182
8.12 KIP Scanner Utility

8.12. 1 Installation
8.12. 1. 1 Installing USB Driver
8.12. 1. 2 Installing KIP Scanner Utility
8-184
8-184
8-184
8-187
8-4
K116sm8e1
8.12. 2 Starting KIP Scanner Utility

8.12. 3 Displaying Scanner Information
8.12. 4 Scanner Adjustment
8.12. 4. 1 Shading (Calibration)
8.12. 4. 2 Feed Distance (1:1)
8.12. 4. 3 Position (Stitching)
8.12. 5 Updating Scanner Firmware
8-189
8-190
8-191
8-191
8-197
8-205
8-215
8.13 Firmware Update (PW11620)
8-217
8-5
K116sm8e1
8. 1
Outline of Service Mode
8. 1. 1
Entering Service Mode
1. Remove the cover from the front face of the machine to access the Sub UI.
2. Confirm that the machine is OFF.

Then turn on the machine while pressing the [MENU] Key.
You can unlock the key operation of Sub UI by this operation, so it becomes possible to enter
the Service Mode.
P r i n t er
R1 : 36
MENU
r ea dy
ENTER
NOTE
It is impossible to enter the Service Mode if the key operation is locked.
3. Press and hold the [ * ] key, and then press the keys in the order as [
to enter the Service Mode.
All segments on the LCD light when you enter the Service Mode.
], [
], [
] and [
All segments light.
4. Keep your finger away from the [ * ] key, and the ROM version is indicated.
ROM version is indicated.
ROM
Ver . 11 6X0 1A
FPGA Ver . 1. 1
5. Then, select the necessary Sub Mode making reference to [1. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode] on
the next page.
8-6
K105sm8e2
8. 1. 2
Selecting each Sub Mode
Service Mode consists of the following 9 sub modes.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Service Mode Name

Device Status Mode
Information Mode
Device Operation Mode
Adjustment Mode
Running Mode
Jam/Error Masking Mode
Test Print Mode
Factory Adjustment Mode
Clear Mode
You can select each sub mode orderly whenever you press the [MENU] key.
( 1) I / O Mode
Press [MENU] key

Press [MENU] key
( 2) I n f o Mode
( 9) C l e a r Mode
Press [MENU] key
Press [MENU] key
( 3) Chec k Mode
( 8) Fac t o r y Mode
Press [MENU] key
( 4) A d j us t
Press [MENU] key
Mode
( 7) Tes t
Press [MENU] key
Mode
Press [MENU] key
( 5) Runn i ng Mode
( 6) Mas k Mode
Press [MENU] key
8-7
K105sm8e2
8. 1. 3
Cancelling the Service Mode
Press and hold the [MENU] key, and then press the [ * ] key to cancel the Service Mode.
The LCD indicates printers status after the cancellation.
P r i n t e r Ready
R1 : 36
R2 : 24
NOTE
The key operation of Sub UI is automatically locked if you turn off the machine.
8-8
K105sm8e2
8. 2
8. 2. 1
Signal Status Mode

Function
It is possible to observe the status of each signal (input and output) independently.
8. 2. 2
Indication and Operation
1. Indicate (1) I/O Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key.
( 1) I / O Mode
2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Signal Status Mode.
The LCD indicates signal code, signal name and signal status.
Signal code
No000
I / O ( - H- )
Signal status
Sw i t c h 1
Signal name
3. Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the necessary signal code on the LCD.
The LCD also indicates the signal name and its status according to the selected signal code.
8-9
K105sm8e2
8. 2. 3
Signal
Code
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
Device Signal List
Symbol
IC Port
Connector
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
------MAN_S
DOOR_OPN
SEP_S
HEAT_EXIT
--HEAT_DOOR
--SIG_IN
ONLINE_LED
--------SIG_OUT
HEAT_BL_L
HEAT_BL_H
MAMTR
HEAT_M
HV_1ST
HV_TR
HV_AC
BIAS_TRG
BIAS_SW
--H1_CW_CCW
PRESS_M
TONER_M
CLEAN_SW
IC3-P20
IC3-P21
IC3-P22
IC3-P23
IC3-P24
IC3-P25
IC3-P26
IC3-P27
IC3-P40
IC3-P41
IC3-P42
IC3-P43
IC3-P44
IC3-P45
IC3-P46
IC3-P47
IC3-60
IC3-61
IC3-62
IC3-63
IC3-64
IC3-65
IC3-66
IC3-67
IC3-P10
IC3-P11
IC3-P12
IC3-P13
IC3-P14
IC3-P15
IC3-P16
IC3-P17
IC3-P30
IC3-P31
IC3-P32
IC3-P33
J205-17
J205-18
J205-19
J205-20
J205-21
J202-7
J202-8
J215-3
J204-20
J204-21
J204-22
J204-23
J204-24
J207-16
J207-15
J204-27
J205-15
J207-14
J215-7
J215-8
J207-13
J204-28
J207-12
J207-12
J206-7
J206-8
J206-9
J206-10
J206-11
J206-12
J206-13
J206-14
J206-15
J206-16
J206-17
J206-18
036
037
FEED_BL
HEAT1
IC3-P34
IC3-P35
J206-22
J206-25
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
COOL_BL
POWER_OFF
ER2
COUNT
HEAT_RY
SLCT_CL
FOWE_CL
IC3-P36
IC3-P37
IC3-P50
IC3-P51
IC3-P52
IC3-P53
IC3-P54
J206-26
J206-27
J207-3
J207-4
J207-5
045
BACK_CL
IC3-P55
046
047
048
049
050
FEED_CL
REGIST_CL
M_LD
FUMTR_LD
DIS_CN
IC3-P56
IC3-P57
IC3-P80
IC3-P81
IC3-P82
J207-6(R1)
J207-8(R2)
J207-9(R1)
J208-9(R2)
J207-10
J207-11
J207-4
J203-14
J203-15
051
HV1_LD
IC3-P83
J203-16
052
TR_LD
IC3-P84
J203-17
053
AC_LD
IC3-P85
J203-18
Signal Name
Input Switch 1
Input Switch 2
Input Switch 3
Input Switch 4
Input Switch 5
Input /
Output
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
L : ON
L : ON
L : ON
L : ON
L : ON
Manual Feed Sensor

Roll Deck Open
Separation Sensor
Exit Sensor
Input
Input
Input
Input
H : Paper detected
H : Open
L : Paper detected
L : Paper detected
Heater Hatch Open
Input
L : Open
Stacker Input
Online LED
Input
Output
H : ON
Stacker Output
Fuser Blower (Low)
Fuser Blower (High)
Main Motor
Fuser Motor
Image Corona
Transfer Corona
Separation Corona
Developer Bias
Developer Bias Polarity Switch
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
H : ON
H : ON
H : Rotate
H : Rotate
H : Output
H : Output
H : Output
H : Output
L : Positive Bias
Main Motor Reversal Rotation

Developer Press Motor
Hopper Motor
Cleaning Roller Voltage
Polarity Switch
Blower (BL7) Control
SSR ON/OFF Signal 1
Output
Output
Output
Output
H : Reverse
H : Rotate
H : Rotate
L : Positive
Output
Output
Fuser Cooling Fan

Power Switch Output
Separation Lamp Control
Counter
Fuser Relay
Clutch Selection (Roll 1 or 2)
Roll 1&2 Feed Clutch
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
H : Rotate
H : Heater Lamp
lights
H : Rotate
H : OFF
H : Lighting
H : Counting up
H : ON
H : Roll 1
H : ON
Roll 1&2 Back Clutch
Output
H : ON
Feed Clutch
Registration Clutch
Main Motor Output Detection
Fuser Motor Output Detection
Developer Connection
Detection
Image Corona Output
Detection
Transfer Corona Output
Detection
Separation Corona Output
Detection
Output
Output
Input
Input
Input
H : ON
H : ON
8-10
Status
Input
Input
Input
K105sm8e2
Signal
Code
054
Symbol
IC Port
Connector
BIAS_LD
IC3-P86
J203-19
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
COUNT_OPEN
DA CLOCK
DA DI1
DA BS1
DA DI2
DA BS2
H2_CW_CCW
HEAT2
IC3-P87
IC3-P70
IC3-P71
IC3-P72
IC3-P73
IC3-P74
IC3-P75
IC3-P76
J203-20
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
--------DENS_SNS1
------LED2
IBUSY_H
IPRADY_L
IPREQ_L
PAGEBL
TEST_H
I_POW_ON_A
LED_EN
CLEAN BIAS
LCD_CLK
LCD_DATA
LCD_EN
LCD_RW
LCD_RS
RESET_SIG
RXD0
RXD1
RXD2
TXD0
TXD1
TXD2
MSCUTR
IC3-P77
IC3-P90
IC3-P91
IC3-P92
IC3-P93
IC3-P94
IC3-P95
IC3-P96
IC3-P97
IC1-P10
IC1-P11
IC1-P12
IC1-P13
IC1-P14
IC1-P15
IC1-P16
IC1-P17
IC1-P20
IC1-P21
IC1-P23
IC1-P24
IC1-P22
IC1-P25
IC1-P26
IC1-P27
IC1-P32
IC1-P33
IC1-P51
IC1-P30
IC1-P31
IC1-P50
IC1-P60
095
MSCUTL
IC1-P61
J204-6
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
-----
MCUTL
MCUTR
IPRINT_L
IPCUT_L
REGIST_S
R1_ENC_S
R2_ENC_S
VLC_OFF
PRESS_S
R1_SET_S
R2_SET_S
TONER_S
R_EDGE
FEED_ENC
IC1-P63
IC1-P62
IC1-P34
IC1-P64
IC1-P65
IC1-P66
IC1-P67
IC1-PG0
IC1-PA5
IC1-PA6
IC1-PA7
AN5
IC1-PF7
IC1-PF1
J207-1
J207-2
J215-4
J215-5
J215-9
J215-10
J215-12
J215-13
J215-14
J215-15
J215-16
Signal Name
Developer Bias Output
Detection
Counter Connection Detection
DA Conversion Clock
DA Enable 1
DA Data 1
DA Enable 2
DA Data 2
Fuser Motor Reverse
SSR ON/OFF 2
J205-6
J205-5
J205-4
J206-28
J206-6
J204-5
J204-7
J204-8
J204-9
J204-10
J204-11
J204-12
J203-6
J204-13
J204-26
LED Enable
Cleaning Roller Bias
LCD Clock
LCD Data
LCD Enable
Data Read / Write Selection
LCD Input Selection
Main Motor Clock
Fuser Motor Clock
Reset Signal
Serial 0 Input
Serial 1 Input
Serial 2 Input
Serial 0 Output
Serial 1 Output
Serial 2 Output
Cutter Home Position Sensor
(Right)
Cutter Home Position Sensor
(Left)
Cutter Motor 1
Cutter Motor 2
Print Request
Paper Cut Request
Registration Sensor
Roll 1 Encoder
Roll 2 Encoder
LCD Indication ON/OFF
Developer Press Sensor
Roll 1 Set Sensor
Roll 2 Set Sensor
Toner Sensor
Feed Sensor
Feed Encoder
8-11
Status
Input
Output
Output
Density Sensor Output 1
PW11620 PCB LED

Data Output Busy
Printer Ready
Print Request
Print Request
Test Print
J206-5
Input /
Output
Input
H : Reverse
H : Heater Lamp
lights
H: On
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
H: Lights
H : Busy
L : Ready
L : Requested
L : Print ON
H : Test Printing
Output
H : Output
Output
Output
Output
Input
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Output
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
L : Staying at
Home Position
L : Staying at
Home Position
H : Rotate
H : Rotate
L : Requested
L : Cutting
H : Paper detected
H : Indicating
L : Detecting
H : Paper detected
H : Paper detected
H : Toner detected
H : Paper detected
K105sm8e2
8. 3
8. 3. 1
Information Mode
Function
It is possible to monitor several kinds of information like analog data, operation time of each
electric component and some other information.
8. 3. 2
1. Indicate (2) Info Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key.
( 2) I n f o Mode
2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Information Mode.
The LCD indicates item number, item name and information.
Item number
No00 Fus e r
Temp1
Item name
150C
Information
3. Indicate the necessary item number pressing [ ] key or [ ] key, and you can check the
concerning information.
The following list shows the item number, item name and the concerning information.
Item
Number
00
Item Name (Indication)
Information
Fuser Temp 1
This item indicates the temperature of the

central part of Fuser Roller.
No00 Fus e r
Temp1
150C
01
This item indicates the temperature of the

right side of Fuser Roller.
Fuser Temp 2
No01 Fus e r
Temp2
140C
8-12
K105sm8e2
Item
Number
02
03
Information
---
---
Board Temp
This item indicates the temperature of inside

the machine detected by a thermistor on
PW11620.
No02 Boar d Temp

135 C
04
---
---
05
Total Cut
This item indicates how many times the

Cutter has operated totally for cutting the
paper supplied from every source.
No05 T o t a l
Cu t
0000138
06

paper supplied from Roll 1.
Roll 1 Cut
No06 Ro l l 1 Cu t
0000010
07

paper supplied from Roll 2.
Roll 2 Cut
No07 Ro l l 2 Cu t
0000123
08

Cutter has operated when the machine was
not on printing.
Others cut
No08 Ot he r s Cu t
0000005
09

printer has made printing operation totally.
Total Image
No09 To t a l
I mage
0002541
8-13
K105sm8e2
Item
Number
10
Information
R1 Image

printer has made printing operation with the
Roll 1.
No10 R1
I mage
0001383
11

Roll 2.
R2 Image
No11 R2
I mage
0001311
12

cut sheet paper from Bypass Feeder.
M Image
No12 M I mage
0000233
13
This item indicates how many times the Roll 1

Feed Clutch has operated up to the present.
R1 F Clutch
No13 R1 F C l u t c h
0000136
14

Feed Clutch has operated up to the present.
R2 F Clutch
No14 R2 F C l u t c h
0003511
15

Back Clutch has operated up to the present.
R1 B Clutch
No15 R1 B C l u t c h
0002644
16

Back Clutch has operated up to the present.
R2 B Clutch
No16 R2 B C l u t c h
0029877
17
This item indicates how many times the Feed

Clutch has operated up to the present.
Feed Clutch
No17 Feed C l u t c h
0007651
8-14
K105sm8e2
Item
Number
18
Information
Reg. Clutch

Registration Clutch has operated up to the
present.
No18 Re g . C l u t c h
0009021
19
This item indicates how long minutes the

Main Motor has operated up to the present.
Motor 1 Time
No19 Mo t o r 1 T i me
0000015mi n
20
This item indicates how long minutes the

Fuser Motor has operated up to the present.
Motor 2 Time
No20 Mo t o r 2 T i me
0000003mi n
21
It indicates how long minutes the LED Head

has lighted up to the present.
LED On Time
No21 LED On T i me
0003212mi n
22
This item indicates the record of jams.

The information indicated on the second line
is JAM History No., Jam Code and
Counter Value (at the time of jam).
The latest 20 jams can be indicated in
succession whenever you press the ENTER
Key.
This item indicates the record of errors.
The information indicated on the second line
is Error History No., Error Code and
Counter Value (at the time of error).
The latest 20 errors can be indicated in
succession whenever you press the ENTER
Key.
This item indicates how long the Main Motor
has operated. When counting up to 1080 Min
(18 hours), it will be reset to 0.
The timer detects the period of Density
Measure in Density Compensation Process.
JAM Info
No22 Jam I n f o
( 01) 1007 0000385
23
Error Info
No23 E r r o r
I nf o
( 01) 0040 0006312
24
Bias 3 Time
No24 B i a s 3 T i m e
0000 0 64 M i n
8-15
K105sm8e2
8. 4
8. 4. 1
Device Operation Mode

Function
It is possible to operate several electrical components independently, such as motor, clutch, & fans.
By this you can check whether or not the DC Controller PCB (PW10520) correctly outputs the
signal to each component, and also you can check whether or not such electrical component
operates correctly.
8. 4. 2
1. Indicate (3) Check Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU]

key.
( 3) Chec k Mode
2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Device Operation Mode.
The LCD indicates signal code, signal name of target item and signal status.
Signal code
No00 Ou t p u t ( - L- )
Signal status
Ma i n Mot o r
Signal name of target item
8-16
K105sm8e2
3. Pressing the [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the signal code of which target item you would like
to operate.
(Example : You will check the operation of Cutter Motor 1.)
Signal
Code
00
No00 Ou t p u t ( - L- )
No27 Ou t pu t ( - L- )
Ma i n Mot o r
Cu t t e r Mo t o r 1
Signal Name
Target item
Main Motor
Main Motor
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fuser Motor
Fuser Rev
Motor
Press Motor
Supply Motor
--Roll 1 Feed CL
Roll 1 Back CL
Roll 2 Feed CL
Roll 2 Back CL
Feed CL
Reg. CL
1st Corona
Tr Corona
Sep Corona
Bias
Fuser Motor
Fuser Motor
(Reversal rotation)
Developer Press Motor
Toner Supply Motor
Reserved
Roll 1 Feed Clutch
Roll 1 Back Clutch
Roll 2 Feed Clutch
Roll 2 Back Clutch
Feed Clutch
Registration Clutch
Image Corona
Transfer Corona
Separation Corona
Developer Bias
16
Bias +/- Select
17
Clean Bias
Positive/Negative selection
of Developer Bias
Cleaning Roller Bias
01
02
Signal
Code
18
Signal Name
Target item
Clean +/- SW
19
20
--Tr Assist LED
Positive/Negative selection
of Cleaning Roller Voltage
Reserved
Transfer Assist LED
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Heater Lamp 1
Heater Relay
Heater Blower (L)
Heater Blower (H)
Feed Blower
Counter
Cutter Motor 1
Cutter Motor 2
Main Switch
--Cooler Blower
Heater Lamp 2
Dens Sensor 1
Fuser Lamp 1
Fuser Relay
Fuser Blower (Low speed)
Fuser Blower (High speed)
Paper Feed Blower
Counter
Cutter Motor 1
Cutter Motor 2
Main Switch
Reserved
Cooling Fan
Fuser Lamp 2
Density Sensor for Density
Compensation
4. When you press the [ENTER] key, the status of output signal changes from L to H and the
selected target item operates independently.
No27 Ou t pu t ( - L- )
Press [ENTER].
No27 Ou t pu t ( - H- )
8-17
K105sm8e2
8. 5
8. 5. 1
Adjustment Mode
Function
It is possible to adjust the fundamental settings of the printer.
8. 5. 2
1. Indicate (4) Adjust Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU]

key.
( 4) A d j us t
Mode
2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Adjustment Mode.
The LCD indicates item number, name of setting item and setting value.
Item number
No000 020
[ 020 ]
Setting value
L ead Reg. ( Ro l l )
Name of setting item
3. Pressing the [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the Item Number of which Setting Value you will
change.
Please refer to [8.5.3 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-20 for the detail of each setting
item.
(Example: You will change Main Strobe A.)
No000 020
[ 020 ]
No008
L ead Reg. ( Ro l l )
010
[ 010 ]
Ma i n St r obe A
8-18
K116sm8e3
4. Press the [ENTER] key.

The setting value in the parenthesizes starts flashing and it becomes possible to change it.
No008
010
[ 010 ]
No008
Ma i n St r obe A
010
[ 010 ]
Ma i n St r obe A
NOTE
The LCD indicates another value that is not in the
parenthesises. This is the current setting value.
No008
010
[ 010 ]
Ma i n St r obe A
Current setting value
5. Change the setting value pressing [
No008
010
] key or [
[ 010 ]
] key.
No008
Ma i n St r obe A
010
[ 013 ]
Ma i n St r obe A
Change the value.
6. Press the [ENTER] key.

New value stops flashing and it is validated.
No008
010
[ 013 ]
No008
Ma i n St r obe A
013
[ 013 ]
Ma i n St r obe A
NOTE
Some Setting Items may require another way of operation.
This kind of special operation is written in each explanation in [8. 5. 4 Explanation for each
Setting Item].
8-19
K116sm8e3
8. 5. 3
Setting Item list

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item
No.
Setting Item
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
Leading Registration (Roll paper)

Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper)
Trailing Margin (Roll paper)
Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper)
Side Margin (Left and right)
Side Registration (Cutsheet)
Side Registration (Roll 1)
LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block A)
LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block B)
LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block C)
LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block A)
LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block B)
LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block C)
Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks A & B
Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks B & C
Cut Length 1 (length information provided)
Cut Length 2 (length information not provided)
Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print)
Leading Margin
Cut Length 4 (Individual Compensation for Roll 2)
Reserved
Developer Bias (Plain Paper)
Developer Bias (Tracing Paper)
Developer Bias (Special Media/Plain Paper)
Developer Bias (Special Media/Tracing Paper)
Developer Bias (Special Media/Film)
Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution
Transfer Voltage (Plain Paper)
Transfer Voltage (Tracing Paper)
Transfer Voltage (Film)
Transfer Voltage
(Special Media/Plain Paper)
Transfer Voltage
(Special Media/Tracing Paper)
Transfer Voltage
(Special Media/Film)
Separation Corona ON Timing
Reserved
Transfer Corona ON Timing
Transfer Corona OFF Timing
Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Plain)
Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing)
Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Film)
Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Plain)
Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Tracing)
Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Film)
Fuser temperature to Start Idling
Warm Sleep - Fuser Temperature
Reserved
Fuser Temperature Control Range (In the print cycle)
Fuser Temperature Control Range (Stand by)
Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor
Toner Supply Motor Time
Dot Enhancement Level ( Dither )
Feed Clutch OFF Time for Roll 1 Long Print
Feed Clutch OFF Time for Roll 2 Long Print
Metric or Inch
Language
Interface Communication Setting
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
Unit
8-20
1mm
1mm
1mm
1mm
1mm
0.1mm
0.1mm
0.1mm
1 microsecond
1 microsecond
1 microsecond
1 microsecond
1 microsecond
1 microsecond
1mm
1mm
0.1mm
0.1mm
0.16mm
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
19
19
19
19
9
9
10
10
3
3
50
50
50
50
50
50
6
6
6
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
8
8
50
50
50
50
475
475
30
30
50
50
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
1 to 40
1 to 40
1 to 40
1 to 40
0 to 20
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 13
0 to 13
0 to 13
0 to 13
0 to 13
0 to 13
2 to 14
2 to 14
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 999
0 to 50
0 to 100
8-36
8-36
8-36
8-36
8-37
8-38
8-38
8-38
8-39
8-39
8-39
8-41
8-41
8-41
8-43
8-43
8-44
8-44
8-45
8-47
8-48
161
161
161
161
161
161
0
366
28A
28A
292
161
161
161
161
161
161
0
366
28A
28A
292
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 255
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
8-49
8-49
8-49
8-49
8-49
8-49
8-50
8-50
8-50
8-50
8-50
292
292
0 to 4FF
8-50
292
292
0 to 4FF
8-50
1mm
50
50
0 to 100
8-50
1mm
1mm
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
48
20
160
160
177
160
160
177
120
100
48
20
165
170
170
160
160
177
120
100
0 to 100
0 to 100
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
100 to 140
100 to 160
8-51
8-52
8-53
8-53
8-53
8-53
8-53
8-53
8-54
8-54
1
2
15
10
1
230
230
1
1
2
1
2
15
10
1
230
230
0
1
2
1 to 6
1 to 6
1 to 30
1 to 15
1 to 3
80 to 360
80 to 360
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 2
8-55
8-55
8-56
8-56
8-57
8-58
8-58
8-59
8-59
8-59
1C
o
1C
1 Second
1 Second
1msec.
1msec.
-
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
Recognition of Roll Deck 2

Counter Value
Maximum Length
Stacking Device Setting
Operation of Fuser Roller
Cut length 5 (Compensation for Tracing Paper)
Cut length 6 (Compensation for Film)
Drum ReverseTime
Fuser Motor Reverse Setting
Operation of Separation Lamp
Reserved
Reserved
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll)
(Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll)
(Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed Setting (Roll)
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
Unit
1 millisecond
-
8-21
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
1
1
5
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
86
30
30
0
0
5
5
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 1
0 to 5
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 200
0 to 200
10 to 70
0 to 1
1 to 7
8-59
8-59
8-60
8-60
8-60
8-61
8-61
8-62
8-62
8-63
0.04mm/s
34
39
0 to 80
8-64
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-64
0.04mm/s
35
42
0 to 80
8-64
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-64
0.04mm/s
50
48
0 to 80
8-64
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-64
0.04mm/s
33
36
0 to 80
8-67
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-67
0.04mm/s
39
44
0 to 80
8-67
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-67
0.04mm/s
44
44
0 to 80
8-67
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-67
0.04mm/s
50
50
0 to 80
8-68
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-68
0.04mm/s
50
50
0 to 80
8-68
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-68
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-68
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-68
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-69
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-69
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-69
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-69
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-69
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-69
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
094

(Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Special Media / Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)
(Film / A2, 18 & 17)
(Film / A2, 18 & 17)
(Film / A2, 18 & 17)
(Film / A2, 18 & 17)
(Film / A2, 18 & 17)
(Film / A2, 18 & 17)
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
Unit
0.04mm/s
8-22
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
40
40
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-70
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-70
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-70
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-70
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-70
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-70
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-71
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-71
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-71
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-71
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-71
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-71
0.04mm/s
30
31
0 to 80
8-72
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-72
0.04mm/s
32
36
0 to 80
8-72
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-72
0.04mm/s
31
38
0 to 80
8-72
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-72
0.04mm/s
33
40
0 to 80
8-73
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-73
0.04mm/s
38
44
0 to 80
8-73
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-73
0.04mm/s
38
45
0 to 80
8-73
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-73
0.04mm/s
50
50
0 to 80
8-74
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-74
0.04mm/s
50
50
0 to 80
8-74
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-74
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-74
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-74
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
124

(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
Unit
0.04mm/s
8-23
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
40
40
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-75
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-75
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-75
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-75
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-75
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-75
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-76
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-76
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-76
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-76
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-76
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-76
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-77
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-77
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-77
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-77
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-77
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-77
0.04mm/s
37
35
0 to 80
8-78
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-78
0.04mm/s
30
33
0 to 80
8-78
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-78
0.04mm/s
40
41
0 to 80
8-78
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-78
0.04mm/s
36
42
0 to 80
8-79
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-79
0.04mm/s
41
43
0 to 80
8-79
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-79
0.04mm/s
39
40
0 to 80
8-79
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-79
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
154

(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
Unit
0.04mm/s
8-24
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
42
42
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-80
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-80
0.04mm/s
42
42
0 to 80
8-80
0.5 seconds
14
14
0 to 300
8-80
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-80
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-80
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-81
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-81
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-81
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-81
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-81
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-81
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-82
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-82
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-82
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-82
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-82
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-82
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-83
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-83
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-83
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-83
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-83
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-83
0.04mm/s
26
26
0 to 80
8-84
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-84
0.04mm/s
27
27
0 to 80
8-84
0.5 seconds
10
10
0 to 300
8-84
0.04mm/s
33
37
0 to 80
8-84
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-84
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
184

(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
Reserved
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
to
309
Unit
0.04mm/s
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
29
42
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-85
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-85
0.04mm/s
35
38
0 to 80
8-85
0.5 seconds
13
13
0 to 300
8-85
0.04mm/s
36
39
0 to 80
8-85
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-85
0.04mm/s
35
38
0 to 80
8-86
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-86
0.04mm/s
40
43
0 to 80
8-86
0.5 seconds
18
18
0 to 300
8-86
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-86
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-86
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-87
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-87
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-87
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-87
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-87
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-87
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-88
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-88
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-88
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-88
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-88
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-88
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-89
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-89
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-89
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-89
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-89
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-89
8-25
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
Main Motor Speed (Plain paper)

Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper)
Main Motor Speed (Film)
Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper)
Main Motor Speed (Special tracing paper)
Main Motor Speed (Special film)
Fuser Motor Speed
(36 / 34 / 30 / 24 / 22 / A0 / B1 / A1) (Plain)
Fuser Motor Speed
(36 / 34 / 30 / 24 / 22 / A0 / B1 / A1) (Tracing)
Fuser Motor Speed
(36 / 34 / 30 / 24 / 22 / A0 / B1 / A1) (Film)
Fuser Motor Speed
(36 / 34 / 30 / 24 / 22 / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special / Plain)
Fuser Motor Speed
(36 / 34 / 30 / 24 / 22 / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special / Tracing)
Fuser Motor Speed
(36 / 34 / 30 / 24 / 22 / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special / Film)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain paper)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (tracing paper)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special plain paper)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special tracing paper)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special film)
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet)
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet)
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet)
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet)
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet)
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet)
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
Unit
8-26
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
36
36
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
31
35
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
8-90
8-90
8-90
8-90
8-90
8-90
8-90
39
50
0 to 80
8-90
50
50
0 to 80
8-90
40
40
0 to 80
8-90
40
40
0 to 80
8-90
40
40
0 to 80
8-90
1mm
1mm
1mm
1mm
1mm
1mm
0.04mm/s
25
25
22
18
18
23
30
25
25
25
18
18
23
31
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 80
8-90
8-90
8-90
8-90
8-90
8-90
8-91
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-91
0.04mm/s
32
36
0 to 80
8-91
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-91
0.04mm/s
31
38
0 to 80
8-91
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-91
0.04mm/s
33
40
0 to 80
8-92
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-92
0.04mm/s
38
44
0 to 80
8-92
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-92
0.04mm/s
38
45
0 to 80
8-92
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-92
0.04mm/s
50
50
0 to 80
8-93
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-93
0.04mm/s
50
40
0 to 80
8-93
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-93
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-93
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-93
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-94
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-94
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-94
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-94
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-94
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-94
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
352

(Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
Unit
8-27
0.04mm/s
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
40
40
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-95
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-95
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-95
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-95
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-95
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-95
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-96
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-96
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-96
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-96
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-96
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-96
0.04mm/s
37
35
0 to 80
8-97
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-97
0.04mm/s
30
33
0 to 80
8-97
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-97
0.04mm/s
40
41
0 to 80
8-97
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-97
0.04mm/s
36
42
0 to 80
8-98
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-98
0.04mm/s
41
43
0 to 80
8-98
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-98
0.04mm/s
39
40
0 to 80
8-98
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-98
0.04mm/s
42
42
0 to 80
8-99
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-99
0.04mm/s
42
42
0 to 80
8-99
0.5 seconds
14
14
0 to 300
8-99
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-99
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-99
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-100
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-100
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-100
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-100
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
386

(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
Unit
0.04mm/s
8-28
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
40
40
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-100
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-100
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-101
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-101
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-101
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-101
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-101
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-101
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-102
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-102
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-102
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-102
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-102
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-102
0.04mm/s
26
26
0 to 80
8-103
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-103
0.04mm/s
27
27
0 to 80
8-103
0.5 seconds
10
10
0 to 300
8-103
0.04mm/s
33
37
0 to 80
8-103
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-103
0.04mm/s
29
42
0 to 80
8-104
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-104
0.04mm/s
35
38
0 to 80
8-104
0.5 seconds
13
13
0 to 300
8-104
0.04mm/s
36
39
0 to 80
8-104
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-104
0.04mm/s
35
38
0 to 80
8-105
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-105
0.04mm/s
42
43
0 to 80
8-105
0.5 seconds
18
18
0 to 300
8-105
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-105
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-105
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-106
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
419

(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Film / 30)
(Film / 30)
(Film / 30)
(Film / 30)
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
Unit
0.5 seconds
8-29
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
0
0
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 300
8-106
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-106
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-106
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-106
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-106
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-107
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-107
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-107
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-107
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-107
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-107
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-108
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-108
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-108
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-108
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-108
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-108
0.04mm/s
28
28
0 to 80
8-109
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-109
0.04mm/s
30
33
0 to 80
8-109
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-109
0.04mm/s
34
36
0 to 80
8-109
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-109
0.04mm/s
34
33
0 to 80
8-110
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-110
0.04mm/s
38
44
0 to 80
8-110
0.5 seconds
11
11
0 to 300
8-110
0.04mm/s
40
41
0 to 80
8-110
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-110
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-111
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-111
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-111
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-111
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
452

(Film / 30)
(Film / 30)
(Special Media / Plain Paper / 30)
(Special Media / Tracing / 30)
(Special Media / Film / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Film / 30)
(Roll) (Film / 30)
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
Unit
0.04mm/s
8-30
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
40
40
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-111
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-111
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-112
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-112
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-112
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-112
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-112
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-112
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-113
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-113
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-113
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-113
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-113
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-113
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-114
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-114
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-114
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-114
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-114
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-114
0.04mm/s
28
28
0 to 80
8-115
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-115
0.04mm/s
30
33
0 to 80
8-115
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-115
0.04mm/s
34
36
0 to 80
8-115
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-115
0.04mm/s
34
33
0 to 80
8-116
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-116
0.04mm/s
38
44
0 to 80
8-116
0.5 seconds
11
11
0 to 300
8-116
0.04mm/s
40
41
0 to 80
8-116
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-116
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-117
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-117
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
486
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Cut sheet)

(Film / 30)
(Film / 30)
(Film / 30)
(Film / 30)
Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
Reserved
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
to
612
Unit
8-31
0.04mm/s
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
40
40
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-117
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-117
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-117
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-117
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-118
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-118
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-118
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-118
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-118
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-118
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-119
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-119
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-119
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-119
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-119
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-119
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-119
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-119
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-119
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-119
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-119
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-119
4ff
4ff
9fe
8-120
4ff
4ff
9fe
8-120
4ff
4ff
9fe
8-120
62f
62f
9fe
8-120
69f
69f
9fe
8-120
4ff
4ff
9fe
8-120
13
17
0 to 80
8-120
19
19
0 to 80
8-120
0 to 80
8-120
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
Unit
613
Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard

Size Prints (36/ 34/ 30/ A0 / B1)
Size Prints (24/ 20/ A1)
Size Prints (18/ 17/ 15/ A2)
Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints
(36/ 34/ 30/ A0 / B1)
(24/ 22/ A2)
(18/ 17/ 15/ A2)
(12/ 11/ A3)
Toner Supply Roller Bias
Regulation Bias
Density Sensor Default Output
Density Sensor Standard Output
Print - Fuser Temperature Side
(Plain) (12 / 11 / A3)
(Tracing) (12 / 11 / A3)
(Film) (12 / 11 / A3)
(Special / Plain) (12 / 11 / A3)
(Special / Tracing) (12 / 11 / A3)
(Special media / Film) (12 / 11 / A3)
(Plain) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Tracing) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Film) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Special / Plain) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Special / Tracing) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Special / Film) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Plain) (24 / 22 / A1)
(Tracing) (24 / 22 / A1)
(Film) (24 / 22 / A1)
(Specia / Film) (24 / 22 / A1)
(Plain) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Tracing) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Film) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Special / Plain) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Special / Tracing) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Special / Film) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
Density Sensor Output Information
1mm
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
8-32
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
1
1
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
1 to 20
8-121
1mm
1 to 20
8-121
1mm
1 to 20
8-121
1mm
1 to 20
8-121
1mm
0 to 35
8-123
1mm
0 to 35
8-123
1mm
0 to 35
8-123
1mm
0 to 35
8-123
286
270
0
0
160
286
270
0
0
145
0 to 800
0 to 800
0 to 614
0 to 614
120 to 180
8-123
8-123
8-124
8-124
8-125
1C
160
150
120 to 180
8-125
1C
177
170
120 to 180
8-125
1C
160
160
120 to 180
8-125
1C
160
160
120 to 180
8-125
1C
177
170
120 to 180
8-125
1C
160
165
120 to 180
8-125
1C
160
170
120 to 180
8-125
1C
177
170
120 to 180
8-125
1C
160
160
120 to 180
8-125
1C
160
160
120 to 180
8-125
1C
177
170
120 to 180
8-125
1C
160
165
120 to 180
8-126
1C
160
170
120 to 180
8-126
1C
177
170
120 to 180
8-126
1C
160
160
120 to 180
8-126
1C
160
160
120 to 180
8-126
1C
177
170
120 to 180
8-126
1C
160
165
120 to 180
8-126
1C
160
170
120 to 180
8-126
1C
177
170
120 to 180
8-126
1C
160
160
120 to 180
8-126
1C
160
160
120 to 180
8-126
177
177
120 to 180
8-126
0 to 4
8-127
1C
1C
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
Unit
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
Regulation Bias Increment forAuto Adjustment Level 2 and 3

Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment
Density Compensation On/Off
Minimum Density
Regulation Bias Maximum
Density Measure Interval at power on
Density Measure Interval at Print Completion
Developer Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 1 and after
Reserved
Reserved
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Plain)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Film)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Plain)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Tracing)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Film)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Plain)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Film)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Film)
Fuser Motor Speed
(18 / 17 / 15 / 12 / 11 / A2 / A3) (Plain)
Fuser Motor Speed
(18 / 17 / 15 / 12 / 11 / A2 / A3) (Tracing)
Fuser Motor Speed
(18 / 17 / 15 / 12 / 11 / A2 / A3) (Film)
Fuser Motor Speed
(18 / 17 / 15 / 12 / 11 / A2 / A3) (Special / Plain)
Fuser Motor Speed
(18 / 17 / 15 / 12 / 11 / A2 / A3) (Special / Tracing)
Fuser Motor Speed
(18 / 17 / 15 / 12 / 11 / A2 / A3) (Special / Film)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll)
(Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)
(Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)
(Film / A2, 18 & 17)
(Film / A2, 18 & 17)
0.5V
0.5V
-
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
8-33
1 hour
1 hour
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
80
80
0
0
1
1
135
135
500
500
18
18
18
18
158
158
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 200
0 to 800
0 to 1
110 to 150
160 to 800
1 to 100
1 to 100
0 to 400
8-127
8-128
8-129
8-131
8-131
8-131
8-131
8-132
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
o
1C
0.04mm/s
160
160
177
160
160
177
159
159
177
159
159
177
50
160
170
177
160
160
170
159
180
170
159
159
170
50
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
0 to 80
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-133
8-134
0.04mm/s
57
60
0 to 80
8-134
0.04mm/s
50
50
0 to 80
8-134
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-134
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-134
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-134
0.04mm/s
34
37
0 to 80
8-64
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-64
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-67
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-67
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-68
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-68
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-69
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-69
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-70
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-70
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-71
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-71
0.04mm/s
37
40
0 to 80
8-72
0.5 seconds
10
0 to 300
8-72
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-73
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-73
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-74
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-74
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
696

(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Plain Paper / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Tracing / 30)
(Film / 30)
(Film / 30)
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
Unit
0.04mm/s
8-34
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
40
40
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-75
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-75
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-76
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-76
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-77
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-77
0.04mm/s
35
36
0 to 80
8-78
0.5 seconds
16
16
0 to 300
8-78
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-79
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-79
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-80
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-80
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-81
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-81
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-82
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-82
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-83
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-83
0.04mm/s
30
30
0 to 80
8-84
0.5 seconds
20
20
0 to 300
8-84
0.04mm/s
34
40
0 to 80
8-85
0.5 seconds
20
0 to 300
8-85
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-86
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-86
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-87
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-87
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-88
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-88
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-89
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-89
0.04mm/s
36
30
0 to 80
8-109
0.5 seconds
20
20
0 to 300
8-109
0.04mm/s
34
40
0 to 80
8-110
0.5 seconds
20
0 to 300
8-110
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-111
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-111
K116sm8e3
Item
No.
Setting Item
732

Standby - Fuser Temperature Center
Standby - Fuser Temperature Side
Assist Fan Off Timing (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
Assist Fan Off Timing (24 / 22 / A1)
Assist Fan Off Timing (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1) (Plain)
(36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1) (Tracing)
(36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1) (Film)
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
Unit
8-35
0.04mm/s
Default
Value
USA
EUR
/ AS
40
40
Setting
range
Refer to
page ;
0 to 80
8-112
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-112
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-113
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-113
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
8-114
0.5 seconds
0 to 300
8-114
1C
o
1C
8
8
8
0
167
155
8
8
8
0
167
155
4
4
6
0
120 to 180
120 to 180
0 to 8
0 to 8
0 to 8
0 to 80
8-134
8-134
8-135
8-135
8-135
8-135
0 to 80
8-135
0 to 80
8-135
K116sm8e3
8. 5. 4
Explanation for each Setting Item
8. 5. 4. 1
Leading Registration (No. 000 & 001)
It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the leading edge of the media.
If you increase the setting value by +1 , the head of image is shifted 1mm downward toward the
trailing edge As a result the leading margin becomes larger.
Item No.
000
001
Setting Item
Leading Registration (Roll paper)
Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
19
19
19
19
Setting
range
1 to 40
1 to 40
Step of
increment
1mm
1mm
Leading Registration
value is increased.
8. 5. 4. 2
value is decreased.
Trailing Margin (No. 002 & 003)
It is possible to adjust the length of trailing margin.

The length of trailing margin becomes 1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by +1 .
Item No.
002
003
Setting Item
Trailing Margin (Roll paper)
Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
9
9
10
10
Setting value is increased.
Setting
range
1 to 40
1 to 40
Step of
increment
1mm
1mm
Setting value is decreased.
Trailing Margin
NOTE
Some trailing image may be lost if you decrease the value too much.
8-36
K116sm8e3
8. 5. 4. 3
Side Margin (Left & Right) (No. 004)
It is possible to adjust the amount of side margin. (Both left and right)
Each side margin becomes 1mm wider if you increase the setting value.
(As a result the width of print image becomes 2mm narrower.)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
3
3
Setting range
Step of increment
0 to 20
1mm
Side Margin
NOTE
Image quality created with a reduced side margin (less than 3 in the setting value) is not
guaranteed.
8-37
K116sm8e3
8. 5. 4. 4
Side Registration (No. 005 to 007)
It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the side edge of the media.
If you increase the setting value by +1 , image is shifted 0.1mm to the right.
Item No.
005
006
007
Setting Item
Side Registration (Cutsheet)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
50
50
50
50
50
50
Setting
range
0 to 60
0 to 60
0 to 60
Step of
increment
0.1mm
0.1mm
0.1mm
Side Registration
8-38
K116sm8e3
8. 5. 4. 5
LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel of each Block

(No.008 to 010)
It is possible to make the whole image of each Image Block (A, B and C) darker or lighter
independently by changing the LED Strobe Time for the Main Pixels.
As a result an even image density can be accomplished among 3 Image Blocks.
The whole image of the concerning Image Block becomes darker if you increase the setting value.
Item No.
008
009
010
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
6
6
LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel

(Image Block A : Left)
(Image Block B : Center)
(Image Block C : Right)
Block A
Block B
Decrease the value of

008 to make the image
of Block A lighter.
Setting
range
0 to 13
Step of
increment
1 micro second
0 to 13
1 micro second
0 to 13
1 micro second
Block C
Increase the value of

010 to make the image
of Block C darker.
Default
Setting value is increased
.
Main pixel
Supplemental
pixel
Actual print image
Please read [REFERENCE] on the page 8-42 for the explanation about Main Pixel and
Supplemental Pixel.
8-39
K116sm8e3
NOTE
(1) The LED Strobe Times specified in these 008, 009 and 010 are directly applied to the
Test Print.
If the setting values are 10 (for 008), 11 (for 009) and 12 (for 010), for example, the
actual LED Strobe Times are also 10 (for block A), 11 (for block B) and 12 (for block C).
In case of Test Print
008: 10 microseconds
Block A
(10)
Block B
(11)
Block C
(12)
But in case of a copy or a plot, the density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from the
output device (image scanner or controller) is applied to the Image Block A.
And only the difference of setting values among 008, 009 and 010 are applied to the
actual LED Strobe Time.
If the density command from the output device is 8 microsecond and the setting values
are 10 (for 008), 11 (for 009) and 12 (for 010), for example, the actual LED Strobe Times
are 8 (for block A), 9 (for block B) and 10 (for block C).
In case of copy or plot
Density command from output device: 8 microseconds
Block A
Block B
Block C
(8)
(9)
(10)
(2) If the value of density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from the output device is larger
than 13 microsecond (Max.), it is automatically corrected to 13 microsecond.
If it is smaller than 0 microsecond (Min.), it is corrected to 0 microsecond similarly.
8-40
K116sm8e3
8. 5. 4. 6
LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) of each Block

(No.011 to 013)
If such image as a diagonal line looks too weak, you can make it clearer by changing the LED
Strobe Time for the Supplemental Pixels.
The adjustment is available for each Image Block independently.
A diagonal line comes to look clearer if you increase the setting value, as the LED Strobe Time for
the Supplemental Pixels becomes longer.
Item No.
011
012
013
Setting Item
LED Strobe Time for Supplemental Pixel
(Image Block A : Left)
(Image Block B : Center)
(Image Block C : Right)
Block A
Block B
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 13
Step of
increment
1 micro second
0 to 13
1 micro second
0 to 13
1 micro second
Block C
Increase the setting values of 011 and 013

to make the images of these blocks clearer.
Default

Main pixel
Supplemental
pixel
Actual print image
Please read [REFERENCE] on the page 8-42 for the explanation about Main Pixel and
Supplemental Pixel.
8-41
K116sm8e3
Reference
Normally the KIP 3100 takes 600 times of image exposure per inch for the vertical direction
as its resolution is 600DPI. Pixels created by this normal timing are called [Main Pixel].
When a specific image pattern (like a diagonal line) is printed, however, the KIP 3100 will
make additional image exposure between vertically neighboring 2 Main Pixels. This
additional image exposure is completed within a very short time. The pixel created by this
additional process is called [Supplemental Pixel].
Normal image pattern
In case of a certain
image pattern
Main Pixels
Supplemental Pixels
Main Pixels
Supplemental Pixels are provided so as to fill the space between Main Pixels.
When we compare a vertical / horizontal 1 dot line and a diagonal 1 dot line, for example, the
diagonal one looks vague and rough although the vertical / horizontal one looks clear and
smooth.
This is because the diagonal line has a wider space between Main Pixels than the vertical /
horizontal one.
If this space is filled with the Supplemental Pixel, diagonal line comes to look smoother and
clearer.
No Supplemental Pixel
Supplemental Pixels are provided.
Direction of
print
Print image
(Diagonal line looks vague and rough.)
Print image
(Diagonal Line looks clear and smooth)
8-42
K116sm8e3
8. 5. 4. 7
Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks

(No.014 & 015)
It is possible to align the pixels between Image Blocks if there is a gap of pixels.
The Image Block B is the standard, and both the Image Blocks A and C can be shifted vertically.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the whole pixels of the concerning Image Block is shifted
1 line (pixel) to the trailing edge side.
Item No.
014
015
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
8
8
Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between

Image Blocks A & B
Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between
Image Blocks B & C
Setting
range
2 to 14
Step of
increment
1 pixel
2 to 14
1 pixel

014 to shift the block A
to the leading edge side.

015 to shift the block C
to the trailing edge side.
8-43
K116sm8e3
8. 5. 4. 8
Cut Length 1 (length information provided)

(No.016)
It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter.

This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is provided with the length
information. (this is command used on all standard pages printed from the IPS)
If you increase the setting value by +1, the print length becomes 1mm longer.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
50
50
Setting range
Step of increment
0 to 100
1mm
Setting value is decreased
Cut length
8. 5. 4. 9
Cut Length 2 (length information not provided)

(No.017)
It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter.

This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is not provided with the length
information. (This is may only be used on LONG prints over 6 meters on the IPS)
If you increase the setting value by +1, the print length becomes 1mm longer.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
50
50
Setting range
Step of increment
0 to 100
1mm
Setting value is decreased
Cut length
8-44
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.10
Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print)

(No.018)
When you make a long print, the actual print length may become shorter than expected because
the paper is likely to shrink. It is possible in this mode to compensate the print length manually.
The length of long print is not compensated directly, but it is indirectly compensated by correcting
the length of A1 print.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the length of A1 print becomes 0.1mm longer per 10mm.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
475
475
Setting range
Step of increment
0 to 999
0.1mm
NOTE
It is necessary to finish the adjustment of Cut Length 1 (No.016) before starting the
adjustment in this Cut Length 3 (No.018).
[Example of adjustment]
1. Supposing the actual length of a long print is shorter than expected.
100
50
Actual length
100
50
Expected length
Actual length is shorter than expected.
8-45
K116sm8e4
2. Make an A1 (841mm long) or 34 long print.

Measure the actual length of this A1 or 34 print to know how long millimeter it is shorter than
expected.
(Example: Print out is 838mm, so it is 3mm shorter than expected.)
Expected length
Actual length
A1 or 34
3mm
3. Necessary value for the compensation is 10 times as long as the difference between actual
length and expected length.
It is 30 in this example. (3mm x 10 = 30)
Specify 30 as the setting value of No.018.
4. Make a long print.

The actual print out will be as long as expected.
8-46
100
50
Actual length
100
50
Expected length
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.11
Leading Margin (No. 019)
A print has a 3 mm margin on the leading edge, which overlaps and hides the corresponding
region of the image on the print.
It is possible to adjust the length of the leading margin.
The length of the leading edge becomes 0.1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by +1 .
Changing the value to 0 removes whole the margin, thus a portion image on the leading edge will
appear.
Default Value
30
Setting Range
0 to 50
Step of increment
0.1mm
Default: 30
A 3mm Leading Margin added to leading edge.
Hides the corresponding part of image.
Example: 0
Leading Margin disappers.
Corresponding part of image printed.
NOTE
(1) Image quality created with a reduced leading margin (less than 30 in the setting value) is
not guaranteed.
(2) Setting to 0 may result in a jam in Fuser Unit.
8-47
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.12
Cut Length 4 (Individual Compensation for Roll 2) (No.020)
It is possible to compensate the print length of Roll 2 individually.

This setting would be used if a different cut length is provided to Roll 1 and Roll 2.
Measure the length gap between a piece of A1 size sheet from each Roll 1 and 2.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the print length of Roll 2 becomes 0.16mm longer.
Default Value
50
Setting Range
0 to 100
Step of increment
0.16mm
Example:
A1 from Roll 1
A1 from Roll 2
Sheet from Roll 2 is shorter
Increase the value

A1 from Roll 1
A1 from Roll 2 (compensated)
Same length
8-48
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.13
Developer Bias (No.022 to 027)
It is possible to make the print density darker or lighter by adjusting the Developer Bias (Negative
Developer Roller Bias).
The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value.
Item No.
022
023
024
025
026
027
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
Developer Bias (Plain paper)

Developer Bias (Tracing paper)
Developer Bias
(Special media / Plain paper)
Developer Bias
(Special media / Tracing paper)
Developer Bias (Special media / Film)
Setting
range
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
Step of
increment
1
1
1
1
161
161
0 to 4FF
161
161
0 to 4FF
NOTE
Please adjust the Developer Bias while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter.
8. 5. 4.14 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution

(No.028)
It is possible to compensate the Developer Bias only for the 1st Drum revolution.
The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value.
(Developer Bias is not compensated at all if the setting value is 0)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
0
0
Setting range
Step of increment
0 to 255
Density of leading area is darker.

(Even density)
NOTE
There may be the case that the density of leading area, which corresponds to the 1st
revolution of Drum, is darker than other area.
In this case compensate the Developer Bias to have even density on both areas.
8-49
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.15 Transfer Voltage (No.029 to 034)

It is possible to adjust the analog voltage outputted to the Transfer Corona during the print cycle.
Item No.
029
030
031
032
033
034
Setting Item
Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Plain paper)
Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Tracing paper)
Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Film)
Transfer Corona Analog Voltage
(Special media / Film)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
366
366
28A
28A
28A
28A
292
292
Setting
range
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
0 to 4FF
Step of
increment
1
1
1
1
292
292
0 to 4FF
292
292
0 to 4FF
NOTE
Please adjust Transfer Corona Analog Voltage while checking the actual voltage with the
multi-meter.
8. 5. 4.16 Separation Corona ON Timing (No.035)

It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona starts discharging during the print
cycle.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
50
50
Setting range
Step of increment
0 to 100
1mm
8-50
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.17 Transfer Corona ON Timing (No.037)

It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona starts discharging during the print cycle.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
48
48
Setting range
Step of increment
0 to 100
1mm
NOTE
You may lose some leading image as the following example if you increase the setting value
too much, because the timing to start discharging is too much delayed.
Normal
Setting value is increased too much.

Transfer Corona starts
discharging at this point.
8-51
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.18 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (No.038)

It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona stops discharging during the print cycle.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to stop discharging is 1mm delayed.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
20
20
Setting range
Step of increment
0 to 100
1mm
NOTE
You may lose some trailing image as the following example if you decrease the setting value
too much, because the Transfer Corona stops discharging too early.
Normal
Setting value is increased too much.
Transfer Corona stops

discharging at this point.
8-52
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.19 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (No.039 to 044)

It is possible to adjust the center part of Fuser Temperature in a print cycle.
You can specify the temperature for each type of media separately.
The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by +1.
Item No.
039
040
041
042
043
044
Setting Item
Print - Fuser Temperature Center
(Plain paper )
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
(Special media / Film)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
160
165
Setting
range
120 to 180
Step of
increment
o
1C
160
170
120 to 180
1oC
177
170
120 to 180
1oC
160
160
120 to 180
1oC
160
160
120 to 180
1oC
177
177
120 to 180
1C
Setting value of 039 to 044

(Example: Film 170oC)
(oC)
Setting value of 738, 739

(Ready Temperature)
0
Turn on
(Time)
Ready
Print Job
Reference
(1) The both sides part of Fuser Temperature will be controlled by Print - Fuser Temperature
Side (No. 625 to 648) separately. Refer to page 8-125 and 126 for further information.
(2) Item List of Fuser Temperature Control (center / side)
Print
(for printing period)
Ready
(target temperature to get Ready)
Standby
(maintained during Ready)
Warm Sleep
Fuser Center
Fuser Sides
No.039 to 044
No.625 to 648
No.660 to 665
No.666 to 671
No.738
No.739
No.046 (common to both Center / Side)
8-53
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.20 Fuser Temperature to start idling (No.045)

It is possible to decide the temperature to start idling.
When the Fuser Temperature reaches the value specified in this No.045 during the warming up,
the Fuser Motor starts rotating to drive the Fuser Roller (idling).
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
120
120
Setting range
Step of increment
100 to 140
1C
Setting value of 039 to 044

(Example : 160 oC)
(oC)
Setting value of 045

(Example: 140 oC)
(Time)
Ready (Idling stops.)
Idling starts.
Turn on
8. 5. 4.21 Warm Sleep Fuser Temperature (No.046)

It is possible to decide the temperature which is maintained in the Warm Sleep.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
100
100
Setting range
Step of increment
100 to 160
1C
Setting value of 738, 739

(Example: 160 oC)
(oC)
Setting value of 046

(Example: 100 oC)
0
(Time)
Warm Sleep starts.
100 oC is maintained after this point.
8-54
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.22 Fuser Temperature Control Range (No.048 & 049)

It is possible to specify the control range of temperature of Fuser Roller.
If you specify some setting value X on these No.048 and 049, for example, you can decide the
highest limit and the lowest one of the control range of temperature.
The highest limit is Fuser Temperature (Decided in No.039 to 044) plus the setting value X.
And the lowest one is Fuser Temperature minus X.
The Fuser Lamp continues to light up when the temperature of Fuser Roller is colder than the
highest limit, and it is put out when the temperature reaches the highest limit.
The Fuser Roller gradually gets colder after that, and the Fuser Lamp lights again when the
temperature reaches the lowest limit.
Control range can be decided separately to each condition in the print cycle and stand by.
Item No.
048
049
Setting Item
Fuser Temperature Control Range
(In the print cycle)
Fuser Temperature Control Range
(Stand by)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
1
1
2
Setting
range
1 to 6
1 to 6
Step of
increment
1oC
1oC
Example: Value of No.048 (Fuser Temperature Control Range) is 10

Value of No.739 Standby - Fuser Temperature Side) is 160
Highest limit of control range

(170 oC)
Standby Fuser Temperature

(160 oC)
Fuser Lamp turns OFF.
(oC)
Lowest limit of control range

(150 oC)
Fuser Lamp turns ON.
(Time)
8-55
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.23 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor (No.050)

It is possible to change the reaction time of Toner Supply Motor.
Reaction time is the time taken until the Toner Supply Motor starts working since Toner Low
has been detected.
The reaction time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value by +1.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
15
15
Setting range
Step of increment
1 to 30
1 second
Toner Low
Motor starts working
Motor stops
(Time)
Setting value of No.050
NOTE
The reaction time may be too long if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large
volume prints continuously.
In this case try to decrease the setting value of No.050 to shorten the reaction time.
8. 5. 4.24 Toner Supply Motor ON Time (No.051)

It is possible change the time the Toner Supply Motor works (ON time).
The ON time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
10
10
Setting range
Step of increment
1 to 15
1 second
Toner Low
Motor starts working
Motor stops
(Time)
Setting value of No.051
NOTE
The ON time may be too short if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large
volume prints continuously.
In this case try to increase the setting value of No.051 to make the ON time longer.
8-56
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.25 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No.052)

It is possible to validate the Dot Enhancement function which makes an isolated dot look clearer.
An isolated dot image is more emphasized if you increase the setting value.
Setting value
1
(Default in USA, EUR & ASIA)
2
3
Contents
Emphasized
More emphasized
Most emphasized
Reference
(1) An isolated dot image tends to look so weak.
The Dot Enhancement function emphasizes the isolated dot so that it looks clear.
(Dot Enhancement function emphasizes only the isolated dot. It will not emphasize the
dots coming together some degree.)
Dot Enhancement function is OFF.
Dot Enhancement function is ON.
(2) The Dot Enhancement function can be validated in the User Mode.
It will not work if not validated.
8-57
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.26
Feed Clutch OFF time (No.053, 054)
The Feed Clutch turns OFF for a very short period whenever the machine transports the paper 2
meters long, so as to remove the paper slack in a long printing.
It is possible to specify how long period the Feed Clutch continues to be OFF.
Item No.
053
054
Setting Item
Feed Clutch Off Timing (Roll 1)
Feed Clutch Off Timing (Roll 2)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
230
230
230
230
Setting
range
80 to 360
80 to 360
Step of
increment
1msec.
1msec.
2 meters
Feed Clutch turns OFF
2 meters
Feed Clutch turns OFF
2 meters
8-58
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.27 Metric or Inch (No.055)

It is possible to decide the base format of the print.
Setting value
0
(Default in EUR & ASIA)
1
(Default in USA)
Contents
Metric
Inch
8. 5. 4.28 Language (No.056)

It is possible to specify the indication language of User Interface.
Setting value
0
1
Contents
Japanese
English
8. 5. 4.29 Interface Communication Setting (No.057)

It is possible to specify the communication of Interface.
Setting value
0
1
2
Contents
Both the A Channel and the B Channel are used alternately.
Interface Board communicates with both the image scanner (through A Channel)
and the controller (through B Channel) alternately.
The A Channel only is used.
Interface Board communicates with image scanner through the A Channel.
The B Channel only is used.
Interface Board communicates with controller through the B Channel.
8. 5. 4.30 Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No.058)

It is possible to make the machine recognize the optional Roll Deck 2 if it is installed.
Setting value
0
1
Contents
Optional Roll Deck 2 is not installed.
Optional Roll Deck 2 is installed.
8. 5. 4.31 Counter Value (No.059)

It is possible to specify the counting unit of Counter.
Setting value
0
(Default in EUR & ASIA)
1
2
3
4
5
(Default in USA)
Contents
1 linear meter
0.1 linear meter
1 square meter
0.1 square meter
1 linear foot
1 square foot
8-59
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.32 Maximum Length (No.060)

It is possible to specify the maximum cut length.
Setting value
0
1
Contents
Maximum cut length is 6.0m.
Maximum cut length is 24m.
NOTE
We will not guarantee the print quality if the print is longer than the following sizes.
36 plain paper
Other sizes of plain paper
Tracing paper
Film
6.0m
5 times as long as each standard size
Twice as long as each standard size
Standard sizes
8. 5. 4.33 Stacking Device setting (No.061)

It is possible to make the KIP 3100 recognize the optional device (stacker or folder) if connected.
Setting value
0
1
Contents
Optional device is not connected.
Auto Stacker (K-76)
8. 5. 4.34 Operation of Fuser Roller (No.062)

It is possible to decide whether or not the Fuser Roller should rotate periodically in the stand by
condition.
Setting value
0
1
Contents
Fuser Roller rotates periodically in the stand by condition.
Fuser Roller does not rotate at all in the stand by condition.
Reference
Fuser Roller periodically rotates and stops when the machine is ready, so as to equalize the
temperature at every point of Fuser Roller. If you feel it is so noisy, select the setting value
1.
In this case please note that the fusing quality may not be so good because the temperature
of Fuser Roller is not equalized.
8-60
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.35 Cut Length 5 & 6

(Length Compensation for Tracing Paper / Film)(No.063, 064)
It is possible to compensate the print length for the tracing paper and film.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the length of the print becomes longer.
Item No.
Setting Item
063
Cut Length 5 (Tracing Paper)
064
Cut Length 6 (Film)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
100
100
100
Setting
range
0 to 200
86
0 to 200
Step of
increment
depends on
paper length
depends on
paper length
An amount of the length to be added / removed against 1 increment of the setting value will vary
depending on the length of the media length to be printed.
1 increment will correspond to the length listed below to be compensated.
paper length
A0 (1189mm)
A1 (841mm)
A2 (594mm)
A3 (420mm)
A4 (297mm)
100
50
Actual length
0
100
50
Expected length
length to be added /
removed (Approx.)
0.16mm
0.11mm
0.08mm
0.05mm
0.04mm
Increasing the value
8-61
100
50
Actual length
100
50
Expected length
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.36 Drum Reverse Time (No.065)

It is possible to change the period for the Drum reverse rotation.
Developer Roller is strongly pressed to the Drum and that may cause an indentation on Developer
Rollers surface. The indentation may result in defective imaging.
The Drum makes a reverse rotation in a given period twice after finishing a job.
Setting a bigger value for No.065 makes the reverse rotation period longer.
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
30
30
Setting range
Step of increment
10 to 70
1 millisecond
Print process end

Drum reverse rotation starts
stops / starts again
Value for No.065
stops
Value for No.065
Reference
(1) Drum reverse rotations may produce a slight amount of toner sticking on Drums surface.
This causes a black line about 50mm below the leading edge on a print.
Setting a smaller value will reduce such a line.
(2) Setting an extremely small value may cause an indentation on Developer Roller.
8. 5. 4. 37 Fuser Motor Reverse Setting (No.066)

It is possible to make a decision to allow reverse operation of Fuser Motor at the time of Drum
Reverse.
Setting value
0
(default)
1
Contents
Fuser Motor does not make a reverse operation at all
Fuser Motor makes a reverse operation in conjunction
with Drum Reverse.
NOTE
This setting does not function. Change of this setting has no effect on the machine operation.
8-62
K116sm8e4
8. 5. 4.38 Operation of Separation Lamp (No.067)

There may be the case that some type of printing paper has a difficulty in paper separation.
In this case it is possible to assist paper separation by lighting the Separation Lamp.
It is possible in this No.067 to decide to which type of paper the Separation Lamp should light.
Selectable values are from 1 to 7
Setting value
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Contents
Separation Lamp lights for plain paper.
Separation Lamp lights for tracing paper.
Separation Lamp lights for plain paper and tracing paper.
Separation Lamp lights for film.
Separation Lamp lights for plain paper and film.
Separation Lamp lights for tracing paper and film.
Separation Lamp lights for all kinds of paper.
Reference
Sometimes you can avoid defect of transfer (light image) by making the Separation Lamp
work.
So if you feel the print image is too light, try to make it work.
You may be able to fix the problem.
8-63
K116sm8e4

It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th
Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing)
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A3, 12 and 11 sizes by roll
paper feeding.
Item
No.
070
071
072
073
074
075
678
679
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed
(Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
34
39
1
1
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
35
1
42
1
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
50
5
48
5
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
34
6
37
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
Please refer to the next page for further information.
8-64
K116sm8e5
Reference
Sometimes crease of paper or defective image may occur when you make a very long print
with a constant Fuser Motor Speed.
Fuser Motor Speed is constant
100
Leading edge
A
50
B
C
0
Defective image
Crease of paper
It is effective to fix these problems if we change Fuser Motor Speed step by step during 1 sheet
of print.
The Fuser Motor speed can be changed to 4 times in maximum for 1 sheet of print.
At first Fuser Motor rotates obeying the setting of Fuser Motor Speed (specified in No.316 to
321). After that it changes its rotation speed step by step obeying the speed settings
.
1st Speed Switch
Timing (No.071)
Fuser Motor
Speed (No.316)
2nd Speed Switch

Timing (No.073)
1st Speed
(No.070)
3rd Speed Switch

Timing (No.075)
2nd Speed
(No.072)
3rd Speed
(No.074)
4th Speed Switch

Timing (No.679)
4th Speed
(No.678)
100
A
50
B
C
0
8-65
K116sm8e5
You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd and 4th in each Item No.070, 072, 074, 678.
If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.04mm/second faster.
(The default setting value 40 corresponds to 80mm/second.)
(Example)
Setting value of 070 is 41
Fuser Motor 1st Speed is 80.04mm/sec.

Fuser Motor 2nd Speed is 80.08mm/sec.
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed is 80.12mm/sec.
Fuser Motor 4th Speed is 80.16mm/sec.
Fuser Motor
1st Speed
(80.04mm/s)
Fuser Motor
2nd Speed
(80.08mm/s)
Fuser Motor
3rd Speed
(80.12mm/s)
Fuser Motor
4th Speed
(80.16mm/s)
100
A
50
B
C
0
You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item
No.071, 073, 075, 679.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 0.5 second delayed.
(If you specify 0, the Fuser Motor Speed does not change.)
(Example)
4 seconds
(Fuser motor Speed)
Fuser Motor 1st Speed starts 4 seconds after the Registration

Sensor detects the leading edge.
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed starts 8 seconds after the start of
Fuser Motor 1st Speed.
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed starts 12 seconds after the start of
Fuser Motor 4th Speed starts 16 seconds after the start of
8 seconds
(1st Speed)
12seconds
(2nd Speed)
16 seconds
(3rd Speed)
(4th Speed)
100
A
50
B
C
0
8-66
K116sm8e5

It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd, 3rd and
4th Speed.
It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing)
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A3, 12 and 11 sizes by
roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
076
077
078
079
080
081
680
681
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
(Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
33
36
1
1
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
39
1
44
3
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
44
5
44
5
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item No.076, 078, 080, 680.
No.077, 079, 081, 681.
Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.
8-67
K116sm8e5

(Film / A3, 12 & 11) (No.082 to 087, 682, 683)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film of A3, 12 and 11 sizes by roll paper
feeding.
Item
No.
082
083
084
085
086
087
682
683
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
50
50
2
2
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
50
4
50
4
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
040
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item No.082, 084, 086, 682.
No.083, 085, 087, 683.
8-68
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A3, 12 and
11 sizes by roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
088
089
090
091
092
093
684
685
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Fuser Motor 1st Speed

(Roll / Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed Setting
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed
Fuser Motor 4th Speed
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item No.088, 090, 092, 684.
No.089, 091, 093, 685.
8-69
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A3, 12
and 11 sizes by roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
094
095
096
097
098
099
686
687
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40

(Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
No.095, 097, 099, 687.
8-70
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A3, 12 and 11
sizes by roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
100
101
102
103
104
105
688
689
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11)
(Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.101, 103, 105, 689.
8-71
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
paper feeding.
Item
No.
106
107
108
109
110
111
690
691
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
30
31
3
3
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
32
4
36
4
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
31
6
38
6
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
37
10
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.107, 109, 111, 691.
8-72
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
112
113
114
115
116
117
692
693
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
33
40
3
1
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
38
3
44
5
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
38
5
45
5
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.113, 115, 117, 693.
8-73
K116sm8e5

(Film / A2, 18 & 17) (No.118 to 123, 694, 695)
4th Speed.
feeding.
Item
No.
118
119
120
121
122
123
694
695
Setting Item
(Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17)
(Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17)
(Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17)
(Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
50
50
2
2
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
50
6
50
6
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.119, 121, 123, 695.
8-74
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
Item
No.
124
125
126
127
128
129
696
697
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40

Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
No.125, 127, 129, 697.
8-75
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
and 17 size by roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
130
131
132
133
134
135
698
699
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40

(Roll / Special tracing / A2, 18 & 17)
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
No.131, 133, 135, 699.
8-76
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
Item
No.
136
137
138
139
140
141
700
701
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item No.136, 138,140, 700.
No.137, 139, 141, 701.
8-77
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
paper feeding.
Item
No.
142
143
144
145
146
147
702
703
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
37
35
3
3
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
30
6
33
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
6
41
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
35
16
36
16
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.143, 145, 147, 703.
8-78
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
148
149
150
151
152
153
704
705
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
36
42
3
3
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
41
9
43
9
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
39
8
40
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.149, 151, 153, 705.
8-79
K116sm8e5

(Film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.154 to 159, 706, 707)
4th Speed.
feeding.
Item
No.
154
155
156
157
158
159
706
707
Setting Item
(Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
42
42
2
2
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
42
14
42
14
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.155, 157, 159, 707.
8-80
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
Item
No.
160
161
162
163
164
165
708
709
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40

Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
No.161, 163, 165, 709.
8-81
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
Item
No.
166
167
168
169
170
171
710
711
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40

Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
No.167, 169, 171, 711.
8-82
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
Item
No.
172
173
174
175
176
177
712
713
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.173, 175, 177, 713.
8-83
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
paper feeding.
Item
No.
178
179
180
181
182
183
714
715
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
26
26
4
3
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
27
10
27
10
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
33
8
37
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
30
20
30
20
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.179, 181, 183, 715.
8-84
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
184
185
186
187
188
189
716
717
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
29
42
3
3
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
35
13
38
13
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
36
8
39
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
34
20
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.185, 187, 189, 717.
8-85
K116sm8e5

(Film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.190 to 195, 718, 719)
4th Speed.
feeding.
Item
No.
190
191
192
193
194
195
718
719
Setting Item
(Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34)
(Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
35
38
2
2
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
18
43
18
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.191, 193, 195, 719.
8-86
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
Item
No.
196
197
198
199
200
201
720
721
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40

Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
No.197, 199, 201, 721.
8-87
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
Item
No.
202
203
204
205
206
207
722
723
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 &
34)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 &
34)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 &
34)
rd
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3 Speed
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 &
34)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
No.203, 205, 207, 723.
8-88
K116sm8e5

4th Speed.
Item
No.
208
209
210
211
212
213
724
725
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.209, 211, 213, 725.
8-89
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4.63 Main Motor Speed (No.310 to 315)

It is possible to adjust the speed of Main Motor for each type of paper separately.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the motor speed becomes 0.04mm/second faster.
Item
No.
310
311
312
313
314
315
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
36
36
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Main Motor Speed (Plain paper)

Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper)
Main Motor Speed (Film)
Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper)
Main Motor Speed (Special tracing paper)
Main Motor Speed (Special film)
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.04mm/s
0.04mm/s
0.04mm/s
0.04mm/s
0.04mm/s
CAUTION
The Main Motor Speed is the basis for many other print settings.
So you have to re-adjust all of these print settings if you change the Main Motor Speed.
8. 5. 4.64 Fuser Motor Speed (36 / 34 / 30 / 24 / 22 / A0 / B1 / A1)

(No.316 to 321)
It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor for each type of paper separately.
Item
No.
316
317
318
319
320
321
Setting Item
Fuser Motor Speed (36 / 34 / 30 / 24 / 22 / A0 / B1 / A1)
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film paper)
(Special plain paper)
(Special tracing paper)
(Special film)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
31
35
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
39
50
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
50
50
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
Refer to [8.5.4.119 Fuser Motor Speed] on page 8-134 for narrower originals than the above.
8. 5. 4.65 Separation Corona OFF Timing (No.322 to 327)

It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona stops discharging during the print
cycle.
You can specify the timing for each type of paper separately.
Item
No.
322
323
324
325
326
327
Setting Item
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain paper)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (tracing paper)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special plain paper)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special tracing paper)
Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special film)
8-90
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
25
25
25
25
22
25
18
18
18
18
23
23
Setting
range
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
Step of
increment
1mm
1mm
1mm
1mm
1mm
1mm
K116sm8e5

(Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.328 to 333)
It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by cut
sheet bypass feeding.
Item
No.
328
329
330
331
332
333
Setting Item
(Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
30
31
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
32
36
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
31
38
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd in each Item No.328, 330 and 332.
You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd in each Item No.329,
331 and 333.
8-91
K116sm8e5

(Tracing paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.334 to 339)
Speed.
cut sheet bypass feeding.
Item
No.
334
335
336
337
338
339
Setting Item
(Cut sheet / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
33
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
38
44
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
38
45
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
337 and 339.
8-92
K116sm8e5

(Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.340 to 345)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by cut sheet
bypass feeding.
Item
No.
340
341
342
343
344
345
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
50
50

(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
50
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
343 and 345.
8-93
K116sm8e5

(Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(No.346 to 351)
Speed.
17 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding.
Item
No.
346
347
348
349
350
351
Setting Item
(Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
349 and 351.
8-94
K116sm8e5

(Special tracing paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
(No.352 to 357)
Speed.
and 17 size by cut sheet bypass feeding.
Item
No.
352
353
354
355
356
357
Setting Item
(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
355 and 357.
8-95
K116sm8e5

(Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.358 to 363)
Speed.
sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding.
Item
No.
358
359
360
361
362
363
Setting Item
(Cut sheet / Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
361 and 363.
8-96
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
364
365
366
367
368
369
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 &
22)
(Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 &
22)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 &
22)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
37
35
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
30
33
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
41
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
367 and 369.
8-97
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
370
371
372
373
374
375
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
(Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
36
42
3
3
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
41
9
43
9
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
39
8
40
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
373 and 375.
8-98
K116sm8e5

(Film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.376 to 381)
Speed.
bypass feeding.
Item
No.
376
377
378
379
380
381
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22)
(Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
42
42
2
2
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
42
14
42
14
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
379 and 381.
8-99
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
382
383
384
385
386
387
Setting Item
(Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
385 and 387.
8-100
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
388
389
390
391
392
393
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40

(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22)
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
391 and 393.
8-101
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
394
395
396
397
398
399
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 &
22)
(Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 & 22)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 &
22)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 &
22)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
397 and 399.
8-102
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
400
401
402
403
404
405
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36 &
34)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36 &
34)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36 &
34)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
26
26
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
27
27
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
10
10
0 to 300
0.5 sec
33
37
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
403 and 405.
8-103
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
406
407
408
409
410
411
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
29
42
3
3
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
35
13
38
13
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
36
8
39
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
409 and 411.
8-104
K116sm8e5

(Film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.412 to 417)
Speed.
bypass feeding.
Item
No.
412
413
414
415
416
417
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36 & 34)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36 & 34)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36 & 34)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
35
38
2
2
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
42
18
43
18
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
415 and 417.
8-105
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
418
419
420
421
422
423
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
421 and 423.
8-106
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
424
425
426
427
428
429
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40

rd
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3 Speed
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
427 and 429.
8-107
K116sm8e5

Speed.
Item
No.
430
431
432
433
434
435
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36 &
34)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36 &
34)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36 &
34)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
433 and 435.
8-108
K116sm8e5

(Plain paper / 30) (No.436 to 441, 726, 727)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of 30 size by roll paper
feeding.
Item
No.
436
437
438
439
440
441
726
727
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30)
(Roll / plain paper / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
28
28
5
5
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
30
9
33
9
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
34
7
36
7
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
36
20
30
20
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.437, 439, 441, 727.
8-109
K116sm8e5

(Tracing paper / 30) (No.442 to 447, 728, 729)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of 30 size by roll paper
feeding.
Item
No.
442
443
444
445
446
447
728
729
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
34
33
4
4
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / tracing / 30)

(Roll / tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / tracing / 30)
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
38
11
44
11
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
8
41
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
34
20
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.443, 445, 447, 729.
8-110
K116sm8e5

(Film / 30) (No.448 to 453, 730, 731)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film of 30 size by roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
448
449
450
451
452
453
730
731
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / film / 30)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / film / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / film / 30)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / film / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / film / 30)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / film / 30)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / film / 30)
Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / film / 30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
40
40
0
0
40
40
0
0
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
0 to 80
0 to 300
0 to 80
0 to 300
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.449, 451, 453, 731.
8-111
K116sm8e5

(Special plain paper / 30) (No.454 to 459, 732, 733)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of 30 size by
roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
454
455
456
457
458
459
732
733
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30)
(Roll / special plain paper / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.455, 457, 459, 733.
8-112
K116sm8e5

(Special tracing paper / 30) (No.460 to 465, 734, 735)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of 30 size
by roll paper feeding.
Item
No.
460
461
462
463
464
465
734
735
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30)
(Roll / special tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.461, 463, 465, 735.
8-113
K116sm8e5

(Special film / 30) (No.466 to 471, 736, 737)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of 30 size by roll
paper feeding.
Item
No.
466
467
468
469
470
471
736
737
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special film / 30)
(Roll / special film / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special film / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special film / 30)
Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special film / 30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
No.467, 469, 471, 737.
8-114
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4.90 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet

paper (Plain paper / 30) (No.472 to 477)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of 30 size by cut sheet
bypass feeding.
Item
No.
472
473
474
475
476
477
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30)
(Cut sheet / plain paper / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
28
28
5
5
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
30
9
33
9
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
34
7
36
7
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
475 and 477.
8-115
K116sm8e5

paper (Tracing paper / 30) (No.478 to 483)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of 30 size by cut sheet
bypass feeding.
Item
No.
478
479
480
481
482
483
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30)
(Cut sheet / tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
34
33
4
4
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
38
11
44
11
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
8
41
8
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
481 and 483.
8-116
K116sm8e5

paper (Film / 30) (No.484 to 489)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film of 30 size by cut sheet bypass
feeding.
Item
No.
484
485
486
487
488
489
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30)

(Cut sheet / film / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30)
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
487 and 489.
8-117
K116sm8e5

paper (Special plain paper / 30) (No.490 to 495)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of 30 size by
Item
No.
490
491
492
493
494
495
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper /
30)
(Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper /
30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper /
30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 300
0.5 sec
493 and 495.
8-118
K116sm8e5

paper (Special tracing paper / 30) (No.496 to 501)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of 30 size
by cut sheet bypass feeding.
Item
No.
496
497
498
499
500
501
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30)
(Cut sheet / special tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd in each Item No.496, 498 and 500.
499 and 501.

paper (Special film / 30) (No.502 to 507)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of 30 size by cut
Item
No.
502
503
504
505
506
507
Setting Item
Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30)
(Cut sheet / special film / 30)
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30)
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
40
40
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
0 to 300
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
40
0
40
0
0 to 80
0 to 300
0.04mm/s
0.5 sec
You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd in each Item No.502, 504 and 506.
505 and 507.
8-119
K116sm8e5

It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 100mm end of a print.
This section does not function and is reserved for future update.
Item
No.
508
509
510
Setting Item
Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain)

Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Tracing)
Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Film)
Default value
US EUR/
A
ASIA
4FF
4FF
4FF
4FF
4FF
4FF
Setting
range
Step of
increment
0 to 9FE
0 to 9FE
0 to 9FE

It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 70mm end of a print.
A setting combination among No.511 to No.516 can reduce ghost images on the bottom area of a
print in some cases.
Item
No.
511
512
513
Setting Item
Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain)

Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Tracing)
Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Film)
Default value
US EUR/
A
ASIA
62F
62F
69F
69F
4FF
4FF
Setting
range
Step of
increment
0 to 9FE
0 to 9FE
0 to 9FE

It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor driving on 30mm end of a print.
A setting combination among No.511 to No.516 can reduce ghost images on the bottom area of a
print in some cases.
Item
No.
514
515
516
Setting Item
Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain)

Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Tracing)
Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Film)
8-120
Default value
USA
EUR/
ASIA
13
17
19
19
0
0
Setting
range
Step of
increment
0 to 80
0 to 80
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0.04mm/s
0.04mm/s
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4.99 Judgement value for Additional Cut Length

for Non-standard Size Prints (No.613 to 616)
It is possible to avoid the lack of trailing image on the non-standard size print, by providing
additional paper length by service modes 4-617 to 4-620 (Additional Cut Length for non-standard
size print).
Additional Cut Length specified by service mode 4-617 to 4-620 is not always provided.
Whether or not it is provided is judged by service mode 4-613 to 4-616 (Judgment value for
Additional Cut Length for non-standard size print.)
Item
No.
613
614
615
616
Setting Item
Judgement value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard
Size Prints (36/ 34/ 30/ A0 / B1)
Size Prints (18/ 17/ 15/ A2)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
1
1
Setting
range
1 to 20
Step of
increment
1mm
1 to 20
1mm
1 to 20
1mm
1 to 20
1mm
Reference
(1) Which Judgement Value / Additional Cut Length setting is applied to a non-standard size
print depends on the corresponding roll width.
Roll Width Standard Size Standard Cut Length
36"
841mm
34"
30"
728mm
24"
22"
594mm
18"
420mm
17"
15"
12"
11"
297mm
36"x48"
A0
34"x44"
30"x42"
B1
24"x36"
22"x34"
A1
18"x24"
A2
17"x22"
15"x21"
12"x18"
11"x17"
A3
1219mm
1189mm
1118mm
1067mm
1030mm
914mm
864mm
841mm
610mm
594mm
559mm
533mm
457mm
432mm
420mm
Judgement
Value
Additional
Length
No.613
No.617
No.614
No.618
No.615
No.619
No.616
No.620
(next page)
8-121
K116sm8e5
Reference
(2) If the actual image length is longer than (or equal to) A+B, C is provided to the trailing
edge of non-standard size print.
A: Standard Cut Length (depends on roll width)
B: Value of Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints
C: Value of Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints
<Example>
Actual Image Length: 860mm

A: 841mm (A1 roll width)
B: 10
C: 20
A (841mm)
B (10)
Actual Image Length (860mm)
Print Length (880mm)
C (20)
(3) If the actual image length is shorter than A+B, the print is cut as long as the actual
image length. (C is not provided to the trailing edge of the print.)
A: Standard Cut Length (depends on roll width)
B: Value of Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints
C: Value of Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints
<Example>
Actual Image Length: 845mm

A: 841mm (A1 roll width)
B: 10
C: 20
A (841mm)
B (10)
Print Length (845mm)
8-122
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4.100 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints

(No.617 to 620)
It is possible to avoid the lack of trailing image on the non-standard size print, by providing
additional paper length by service modes 4-617 to 4-620 (Additional Cut Length for non-standard
size print).
Additional Cut Length specified by service mode 4-617 to 4-620 is not always provided.
Whether or not it is provided is judged by service mode 4-613 to 4-616 (Judgment value for
Additional Cut Length for non-standard size print.)
Item
No.
617
618
619
620
Setting Item
(36/ 34/ 30/ A0 / B1)
(24/ 22/ A2)
(18/ 17/ 15/ A2)
(12/ 11/ A3)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 35
Step of
increment
1mm
0 to 35
1mm
0 to 35
1mm
0 to 35
1mm
Refer to page 8-121 and 122 for Additional Cut Length and its Judgement Value.
8. 5. 4. 101 Toner Supply Roller Bias (No.621)

It is possible to make a bias adjustment for Toner Supply Roller.
Default Value
286
Setting Range
0 to 800
Step of increment
1
NOTE
This setting does not function. Change of this setting has no effect on the machine operation.
8. 5. 4. 102 Regulation Bias (No.622)

It is possible to make the print density darker or lighter by adjusting Regulation Bias (Center).
The print density becomes darker if you increase the setting value.
Default Value
270
Setting Range
0 to 800
Step of increment
1
NOTE
Please adjust Regulation Bias while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter.
8-123
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 103 Density Sensor Default Output (No.623)

It is possible to change the default analog output of Density Sensor on Density Measure.
Default Output will be used for Density Value calculation.
Default / Standard Output are used for a reference to measure density and self operation check
only.
Default Value
0
Setting Range
0 to 614
Step of increment
1
NOTE
This setting has been factory-adjusted. Keep the value unchanged.
8. 5. 4. 104 Density Sensor Standard Output (No.624)

It is possible to change the standard output of Density Sensor on Density Measure.
Standard Output will be used for Density Value calculation.
Default / Standard Output are used for a reference to measure density and self operation check
only.
Default Value
0
Setting Range
0 to 614
Step of increment
1
NOTE
8-124
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 105 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (12/11/A3) (No.625 to 630)

It is possible to adjust the side part of Fuser Temperature in a print cycle.
You can specify the temperature for each type and size of media separately.
Item No.
625
626
627
628
629
630
Setting Item
(Plain) (12 / 11 / A3)
(Tracingr) (12 / 11 / A3)
(Film) (12 / 11 / A3)
(Special media / Film) (12 / 11 / A3)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
160
145
Setting
range
120 to 180
Step of
increment
o
1C
160
150
120 to 180
1oC
177
170
120 to 180
1oC
160
160
120 to 180
1oC
160
160
120 to 180
1oC
177
170
120 to 180
1C
Reference
The center part of Fuser Temperature will be controlled by Print - Fuser Temperature Center
(No. 039 to 044) separately.
Refer to [8.5.4.19 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (No.039 to 044)] on page 8-53 for
further information.
8. 5. 4. 106 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (18/17/15/A2)

(No.631 to 636)
Item No.
631
632
633
634
635
636
Setting Item
(Plain) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Tracing) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Film) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Special / Plain) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Special / Tracing) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
(Special / Film) (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
160
165
Setting
range
120 to 180
Step of
increment
1oC
o
160
170
120 to 180
1C
177
170
120 to 180
1C
160
160
120 to 180
1C
160
160
120 to 180
1C
177
170
120 to 180
1C
Reference
8-125
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 107 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (24/22/A1) (No.637 to 648)

Item No.
637
638
639
640
641
642
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
160
165

(Plain) (24 / 22 / A1)
(Tracing) (24 / 22 / A1)
(Film) (24 / 22 / A1)
(Specia / Film) (24 / 22 / A1)
Setting
range
120 to 180
Step of
increment
o
1C
160
170
120 to 180
1oC
177
170
120 to 180
1oC
160
160
120 to 180
1oC
160
160
120 to 180
1oC
177
170
120 to 180
1C
Reference
8. 5. 4. 108 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (36/34/30/A0/B1)

(No.643 to 648)
Item No.
643
644
645
646
647
648
Setting Item
(Plain) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Tracing) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Film) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Special / Plain) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Special / Tracing) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
(Special / Film) (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
160
165
Setting
range
120 to 180
Step of
increment
1oC
o
160
170
120 to 180
1C
177
170
120 to 180
1C
160
160
120 to 180
1C
160
160
120 to 180
1C
177
177
120 to 180
1C
Reference
8-126
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 109 Density Sensor Output Information (No.649)

It is possible to change the mode to monitor the default analog output of Density Sensor.
Default Value
1
Setting Range
0 to 4
NOTE
This setting is factory-use only. Keep the value unchanged.
8. 5. 4. 110 Regulation Bias Increment

for Auto Adjustment Level 2 and 3 (No.650)
It is possible to change the amount (increment) of Regulation Bias on Auto Adjustment.
A specified increment of Regulation Bias will be applied at switching to Auto Adjustment Level 2
and Level 3.
The default voltage value of the increment is 40V (corresponding to 80 in the setting value) for
switching to Auto Adjustment Level 2 and 3.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment becomes
0.5V higher.
Default Value
80
Setting Range
0 to 200
Step of increment
0.5V
NOTE
8-127
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 111 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment (No.651)

It is possible to check the total amount (increment) of currently applied Regulation Bias Adjustment
by Density Compensation.
It is possible to add a 0.5V to the total amount of Regulation Roller Bias Adjustment directly.
Default Value
0
Setting Range
0 to 800
Step of increment
0.5V
NOTE
This setting can be used for checking purpose only.
Setting change is allowed to factory-use only. Keep the value unchanged.
8-128
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No.652)

It is possible to decide whether Density Compnesation is enabled.
Setting value
0
1
(default)
Contents
Density Compensation Process is disabled
Density Compensation Process is enabled
Reference
Density Cpmpensation Process is performed as follows.
1. Density Measure:
Several solid patches are created on Drum and are measured by Density Sensor at a regular
interval of Main Motor operating time (No.655, 656).
2. Density Threshold:
If Density Value (calcurated based on Density Measure) falls short of the lower density limit
(Minimum Density: No.653), one of the Auto Adjustment Level listed below will be applied.
3. Auto Bias Adjustment:
Developer Bias (No.657) and Regulation Bias (No.650) will be adjusted based on the current
Auto Adjustment Level.
Once Level 3 is applied, Density Measure will remain canceled until reset in Clear Mode.
Default
upon shipment
Developer Bias
(Negative)
Regulation Bias
against Developer Bias
default state
0V
-100V
-180V
No
Compensation
-180V
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
-230V
-230V
-230V
-80V
-120V
-160V
remain default
-80V
-80V
remain default
Auto Adjustment
Level 1
Auto Adjustment
Level 2
Auto Adjustment
Level 3
Density Measure
canceled until reset
Developer Bias
-180V (default)
-180V to -230V
50V increment
(No.657)
-200V
remain -230V until reset

-300V
-400V
-80V to -120V
40V increment
-120V to -160V
(No.650)
40V increment
(No.650)
Regulation Bias
against
Developer Bias
-80V (default)
(No.622)
remain -160V until reset
-500V
8-129
K116sm8e5
NOTE
(1) Manual Switching of Auto Adjustment Level is not provided.
(2) While Density Value exceeds Minimum Density, the current Compensation Level will
remain.
(3) Auto Adjustment Level will not be reset to the previous level or to the default
automatically at all. Even if Developer / Blade Rollers are replaced, still the current Auto
Adjustment will continue to be applied.
An applied Auto Adjustment Level should be reset after replacing Developer / Blade
Rollers. Refer to [8. 10. 2. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode] on page 8-160.
8-130
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 113 Minimum Density (No.653)

It is possible to change Minimum Density, which is the lower density limit.
If Density Value falls short of Minimum Density, one of Auto Adjustment Level 1, Level 2, Level 3
will be applied.
If you increase the setting value by +1, Minimum Density will rise and thus Auto Adjustment Level
would be switched to the next level earlier.
Default Value
135
Setting Range
110 to 150
Step of increment
1
NOTE
8. 5. 4. 114 Regulation Bias Maximum (No.654)

It is possible to change the maximum of Regulation Bias.
When the total value amount of Regulation Bias (No.622) and Total Increment of Regulation Bias
Adjustment (No.641) reaches to the value of this setting, Regulation Bias cannot raise any more.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the maximum of Regulation Bias increases.
Default Value
500
Setting Range
160 to 800
Step of increment
1
NOTE
8. 5. 4. 115 Density Measure Interval (No.655, 656)

It is possible to change an interval of Density Measure.
When Bias 3 Time in Information Mode reaches a specified period in this setting, Density Measure
will run.
There are 2 kind of the trigger to check Bias 3 Time whether the period passes.
(1) At the time if turning on the machine
(2) After completion of the current print queue
If you increase the setting value by +1, the interval of Density Measure becomes 1 hour longer.
Item
No.
655
656
Setting Item
Density Measure Interval at Power on
Density Measure Interval at Print Completion
Default
Value
18
18
Setting
range
1 to 100
1 to 100
Step of
increment
1 hour
1 hour
NOTE
8-131
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 116 Developer Bias Increment

for Auto Adjustment Level 1 and after (No.657)
It is possible to change the amount (increment) of Developer Bias Adjustment.
A specified increment of Developer Bias will be applied at switching to and as of Compensation
Level 1.
The default voltage value of the increment is 50V (corresponding to 80 in the setting value) for
switching to Compensation Level 1. The increased Developer Bias will be applied to the
subsequent Compensation Level.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the increment of Developer Bias Adjustment becomes
higher.
Default Value
158
Setting Range
0 to 400
Step of increment
1
NOTE
8-132
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 117 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (No.660 to 665)

It is possible to specify Ready temperature.
This setting will be applied only when Fuser Temperature is below at turning on the machine.
Item No.
660
661
662
663
664
665
Setting Item
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Plain)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Film)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Center
(Special / Plain)
(Special / Tracing)
(Special / Film)
Default value
USA
EUR/AS
160
160
160
170
177
177
160
160
Setting
range
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
Step of
increment
o
1C
o
1C
1oC
1oC
160
160
120 to 180
1oC
177
170
120 to 180
1C
Fuser Temperature Overshoot

(+10oC against Ready - Temperature, in 10 minutes after reaching Ready - Temperature)
(oC)
Setting value of
Ready - Temperature
(Example 160oC)
50 oC
0
Turn on
(Time)
Ready
8. 5. 4. 118 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (No.666 to 671)

It is possible to specify Ready temperature.
This setting will be applied only when Fuser Temperature is below at turning on the machine.
Item No.
666
667
668
669
670
671
Setting Item
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Plain)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Film)
Ready - Fuser Temperature Side
(Special / Plain)
(Special / Tracing)
(Special / Film)
Default value
USA
EUR/AS
159
159
159
180
177
170
159
159
Setting
range
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
120 to 180
Step of
increment
o
1C
o
1C
1oC
o
1C
o
159
159
120 to 180
1C
177
170
120 to 180
1C
Note that the machine gets ready when Ready - Fuser Temperature Side reaches a given
temperature.
8-133
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 119 Fuser Motor Speed (18 / 17 / 15 / 12 / 11 / A2 / A3)

(No. 672 to 677)
It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor for each type of paper separately.
Item
No.
672
673
674
675
676
677
Setting Item
Fuser Motor Speed (18 / 17 / 15 / 12 / 11 / A2 / A3)
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film paper)
(Special plain paper)
(Special tracing paper)
(Special film)
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
50
50
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
57
60
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
50
50
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
40
40
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
8. 5. 4. 120 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed 4

Fuser Motor Speed 4 is explained on Fuser Motor Speed 1, 2, 3 together.
Please refer to [8.5.4.39 Compensation of Fuser Speed 1 (No.070 to 075)] on page 8-64 to 66
and the concerning pages for media type / size.
8. 5. 4. 121 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed

Switch timing of Fuser Motor Speed 4 is explained on Fuser Motor Speed 1, 2, 3 together.
Please refer to [8.5.4.39 Compensation of Fuser Speed 1 (No.070 to 075)] on page 8-64 to 66
and the concerning pages for media type / size.
8-134
K116sm8e5
8. 5. 4. 122 Standby - Fuser Temperature (No.738, 739)

It is possible to adjust the Fuser Temperature to be maintained during standby (idling time). You
can specify the temperature for the center and the sides separately.
This setting is applied after the period Fuser Temperature Overshoot (+10oC against Ready Temperature in 10 minutes).
Item No.
738
739
Setting Item
Default value
USA
EUR/ASIA
167
167
155
155
Standby - Fuser Temperature Center

Standby - Fuser Temperature Side
Setting
range
120 to 180
120 to 180
Step of
increment
o
1C
1oC
Fuser Temperature Overshoot

(+10oC against Ready - Temperature, in 10 minutes after reaching Ready - Temperature)
(oC)
Setting value of
Standby - Temperature
(Example 155oC)
0
Turn on
(Time)
End of Overshoot period
Standby (idling)
8. 5. 4. 123 Assist Fan Off Timing (No.740 to 742)

Assist Fan stops at a regular period after the leading edge of a print of in 15 or wider reaches
Registration Sensor. It is possible to change the timing of Assist Fan off.
If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing of Assist Fan off becomes 0.125 seconds later.
Item
No.
740
741
742
Setting Item
Assist Fan Off Timing (18 / 17 / 15 / A2)
Assist Fan Off Timing (24 / 22 / A1)
Assist Fan Off Timing (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1)
Default value
USA
EUR/AS
8
4
8
4
8
6
Setting
range
0 to 8
0 to 8
0 to 8
Step of
increment
0.125 sec
0.125 sec
0.125 sec
8. 5. 4. 124 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 100mm from trailing edge

(36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1 width) (No.743 to 745)
It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor driving on 100mm end of a print in 36 / 34 / 30 /
A0 / B1 width.
If you increase the setting value by +1, speed of Fuser Motor driving becomes 0.04mm/s slower
than the applied speed at that point.
Item
No.
743
744
745
Setting Item
Fuser Motor Spped applied at 100mm from trailing
edge (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1 width) (Plain)
edge (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1 width) (Traceing)
edge (36 / 34 / 30 / A0 / B1 width) (Film)
8-135
Default value
USA
EUR/AS
0
0
Setting
range
0 to 80
Step of
increment
0.04mm/s
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
0 to 80
0.04mm/s
K116sm8e5
8. 6
Running Mode (Factory Mode)

NOTE
The Running Mode is prepared for factory use.

Do not take the following operation because it is meaningless to do it in the field.
8. 6. 1
Function
In the Running Mode the machine takes usual printing operation even if no paper is installed.
(If you install any paper it is transported and ejected from the printer as usual. But note that the
printer continues printing endlessly.)
8. 6. 2
1. Indicate (5) Running Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU]

key.
( 5 ) Runn i ng Mode
2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Running Mode.
3. In case the machine is provided with 2 Roll Decks, you can select either of them pressing
the [ * ] Key.
Dec k 1 Runn i ng
Dec k 2 Runn i ng
( Ready )
( Ready )
You can select Deck 1 and 2 alternately pressing the [ * ] Key.
4. Press the [ENTER] key, and the printer starts the printing
operation. (This is called Running Operation.)
(Start) is indicated when you start the Running Operation.
Dec k 1 Runn i ng
(St ar t )
NOTE
(1) You can not go to other sub modes of the Service Mode unless you cancel the Running
Operation.
(2) Cut length and the image pattern rely on the settings specified in the Test Print Mode.
8-136
K116sm8e6
5. Press the [ENTER] key again to cancel the Running Operation.

The indication changes to (Stop), and after that (Ready) is indicated when the Printing
Operation has been completed.
Dec k 1 Runn i ng
Dec k 1 Runn i ng
( S t op )
( Ready )
NOTE
(-----) is indicated if the Running Operation is not
available.
It will be indicated in the following cases.
Dec k 1 Runn i ng
(- - - - - )
1. Any of paper jam, error or warning condition occurs.

2. Printer is not ready.
8-137
K116sm8e6
8. 7
Jam/Error Mask Mode
8. 7. 1
Function
If the printer has any paper jam or other error, it is possible to mask (ignore) it in the Jam/Error
Masking Mode.
The jam or error is not detected when it is masked, you can operate the printer as usual even if the
cause of jam or error is not removed.
NOTE
Masking condition will be cancelled if you cancel it manually in the Jam/Error Masking Mode
or if you cancel the Service Mode.
8. 7. 2
1. Indicate (6) Mask Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key.
( 6 )Mas k Mode
2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Jam/Error Masking Mode.
The LCD indicates mask item (sensor name or error name) and status.
Mask item
. R1 Se t
R: 0
Sens o r
D: 0
E: 0
Status
8-138
K116sm8e6
3. Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the necessary mask item on the LCD.
If you will mask any paper jam, go to the following step 4.
If you will mask any error, go to the following step 6.
Mask item
(Indication on the LCD)
Paper jam
R1 Set Sensor
R2 Set Sensor
Feed Sensor
Regist Sensor
Manual Sensor
Sep Sensor
Exit Sensor
Error
M Motor Error
F Motor Error
P Motor Error
Dev Motor Error
Counter Error
1st Error
Tr Error
AC Error
Bias Error
FPGA Error
Contents of mask
Roll Deck 1 Jam
Roll Deck 2 Jam
Feeding Jam
Registration Jam
Bypass Feeder Jam
Internal Jam
Fuser Jam
Main Motor Error
Fuser Motor Error
Paper Feed Motor Error
Developer Motor Error
Counter Error
Image Corona Output Error
Transfer Corona Output Error
Separation Corona Output Error
Developer Bias Output Error
FPGA Configuration Error
4. In case you will mask any paper jam, press the [ENTER] Key several times to indicate the
necessary mask item.
(Example: You will mask the Registration Jam.)
. R1 Se t
R: 0
. Reg i s t Sens o r
Sens o r
D: 0
R: 0
E: 0
8-139
D: 0
E: 0
K116sm8e6
5. Each paper jam occurs being related with 3 factors such as R (Remain), D (Delay) and
E (Early arrival), which can be masked separately.
The value 0 beside each factor means not masked, and 1 means masked.
Press the [ENTER] Key several times until the necessary factor is masked.
R: 0
D: 0
E: 0
Press the [ENTER] key.
R: 0
D: 0
E: 1
The status of mask for the

factor E (Early) changes to
1 (masked).
Press the [ENTER] key.

R: 0
D: 1
E: 0
The status of mask for the

factor D (Delay) changes to
1 (masked).
6. In case you will mask any error, press the [ENTER] Key several times to indicate the
necessary mask item.
(Example: You will mask the Main Motor Error.)
. R1 Se t
R: 0
. M Mo t o r E r r o r
Sens o r
D: 0
E: 0
7. Press the [ENTER] Key, and you can mask the selected mask item.
Error Mask will be indicated when the selected mask item is in the mask condition.
E r r o r Mas k
NOTE
You can cancel the mask condition if you press the [ENTER] Key once more.
8-140
K116sm8e6
8. 8
8. 8. 1
Test Print Mode

Function
Test Print Mode is available to make the printer perform printing operation by all alone (no output
device is connected).
The image patterns printed in the Test Print Mode are memorized in the printer.
8. 8. 2
1. Indicate (7) Test Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key.
( 7 ) Te s t Mode
2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Test Print Mode.
P r i n t e r Ready
R1 : 36
8-141
R2 : 17
K116sm8e6
3. There are some kinds of Sub Item in the Test Print Mode.
Please select the necessary Sub Item pressing [ ] and [ ] Keys.
Please refer to the later pages as each Sub Mode is explained precisely.
Print Mode
Scale Setting Mode

. Sc a l e
P r i n t e r Ready
R1 : 36
R2 : 17
OFF
Deck Selection Mode
Negative/Positive Setting Mode
. Dec k Se l ec t i on
Ro l l
. Nega / Pos i
Pos i t i v e
Paper Length Setting Mode
Mirror Image Setting Mode
. Pape r L eng t h
. Mi r r o r
OFF
36 x 1
Print Count Setting Mode
Roll 2 Size Setting Mode
. P r i n t Coun t
. Ro l l
010 Cou n t
Image Pattern Setting Mode
Roll 2 Type Setting Mode
. Image Pa t t e r n
. R o l l 2 T y pe
P( 0) S( 0)
Pl a i n
Manual Type Setting Mode

. Manua l
Roll 1 Size Setting Mode

. Ro l l
T y pe
1 Si ze
36
Pl a i n
Manual Size Setting Mode

. Manua l
2 Si ze
24
Roll 1 Type Setting Mode

. R o l l 1 T y pe
Si ze
11 x 17
Pl a i n
8-142
K116sm8e6
8. 8. 2. 1
Print Start Mode
Press the [ENTER] Key to start test printing.

Now Printing is indicated during Test Print.
P r i n t e r Ready
Now P r i n t i ng
R1 : 36
R1 : 36
R2 : 17
R2 : 17
Press the [ENTER] key again if you want to stop the Test Print in the middle.
Printing Stop is indicated.
Now P r i n t i ng
P r i n t i ng S t op
R1 : 36
R1 : 36
R2 : 17
R2 : 17
NOTE
In addition to the above indications, you will find such indications as Warming up,
Printer stops., Warm Sleep, Cold Sleep and so on according to the condition of printer.
8. 8. 2. 2
Deck Selection
You can specify which paper source should be used for Test Print.
Select either Roll 1 or Roll 2 pressing the [ENTER] Key.
Ro l l
Ro l l
The Bypass Feeder is selected as the paper source automatically

if only you set the cut sheet paper.
Manual is indicated in this case.
(It becomes impossible to make Test Print with Roll 1 or Roll 2.)
8-143
Manua l
K116sm8e6
8. 8. 2. 3
Paper Length
You can specify the paper length (cut length) of the Test Print.
The following standard paper lengths are selectable.
Metric : A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, B1, B2, B3, B4 and B5
Inch : 48, 44, 42, 36, 34, 24, 22, 18, 17, 12, 11, 9 and 8.5
If you press the [ * ] key several times, you can magnify the standard size by the integral number.
(For example the cut length becomes A0 x 2 (2378mm) if you press the [ * ] key once when A0 is
selected. It will become A0 x 3 (3567mm) if you press twice.)
1. Indicate Paper Length on the LCD, and then press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (36x1 in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting
now.
. Pape r L eng t h
36 x 1
The setting value flashes.
2. Change the paper length pressing [ ] key or [ ] key.

And change the magnification pressing the [ * ] Key.
. Pape r L eng t h
] or [
] Key
36 x 1
. Pape r L eng t h
. Pape r L eng t h
24 x 1
[ * ] Key
24 x 1
. Pape r L eng t h
24 x 2
NOTE
Even if you specify a longer paper length than the maximum cut length, it is automatically
corrected to the maximum cut length.
(The maximum cut length relies on the paper size or the maximum cut length setting.)
3. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting.

The setting value stops flashing when decided.
8-144
K116sm8e6
8. 8. 2. 4
Print Count
It is possible to specify how many sheets of test print should be done.

1. Indicate Print Count on the LCD, and then press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (001 Count in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the
setting now.
. P r i n t Coun t
001 Cou n t
2. Indicate the necessary print count pressing [

. P r i n t Coun t
] key or [
] or [
] key.
. P r i n t Coun t
] Key
001 Cou n t
024 Cou n t

8. 8. 2. 5
Image Pattern
You can choose which image pattern should be printed in the Test Print.
1. Indicate Image Pattern on the LCD, and then press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (P(0) S(0) in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the
setting now.
P( 0) S( 0)
2. P(X) of the setting value means the Test Pattern Number

Select the necessary Test Pattern Number pressing [ ] key or [
] or [
] Key
] key.
P( 0) S( 0)
P( 1) S( 0)
3. S(X) of the setting value means the size (enlargement or reduction of image pattern).
Press and hold the [ * ] Key, and then press [ ] or [ ] Key to change the size.
Press and hold the [ * ],

and then press [ ] or [
P( 1) S( 0)
].
P( 1) S( 1)

8-145
K116sm8e6
Reference
Examples of the test pattern images are shown below.
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4 S(0) (solid white)
No.4 S(1) (solid black)
No.5 (halftone)
No.7
No.8 S(f)
8-146
K116sm8e6
8. 8. 2. 6
Manual Type
It is possible to make the printer recognize the type of cut sheet paper you will use.
1. Indicate Manual Type on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (Plain in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting
now.
. Manua l
T y pe
Pl a i n
2. Pressing [
] key or [
. Manua l
] key, indicate the type of the cut sheet paper you will use.
T y pe
] or [
] Key
Pl a i n
. Manua l
T y pe
T r a c i ng

The indication stops flashing when decided.
8. 8. 2. 7
Manual Size
It is possible to make the printer recognize the size of cut sheet paper you will use.
1. Indicate Manual Size on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (11x17 in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting
now.
. Manua l
Si ze
11 x 17
2. Indicate the same size with the used cut sheet paper pressing [
. Manua l
Si ze
] or [
11 x 17
] Key
] key or [
] key.
. Manua l
Si ze
18 x 12

8-147
K116sm8e6
8. 8. 2. 8
Roll 1 Type
It is possible to make the printer recognize the type of roll paper in the Roll Deck 1.
1. Indicate Roll 1 Type on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key.
now.
. R o l l 1 T y pe
Pl a i n
2. Pressing [
] key or [
] key, indicate the type of the roll paper installed in the Roll 1.
. R o l l 1 T y pe
] or [
] Key
. R o l l 1 T y pe
Pl a i n
T r a c i ng

8. 8. 2. 9
Roll 1 Size
It is possible to make the printer recognize the size of roll paper in the Roll Deck 1.
1. Indicate either Roll 1 Size on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (36 in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting
now.
. Ro l l
1 Si ze
36
2. Indicate the same size with the roll paper in the Roll Deck 1 pressing [
. Ro l l
1 Si ze
] or [
36
] Key
] key or [
. Ro l l
] key.
1 Si ze
24

8-148
K116sm8e6
8. 8. 2.10 Roll 2 Type

It is possible to make the printer recognize the type of roll paper in the Roll Deck 2.
1. Indicate Roll 2 Type on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key.
now.
. R o l l 2 T y pe
Pl a i n
2. Pressing [
] key or [
] key, indicate the type of the roll paper installed in the Roll 2.
. R o l l 2 T y pe
] or [
] Key
. R o l l 2 T y pe
Pl a i n
T r a c i ng

8. 8. 2.11 Roll 2 Size

It is possible to make the printer recognize the size of roll paper in the Roll Deck 2.
1. Indicate either Roll 2 Size on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (36 in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting
now.
. Ro l l
2 Si ze
36
2. Indicate the same size with the roll paper in the Roll Deck 2 pressing [
. Ro l l
2 Si ze
] or [
36
] Key
] key or [
. Ro l l
] key.
2 Si ze
24

8-149
K116sm8e6
8. 8. 2.12 Mirror
It is possible to print a mirror image.
1. Indicate Mirror on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (OFF in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting
now.
. Mi r r o r
OFF
2. Switch between ON and OFF pressing [

. Mi r r o r
] key or [
] or [
] key.
] Key
. Mi r r o r
OFF
ON

8. 8. 2.13 Nega/Posi
It is possible to print a negative image.
1. Indicate Nega/Posi on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (Positive in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the
setting now.
. Nega / Pos i
Pos i t i v e
2. Switch between Positive and Negative pressing [

. Nega / Pos i
] or [
Pos i t i v e
] key or [
] Key
] key.
. Nega / Pos i
Nega t i v e

8-150
K116sm8e6
8. 8. 2.14 Scale
It is possible to print an image of scale on the printed paper for measuring purpose.
1. Indicate Scale on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key.
The setting value (OFF in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting
now.
. Sc a l e
OFF
2. Switch between ON and OFF pressing [

. Sc a l e
] key or [
] or [
OFF
] key.
] Key
. Sc a l e
ON

8-151
K116sm8e6
8. 9
8. 9. 1
Factory Adjustment Mode

( Factory Use Only )
Function
This mode is used mainly in the Factory to adjust several units before shipment.
The followings are available operations.
Sub Mode No.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
8. 9. 2
Available operation
Main Motor rotates for 3 minutes.
Drum rotates for 1 revolution.
Also the Image Corona takes discharging when the Drum is rotating.
Also the Transfer Corona takes discharging when the Drum is rotating.
Also the Separation Corona takes discharging when the Drum is rotating.
Main Motor rotates first, and then Bias is outputted for 3 minutes.
The machine makes the same operation with the normal printing.
Density Sensor will be tested to check its detecting function of solid white
/ black.
Density Sensor will be tested to check its standard output.
Density Sensor will check the
1. Indicate (8) Factory Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU]

key.
( 8 ) F ac t o r y Mode
2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Factory Adjustment Mode.
The LCD indicates Sub Mode Number, Sub Mode Name and the status.
Sub Mode No.
No00 Ma i n Mo t o r
Sub Mode Name
(- - - - - )
Status
3. Select the necessary Sub Mode pressing [ ] key or [ ] key.

(Example: You will make the Transfer Corona operate.)
No00 Ma i n Mo t o r
] or [
(- - - - - )
] Key
No02 T r Ou t pu t
(- - - - - )
8-152
K116sm8e6
4. Press the [ENTER] key, and the selected object starts operating.
Start is indicated when the selected object is operating.
Press the [ENTER] key again to stop the operation in the middle.
No02 T r Ou t pu t
[ENTER] Key
(- - - - - )
No02 T r Ou t pu t
(St a r t )
8-153
K116sm8e6
8.10
Clear Mode
8.10. 1
Function
It is possible to clear several kinds of information.

The following modes are available.
Name of mode
RAM Clear Mode
Error Clear Mode
Jam Record Clear Mode
Error Record Clear Mode
Software Counter Setting
Mode
Total Counter Setting
Mode
Density Compensation
Reset Mode
Contents
You can initialize all settings of Adjustment Mode and some
other initial information memorized in the RAM.
You can clear the error caused by the problem of Fuser Unit.
You can clear the record of jams memorized in the memory.
You can clear the record of errors memorized in the memory.
You can input the value of Software Counter.
You can input the value of Total Counter which is a kind of
Software Counter.
You can reset the counter of Bias 3 Count (Main Motor
operating time) and Developer / Regulation Bias to the
default.
NOTE
Record all the present data for the safety before you make RAM Clear.
8.10. 2
1. Indicate (9) Clear Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key.
( 9 ) C l ea r Mode
2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Clear Mode.
. RAM C l ea r
8-154
K116sm8e6
3. Select any subordinate mode pressing [ ] key or [ ] key.

Please read the later pages for the explanation about each mode.
. RAM C l ea r
. E r r o r C l ea r
E- 000
. J am I n f o C l ea r
C l ea r
. Er r o r
I n f o Cl r
C l ea r
. Pr i n t
Coun t
0001154
. To t a l
Coun t
0001720
C l ea r
03
8-155
K116sm8e6
8.10. 2. 1 RAM Clear Mode

You can initialize all setting values of Adjustment Mode and some other initial information
memorized in the RAM.
To make RAM Clear, press and hold the [ * ] Key, and then press the [ENTER] Key.
Initial state is indicated after the clearance.
Press any key after the RAM Clear, and you can cancel the Service Mode.
. RAM C l ea r
Press and hold the [ * ], and

then press the [ENTER].
Ini t ial
s t at e
8.10. 2. 2 Error Clear Mode

You can clear the error caused by the problem of Fuser Unit.
NOTE
The followings are possible errors caused by the problem of Fuser Unit.
E-000: Fuser Temperature Rising Error 1
E-001: Fuser Over Temperature Error
E-002: Fuser Temperature Rising Error 2
E-003: Fuser Low Temperature Error 1
E-004: Fuser Low Temperature Error 2
Once anyone of the above occurs, it is impossible to make copy, plot and scan unless
you clear it in the Error Clear Mode!
If the Fuser has any error, its error code is indicated in the LCD.
To make Error Clear, press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key.
No error code will be indicated after the Error Clear.
E- 000

NOTE
Before you make Error Clear, please wait until the Fuser is enough cooled down.
8-156
K116sm8e6
8.10. 2. 3 Jam History Clear Mode

You can clear the record of jams memorized in the memory.
Clear is indicated on the LCD before the clearance.
Press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key to clear the history of jams.
Clear disappears from the LCD after the clearance.

C l ea r
No jam code will be indicated in the No.22 (Jam Info) of the Information Mode.
8.10. 2. 4 Error History Clear Mode

You can clear the record of errors memorized in the memory.
Press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key to clear the history of errors.
Clear disappears from the LCD after the clearance.
. Er r o r
I n f o Cl r

. Er r o r
I n f o Cl r
C l ea r
No error code will be indicated in the No.23 (Error Info) of the Information Mode.
8-157
K116sm8e6
8.10. 2. 5 Software Counter Setting Mode

You can input the value of Software Counter.
NOTE
The KIP3100 has a Software Counter which was synchronized with the Hardware Counter.
These are displayed in the UI.
It is not necessary to change the value unless the PW10520 PCB is replaced or value lost to
reset. In this case set the value in this mode.
1. Indicate the Software Counter Setting Mode, and then press the [ENTER] Key.
The 1st digit of the counted value starts flashing and it becomes possible to change it.
. Pr i n t
Coun t
Press the [ENTER] Key.
0001154

. Pr i n t
Coun t
. Pr i n t
Coun t
0001154
] key or [
Press [
] key.
] or [
] Key.
0001154
. Pr i n t
Coun t
0001150
3. If you press the [ * ] Key, one more upper digit flashes.

Change the value in the same way.
. Pr i n t
Coun t
Press the [ * ] Key.
0001150
. Pr i n t
Coun t
0001150

8-158
K116sm8e6
8.10. 2. 6 Total Counter Setting Mode

You can input the value of Total Counter which is a kind of Software Counter.
NOTE
The counting unit of Total Counter is always linear meter.
Note that you can not change it.
1. Indicate the Total Counter Setting Mode, and then press the [ENTER] Key.
The 1st digit of the counted value starts flashing and it becomes possible to change it.
. To t a l
Coun t
Press the [ENTER] Key.
0001720

. To t a l
Coun t
0001720
. To t a l
Coun t
0001720
] key or [
Press [
] key.
] or [
] Key.
. To t a l
Coun t
0001723
3. If you press the [ * ] Key, one more upper digit flashes.

Change the value in the same way.
. To t a l
Coun t
0001723
Press the [ * ] Key.
. To t a l
Coun t
0001723

8-159
K116sm8e6
8.10. 2. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode

You can reset the current change based on Density Compensation (the counter of Density
Measure Interval, Developer / Regulation Bias Adjustment) to the default.
This reset function will be used at the time of replacing Developer Roller.
The 2 digits in the lower row show an applied Compensation Level.
Press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key to reset the above settings.
Clear and the digits (if shown) disappear from the LCD after the clearance.
C l ea r

03
8-160
K116sm8e6
8.11 User Mode

8.11. 1 Construction of the User Mode
The User Mode consists of following 5 sub modes.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Status Indication (Normal Mode)

Deck Information Mode
Setting Mode 1
Setting Mode 2
Command Mode
8.11. 2 Selecting each sub mode

1. Confirm that the machine is OFF.
Then turn on the machine while pressing the [MENU] Key.
You can unlock the key operation of Sub UI by this operation, so it becomes possible to select
each sub mode of the User Mode.
NOTE
It is impossible to select the sub mode if the key operation is locked.
2. Select each sub mode pressing the [MENU] key.

The name of selected sub mode is indicated on the LCD.
Status Indication (Normal Mode)
P r i n t e r Ready
R1 : 36
Press [MENU] key
Press [MENU] key

Deck Information Mode
( 1 ) Dec k
Command Mode
Inf o
( 4 ) Command
Press [MENU] key
Press [MENU] key

Setting Mode 1
Setting Mode 2
( 2 ) Se t t i ng Mode1
Press [MENU] key
8-161
K116sm8e6
8.11. 3 Status Indication (Normal Mode)

Normally the LCD indicates the status of printer.
The following list shows the possible indication and the status of printer.
LCD Indication
Status of printer
Printer is in warming up.
Wa r mi n g u p
R1 : 3 6
Printer is ready for printing.

P r i n t e r Ready
R1 : 36
Printer is now on printing.

Now P r i n t i n g
R1 : 36
Printing is stopped in the middle.

Pr i n t
S t o ppe d
R1 : 3 6
Printer is stopped by some abnormal condition.

Pr i n t e r S t op
R1 : 36
Printer is in the Warm Sleep.

War m S l eep
R1 : 36
Printer is in the Cold Sleep.
8-162
K116sm8e6
8.11. 4 Deck Information Mode

8.11. 4. 1 Function
It is possible to indicate the information about the roll paper (size, type and remaining level).

1. Indicate (1) Deck Info on the LCD pressing the [MENU] Key.
( 1 ) Dec k
Inf o
2. Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Deck Information Mode.
( 1 ) Dec k
Info
[ENTER] Key
Ro l l 1 S i z e
36
3. If you press [ ] and [ ] Keys, you can indicate either Roll 1 Size or Roll 2 Size on the
LCD.
You check the information about the Roll1 when Roll 1 Size is indicated, and you can check
that of Roll 2 when Roll 2 Size is indicated.
So select either Roll Deck of which information you will check.
Ro l l 1 S i z e
36
] and [
Roll 1 information
] Keys
Ro l l 2 S i z e
36
Roll 2 information
NOTE
You can indicate Roll 2 Size only when the machine is equipped with the Roll Deck 2.
8-163
K116sm8e6
4. After selecting the Roll Deck, press the [ * ] key several times to indicate the information about
the selected Roll Deck.
The LCD indicates Size (Width), Type and Remain (Remaining level of roll) orderly
whenever you press the [ * ] Key.
Ro l l 1 S i z e
36
Press [ * ] key
Ro l l 1 T y p e
Plai n
Press [ * ] key
Ro l l 1 Rema i n
75%
Press [ * ] key
Reference
(1) Each indication in Roll Remain means as follows.
100%
From 100 to 75%
75%
From 75 to 50%
50%
From 50 to 10%
10%
Smaller than 10%
(2) The following messages are also indicated according to the situation.
Machine is checking the paper.
Selected roll paper is empty.
Ro l l 1
Ro l l 1
Pape r Chec k
Paper
8-164
Emp t y
K116sm8e6

8.11. 5. 1 Function
This is a setting mode to make the machine recognize the size and the type of roll paper.

(1) Roll type setting
1. Indicate (2) Setting Mode 1 on the LCD pressing the
[MENU] Key.
2. Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Setting Mode 1.

The LCD initially indicates Roll 1 Type.
[ENTER] Key
Ro l l 1 T y p e
Pl ai n
3. There are 2 setting items Roll Type and Roll Size in the Setting Mode, which you can
specify for each Roll Deck 1 and 2 respectively.
To specify the type of roll paper, indicate either Roll 1 Type or Roll 2 Type pressing the
[
] key and [
] key.
Ro l l 1 T y p e
Pl ai n
Ro l l 1 S i z e
36
] key and [
] key
Ro l l 2 T y p e
Pl ai n
Ro l l 2 S i z e
36
8-165
K116sm8e6
4. Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the paper type.
The paper type indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing, which means now you can change the
setting.
[ENTER] Key
Ro l l 1 T y p e
Pl ai n
5. Pressing the [
] and [
concerning Roll Deck.
Ro l l 1 T y p e
Pl ai n
] Keys, select the type of the roll paper installed on the
Ro l l 1 T y p e
] and [
] Keys
Pl ai n
Ro l l 1 Ty p e
T r ac i ng
NOTE
1 is indicated after the paper type if you press the [ * ] Key
at this time.
It means the special paper.
(Tracing 1 in this example means Tracing paper of
special paper.)
Ro l l 1 Ty p e
T r ac i ng 1
6. Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the setting.

The selected setting (Tracing in this example) stops flashing when decided.
Ro l l 1 Ty p e
[ENTER] Key
T r ac i ng
Ro l l 1 Ty p e
T r ac i ng
8-166
K116sm8e6
(2) Size setting

1. Indicate (2) Setting Mode 1 on the LCD pressing the
[MENU] Key.

The LCD initially indicates Roll 1 Type.
[ENTER] Key
Ro l l 1 T y p e
Pl ai n
3. There are 2 setting items Roll Type and Roll Size in the Setting Mode, which you can
specify for each Roll Deck 1 and 2 respectively.
To specify the size of roll paper, indicate either Roll 1 Size or Roll 2 Size pressing the
[
] key and [
] key.
Ro l l 1 T y p e
Pl ai n
Ro l l 1 S i z e
36
] key and [
] key
Ro l l 2 T y p e
Pl ai n
Ro l l 2 S i z e
36
4. Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the size setting.
The size indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing, which means now you can change the setting.
Ro l l 2 S i z e
[ENTER] Key
36
Ro l l 2 S i z e
36
8-167
K116sm8e6
5. Pressing the [
Roll Deck.
] and [
] Keys, select the size of the roll paper installed on the concerning
Ro l l 2 S i z e
] and [
] Keys
36
Ro l l 2 S i z e
24
6. Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the setting.

The selected setting (24 in this example) stops flashing when decided.
Ro l l 2 S i z e
[ENTER] Key
24
Ro l l 2 S i z e
24
8-168
K116sm8e6

8.11. 6. 1 Function
It is possible to validate several power saving functions or to change its timer setting.
Also it is possible to validate several functions related with image process.

(1) Selection of each Sub Mode
1. Press the [MENU] key to indicate (3) Setting Mode 2.

The LCD initially indicates Warm Sleep.
. Wa r m S l eep
OFF
8-169
K116sm8e6
3. As there are 10 Sub Modes in the Setting Mode 2, select the necessary one pressing the
[ ] and [ ] Key.
. Wa r m S l eep
] and [
] Keys
OFF
.Wa rm S l eep T i me
OFF
10mi n
. Fu l l
. Co l d S l eep
I mage Mode
OFF
OFF
. Co l d S l eep T i me
. Enhanc e
10mi n
OFF
. Au t o Powe r O f f
. Smoo t h i ng
OFF
. Powe r Of f
L ow Temp Mo d e
OFF
. TR As s i s t L ED
T i me
OFF
10mi n
8-170
K116sm8e6
(2) ON / OFF setting of Warm Sleep Mode

It is possible to validate the Warm Sleep Mode which is a kind of power saving function.
(You can set the timer of the Warm Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode. Refer to [(3) Timer setting
of Warm Sleep Mode] on the page 8-172.)
Reference
The purpose of Warm Sleep Mode is to reduce the power consumption by falling down the
temperature of heater some degrees.
The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3100
is ready.
But if no print job or copy job is sent for a long time, it is better for saving the power to fall
down the temperature of heater.
(Temperature is kept about 100 degrees Centigrade.)
The Warm Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy
job from the outer device.
However, please understand it takes some minutes to recover from the Warm Sleep Mode
because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 - 170 degrees
Centigrade. (Print starts when the KIP 3100 gets ready.)
1. Select Warm Sleep in the Setting Mode 2.

(Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169
how to select it.)
. Wa r m S l eep
OFF
2. Switch between ON and OFF pressing the [ENTER] Key.

The Warm Sleep Mode will work if you select ON.
. Wa r m S l eep
[ENTER] Key
OFF
. Wa r m S l eep
ON
8-171
K116sm8e6
(3) Timer setting of Warm Sleep Mode

It is possible to set a timer of the Warm Sleep Mode.
If the KIP3100 receives no job for the time you have specified here, the Warm Sleep Mode works.
(It is necessary to validate the Warm Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode if you would like to work it.
Refer to [(2) ON / OFF setting of Warm Sleep Mode] on the page 8-173.)
Reference
The purpose of Warm Sleep Mode is to reduce the power consumption by falling down the
temperature of heater some degrees.
The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3100
is ready.
But if no print job or copy job is sent for a long time, it is better for saving the power to fall
down the temperature of heater. (Temperature is kept about 100 degrees Centigrade.)
The Warm Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy
However, please understand it takes some minutes to recover from the Warm Sleep Mode
because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 - 170 degrees
1. Select Warm Sleep Time in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
10mi n
2. Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the timer setting.
The value indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing, which means now you can change the
setting.
[ENTER] Key
10mi n
10mi n
3. Change the timer value pressing the [ ] and [ ] Keys.

The setting range is from 10 minutes to 4 hours.
10mi n
] and [
] Keys
50mi n
4. Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the timer setting.

The timer value stops flashing when decided.
50mi n
[ENTER] Key
8-172
50mi n
K116sm8e6
(4) ON / OFF setting of Cold Sleep Mode

It is possible to validate the Cold Sleep Mode which is a kind of power saving function.
(You can set the timer of the Cold Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode. Refer to [(5) Timer setting of
Cold Sleep Mode] on the page 8-174.)
Reference
The purpose of Cold Sleep Mode is not to consume as much power as possible by shutting
off supplying the power to the heater unit.
It can save more power than Warm Sleep Mode.
The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 - 170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3100
is ready.
But if the KIP3100 does not receive any print job or copy job for a long time, it is the best way
for saving the power to stop supplying the power to the heater unit completely.
The Cold Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy
However, please understand it takes a little long time to recover from the Cold Sleep Mode
because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 -170 degrees
1. Select Cold Sleep in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
. Co l d S l eep
OFF

The Cold Sleep Mode will work if you select ON.
. Co l d S l eep
[ENTER] Key
OFF
. Co l d S l eep
ON
8-173
K116sm8e6
(5) Timer setting of Cold Sleep Mode

It is possible to set a timer of the Cold Sleep Mode.
If the KIP3100 receives no job for the time you have specified here, the Cold Sleep Mode works.
(It is necessary to validate the Cold Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode if you would like to work it.
Refer to [(4) ON / OFF setting of Cold Sleep Mode] on the page 8-173.)
Reference
The purpose of Cold Sleep Mode is not to consume as much power as possible by shutting
off supplying the power to the heater unit.
It can save more power than Warm Sleep Mode.
The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 - 170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3100
is ready.
But if the KIP3100 does not receive any print job or copy job for a long time, it is the best way
for saving the power to stop supplying the power to the heater unit completely.
The Cold Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy
However, please understand it takes a little long time to recover from the Cold Sleep Mode
because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 -170 degrees
1. Select Cold Sleep Time in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
10mi n
setting.
[ENTER] Key
10mi n
10mi n

] and [
] Keys
10mi n
50mi n

50mi n
[ENTER] Key
8-174
50mi n
K116sm8e6
(6) ON / OFF setting of Auto Power OFF

It is possible to validate the Auto Power OFF which is a kind of power saving function.
(You can set the timer of the Auto Power OFF in another Sub Mode. Refer to [(7) Timer setting of
Auto Power OFF] on the page 8-176.)
Reference
The Auto Power OFF is the function to switch off the KIP3100 automatically if no print job or
copy job is sent for the time you have specified in advance (timer).
If the KIP3100 is turned off by the Auto Power OFF, the operator needs to turn it on again
pressing the Power Switch. (It is impossible to turn it on automatically.)
1. Select Auto Power Off in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
OFF

The Auto Power OFF will work if you select ON.
OFF
[ENTER] Key
8-175
ON
K116sm8e6
(7) Timer setting of Auto Power OFF

It is possible to set a timer of the Auto Power OFF.
If the KIP3100 receives no job for the time you have specified here, the Auto Power OFF works.
(It is necessary to validate the Auto Power OFF in another Sub Mode if you would like to work it.
Refer to [(6) ON / OFF setting of Auto Power OFF] on the page 8-175.)
Reference
The Auto Power OFF is the function to switch off the KIP 3100 automatically if no print job or
copy job is sent for the time you have specified in advance (timer).
If the KIP3100 is turned off by the Auto Power OFF the operator needs to turn it on again
pressing the Power Switch. (It is impossible to turn it on automatically.)
1. Select Power Off Time in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
. Powe r Of f
T i me
10mi n
setting.
. Powe r Of f
T i me
[ENTER] Key
10mi n
. Powe r Of f
T i me
10mi n

. Powe r Of f
T i me
10mi n
] and [
] Keys
. Powe r Of f
T i me
50mi n

. Powe r Of f
T i me
[ENTER] Key
50mi n
. Powe r Of f
T i me
50mi n
8-176
K116sm8e6
(8) Transfer Assist setting

To print the image clearer, it is possible to make the Transfer Assist LED (Separation Lamp) work.
Reference
There may be the case that the print image looks so light (not so clear) although the density
setting is proper or higher than required.
This kind of problem may occur when the used printing paper is special, because it is difficult
to transfer the toner image fully onto it.
The Transfer Assist LED (Separation Lamp) is the solution for this kind of problem as it helps
to transfer the toner image.
Try to make it work if you feel the print image is so light.
Transfer Assist LED is OFF.

(Image looks not so clear.)
Transfer Assist LED is ON.

(Image looks clear with enough density.)
NOTE
You can specify to which type of paper the Transfer Assist LED (Separation Lamp) should
work.
It can be specified in the Service Mode.
Refer to [8. 5. 4.38 Operation of Separation Lamp (No.067)] on the page 8-63.
1. Select TR Assist LED in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
OFF

The Transfer Assist LED will work if you select ON.
[ENTER] Key
OFF
ON
8-177
K116sm8e6
(9) Smoothing setting

It is possible to validate the Smoothing function which makes a diagonal line look clearer.
Reference
A diagonal line tends to look weaker than vertical one or horizontal one.
The Smoothing function emphasizes the diagonal one so that it becomes as clear as vertical
and horizontal ones.
Smoothing function is OFF.

(Diagonal line looks so weak.)
Smoothing function is ON.

(Diagonal line looks clear.)
1. Select Smoothing in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
. Smoo t h i ng
OFF

The Smoothing function is validated if you select ON.
. Smoo t h i ng
[ENTER] Key
OFF
. Smoo t h i ng
ON
8-178
K116sm8e6
(10) Dot Enhancement ON/OFF setting

It is possible to validate the Dot Enhancement function which makes an isolated dot look clearer.
Reference
An isolated dot image tends to look so weak.
The Dot Enhancement function emphasizes the isolated dot so that it looks clear.
(Dot Enhancement function emphasizes only the isolated dot. It will not emphasize the dots
coming together some degree.)
Dot Enhancement function is OFF.

(Diagonal line looks so weak.)
Dot Enhancement function is ON.

(Diagonal line looks clear.)
NOTE
The Dot Enhancement function is validated if you select ON in the User Mode.
At this time the Level (degree) of Dot Enhancement Function relies on the setting in the
Service Mode.
Refer to [8. 5. 4.25 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No.052)] on the page 8-57 for this
setting.
1. Select Enhance in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
. Enhanc e
OFF

The Dot Enhancement function is validated if you select ON.
. Enhanc e
[ENTER] Key
OFF
. Enhanc e
ON
8-179
K116sm8e6
(11) Full Image Mode setting

Full Image Mode can be validated, which makes it possible to print the image in the trailing margin
area.
Reference
Usually each print is compulsively provided with a trailing margin of 3mm long regardless of
the image size.
But the image can be printed even in the trailing margin area if you validate the Full Image
Mode.
Full Image Mode is OFF.
(Print is provided with trailing margin.)
Full Image Mode is OFF.

(No trailing margin is provided.)
NOTE
The interval between each sheet of print becomes longer than usual if you validate the Full
Image Mode, because it requires a cleaning operation between each sheet.
1. Select Full Image Mode in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
. Fu l l
I mage Mode
OFF

The Full Image Mode is validated if you select ON.
. Fu l l
I mage Mode
[ENTER] Key
OFF
. Fu l l
I mage Mode
ON
8-180
K116sm8e6
(12) Low Temperature Mode setting

Low Temperature Mode can be validated to secure the fusing quality in the cold environment.
Reference
The toner image may not be fixed firmly onto the paper if you make a copy or plot right after
turning on the machine (in the morning especially) in very cold environment.
But it is possible to avoid this kind of fusing problem by the Low Temperature Mode.
It works as follows.
1. If both the center and sides of the Fuser Roller are colder than 30 degrees centigrade
when you turn on the machine (or when you cancel the Sleep Mode), the Low
Temperature Mode is validated.
2. The Fuser Roller is heated up to 10 degrees higher than the setting temperature.
(If the setting temperature is 170 degrees, it is heated up to 180 degrees.)
3. The machine does not get ready even if the Fuser Roller is heated up to 10 degrees
higher than the setting temperature.
Instead of that the Fuser Roller continues rotating for 360 seconds.
(Setting temperature plus 10 degrees is kept during this period.)
4. When 360 seconds has passed, the machine gets ready.
1. Select Low Temp Mode in the Setting Mode 2.

how to select it.)
L ow Temp Mo d e
OFF

The Full Image Mode is validated if you select ON.
.
L ow Temp Mo d e
[ENTER] Key
OFF
L ow Temp Mo d e
ON
8-181
K116sm8e6
8.11. 7 Command Mode

8.11. 7. 1 Function
This is a mode to make Initial Cut for the roll media.
Reference
The leading edge of the new roll media may be rough or folded.
To straighten the leading edge easily, the KIP 3100 has a convenient function called Initial
Cut.
If you select one roll media and make the Initial Cut, the leading part (210mm from the
leading edge) of roll media is cut off.
The leading edge of that roll media is straight after the Initial Cut.

1. Press the [MENU] key to indicate (4) Command.
( 4 ) Command
2. Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Command Mode.

The LCD indicates Initial Cut.
. Ini t i al
Ro l l
8-182
Cu t
1 ( Ready )
K116sm8e6
3. Pressing the [ * ] Key, select either Roll 1 or Roll 2 to which you will make Initial Cut.
. Ini t i al
Ro l l
Cu t
[ * ] Key
1 ( Ready )
. Ini t i al
Ro l l
Cu t
2 ( Ready )
4. Press the [ENTER] Key to make Initial Cut.

The LCD indicates (Start) during the Initial Cut.
. Ini t i al
Ro l l
Cu t
[ENTER] Key
1 ( Ready )
. Ini t i al
Ro l l
Cu t
1 (St a r t )
NOTE
The LCD indicates (- - - - -) is it is impossible to make
Initial Cut by some reason like an error of machine.
. Ini t i al
Ro l l
8-183
Cu t
2 (- - - - - )
K116sm8e6
8. 12
KIP Scanner Utility
NOTE
Below are the system requirements to operate KIP Scanner Utility.
Windows 2000 / XP operating system
USB 2.0 support

1. Loosen 4 screws (1), remove 4 screws (2)
2. Disconnect the USB Cable (4), and connect it to the USB Terminal to your service PC.
8-184
K116sm8e7
3. Turn on both your PC and the KIP 3100.

[Found New Hardware Wizard] for KIP K116 starts automatically.
If the following message appears, select your driver update option and click [Next].
4. Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive.

5. Choose Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]. Click [Next].
8-185
K116sm8e7
6. Click [Continue Anyway] when the following message is indicated.
7. Click [Finish] to close [Found New Hardware Wizard].
8. Open Device Manager, and confirm that KIP K116 is operating properly.
8-186
K116sm8e7

1. Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive
Locate and run SETUP.EXE for KIP Scanner Utility.
2. The Setup program starts. Click [Next].
3. The destination of the software can be changed. Click [Next].
8-187
K116sm8e7
4. The name of the program folder can be changed. Click [Next].
5. The following message is indicated when all files have been copied. Click [Finish].
8-188
K116sm8e7
8. 12. 2 Starting KIP Scanner Utility

Start KIP Scanner Utility by; Start _Program _ ScannerUtility _ ScannerUtility
(KIP Scanner Utilitys initial screen)
NOTE
To use the entire adjustment menu, follow the
instruction below.
(A command line option switch to be set.)
(1) Open the properties panel for KIP Scanner
Utility shortcut.
(2) Add the following text to the end of the target path.
8-189
K116sm8e7
8. 12. 3 Displaying Scanner Information

It is possible to display the scanner information in the following way.
1. Select [Information] under [Scanner].
2. KIP Scanner Utility acquires the scanner information and displays it.
8-190
K116sm8e7
8. 12. 4 Scanner Adjustment

It is possible to make the following scanner adjustment with KIP Scanner Utility.
Shading (calibration)
Feed Distance (1:1)
Position (stitching)
These adjustments are very important because they are greatly related with the image quality.
8. 12. 4. 1 Shading (calibration)

[Purpose of Shading (calibration)]
There are 2 main purposes for Shading (white balance/ color calibration). And once performed
Shading, white balance / color calibration will be done at the same time.
1. White Balance Calibration
The pixels on the CIS are not same but they have their own characteristic.
This may be a problem because the inputs (density) from those pixels are uneven although they
read the same image (density).
But the Shading compensates the input from each pixel properly to remove the unevenness
among the pixels.
As a result the even level of input can be expected from every pixel after Shading.
Original (even density)
Dark
Dark
Light
Light
Before Shading
(Uneven inputs)
After Shading
(Even inputs)
2. Color Calibration
The pixels on the CIS will be calibrated in the default color reading for R/G/B by using input
gaps between black and white on Shading Sheet.
Shading Sheet
White Area
Black Area
This compensates the input (color density) from each pixel properly among the pixels. As a
result, color evenness and accuracy can be expected.
[Necessary situation]
Shading is required when;
Machine installation
After replacing;
(1) CIS
(2) CIS Controller Board
(3) Data Controller Board
8-191
K116sm8e8
NOTE
(1) Shading adjustment should be performed with Shading Sheet (P/N: Z168300570).
1 sheet of Shading Sheet is included in the KIP 3100 accessary. Keep it in safe custody.
(2) Shading adjustment should be performed with KIP Scanner Utility 1.12 (or later).
[Operation]
2. Start KIP Scanner Utility.
3. Select [Calibration] under [Adjust].
4. At first it is required to calibrate all pixels.

Select [All] and then click [Execute].
You will be asked to set Shading Sheet.
8-192
K116sm8e8
5. Set Shading Sheet in the KIP 3100 accessory to the scanner noting the arrow direction.
NOTE
Handle Shading Sheet with great care. Keep it in safe custody for avoiding dirt, fold or tear.
6. Click [OK] after setting Shading Sheet, and the scanner reads it.
NOTE
White Balance / Color calibration will be performed at the same time with Shading Sheet.
It takes 10 minutes or more to complete.
7. When finished scanning, click [OK].
Reload Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [Confirm] to check the result of Shading.
8-193
K116sm8e8
8. The scan image of Shading Sheet is displayed.
Scan image of Shading Sheet

9. Scrolling the image horizontally, check whether the density is even or not.
If the density is even at every place, finish Shading clicking [Close].
There may be some place of which density is different from others as the following image.
As this pixel is defective, it is necessary to calibrate it individually in the next step.
Defective pixel
8-194
K116sm8e8
NOTE
Sometimes the density may be different between left and right as the following image.
This is not a problem but it is just the border of image blocks.
10. If you will calibrate an individual pixel, select [Specified part].
11. Move the pointer onto the scan image, and you will find a kind of red cursor.
red cross cursor
defective pixel
8-195
K116sm8e8
12. Move the red cursor so that its vertical line matches the defective pixel and click it.
The defective pixel is selected by this operation.
If there are some more defective pixels, select them in the same way.
Match the vertical line to a defective pixel.

13. Click [Execute], and the selected defective pixel is compensated individually.
14. You will be asked to set the original again.

Set Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [OK].
Check the result of Shading again.
When finished, click [Close].
15. Shading (white balance / color calibration) is completed.
8-196
K116sm8e8
8. 12. 4. 2 Feed Distance (1:1)

[Purpose of Feed Distance (1:1)]
The lengths between actual original image and scan image may become different each other if you
replace the Feed Roller of the Scanner Unit.
This is caused by the mechanical play that each Feed Roller has.
Actual original image
Scan image
Feed Distance is the solution for this phenomenon.

It compares the actual original image and the scan image to know how much their lengths are
different.
Then Feed Distance calculates the best compensation (motor speed) automatically so that both
images should become as long as each other.
Feed Distance is required when;
After replacing;
(1) Drive Roller 1
(2) Drive Roller 2
Also you need to check whether the Feed Distance is proper after replacing the following parts.
(Please record the current setting value before the replacement and input the same value after the
replacement.)
(1) CIS
NOTE
Feeding Distance adjustment should be performed
with Scanner Adjustment Chart (P/N: Z058501590).
8-197
K116sm8e9
[Operation]
1. Measure the actual distance between a point and c point on the far left area of Scanner
Adjustment Chart, and between b point and d point on the far right area.
Lets suppose that each distance is as follows.
Between a point and c point (800) is 799.7mm
Between b point and d point (800) is 799.8mm
Scanner Adjustment Chart

a
d 800
c 800
c 800
c 1000
d 1000
c 1100
c 1150
d 1100
d 1150
Measure between these 2 points.
d 800
NOTE
There are some number of c point X and d point X on the chart.
You can select any one, but better adjustment can be expected if you measure a longer
distance.
8-198
K116sm8e9
4. Select [Adjust Feed Distance] from [Adjust]. Adjust Feed Distance Dialog is indicated.
NOTE
(1) If [Automatic Adjustment] does not appear, follow the instruction below.
a) Open the properties panel for a KIP Scanner
Utility shortcut.
b) Add the following text to the end of the target path.
(2) Write down the current setting value

that will be displayed with [Current
Value].
8-199
K116sm8e9
5. At first, input the actual distance between a point and c point in [Actual Distance],
which you have measured at the former step 1.
Actual distance between a and b

6. Set Scanner Adjustment Chart to the scanner unit, and then click [Scan].
7. A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated.

Simply click [Scan] to scan the chart. (You do not have to change any setting this time.)
8-200
K116sm8e9
8. The scan image of Scanner Adjustment Chart is indicated in the screen of KIP Scanner Utility.
Scan image of the chart
Reference
You can enlarge the scan image by dragging with the right button of mouse.
Press the F2 Key when you would like to go back to the reduced image.
9. Indicate the enlarged image of a point on the screen, which was the measuring point at the
former step 1.
8-201
K116sm8e9
10. Click the input window of [Theoretical Distance].

A red cursor appears on the screen.
11. Click the mouse once at the measuring point.
Click on the measuring point a.
8-202
K116sm8e9
12. Similarly indicate the enlarged image of c point and click the mouse at the measuring point.
Click on the measuring point c.

13. Some value is indicated in [Theoretical Distance] according to 2 measuring points you
specified at both steps 9 and 10.
This value means the distance between a point and b point of the resulting scan image.
14. Click [Calculate].

The program automatically calculates the best compensation value considering the difference
of Actual Distance and Theoretical Distance.
The calculated compensation value (motor speed) is indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value].
8-203
K116sm8e9
15. Click [Set], and the calculated Feed Adjustment Value is validated.
16. It is necessary to check the balance of original feeding between left and right after validating
the new setting.
(Left side means a-c points side, and right side means b-d points side.)
Repeat the former steps from 3 to 12 also for the right side (between b point and d point),
and compare the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left (a-c points) and right
(b-d points).
You do not have to do anymore thing if the difference between left and right is within 0.2%.
(within 0.2% means the difference of indicated values is within +/-20.)
Please click [Close] without clicking [Set].
17. If the difference of the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left and right is larger than
0.2%, do as follows.
a) Measure the actual distance between the center of a-b points and that of c-d points on the chart.
Center of a-b points
c 800
Center of c-d points
d 800
c 1000
d 1000
c 1100
c 1150
d 1100
d 1150

b) Repeat the former steps from 3 to 12 for the center area.
c) Click [Set] to validate the Value indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value].
8-204
K116sm8e9
8. 12. 4. 3 Position (stitching)

[Purpose of Position (stitching)]
The scanner part of KIP 3100 reads the image of original with 5 - CIS (Contact Image Sensor).
As these CIS are arranged in 2 rows, there occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks.
Also the reading area of these 5 pieces of CIS overlaps each other some degree. As a result there
occurs the duplication of image between neighboring Image Block (same image is commonly
included in the neighboring two Image Blocks).
Gap of CIS position

Overlaps of reading area
Vertical gap of image

Duplications of image
Position is the solution for these kinds of phenomenon.
It is possible remove the vertical gap of image by vertical positioning process (Y offset).
And it is also possible to remove the duplication of image by horizontal positioning process
(X overlap).
Position is required when;
After replacing;
(1) CIS
NOTE
(1) Position adjustment should be performed with Stitch Adjustment Chart (P/N: Z168300580).
(2) Position adjustment should be performed with KIP Scanner Utility 1.12 (or later).
8-205
K116sm8e9
[Operation]
3. Select [Automatic Adjustment] from [Adjust]. Scanner Adjustment Dialog is indicated.
NOTE
If [Automatic Adjustment] does not appear, follow the instruction below.
a) Open the properties panel for KIP Scanner
Utility shortcut.
b) Add the following text to the end of the target path.
8-206
K116sm8e9
4. Set Stitch Adjustment Chart to the scanner noting the set direction and press [OK].
Stitch Adjustment Chart
NOTE
An incorrect feeding of Stitch Adjustment Chart may result
in an error. Position Stitch Adjustment Chart with the center
of Original Table and avoid skewing.
5. After completing the scan, the following window will be displayed. Press [Close].
6. Position adjustment for the border of the image blocks is completed.

Continue to the next step for Position adjustment for the leading edge of scan images.
NOTE
Position adjustment for the leading edge is always required after Automatic Adjustment.
8-207
K116sm8e9
7. Select [Adjust Position] from [Adjust]. Adjust Position Dialog is indicated.
8. Set Stitch Adjustment Chart to the scanner again and press [Scan].
8-208
K116sm8e9
9. A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated.

Simply click [Scan] to scan the chart. (You do not have to change any setting this time.)
10. The scan image of Scanner Adjustment Chart is indicated in the screen of KIP Scanner Utility.
Scan image of the chart
8-209
K116sm8e9
11. Enlarge the top center area by right dragging.
Reference
There is a gap between the leading edge of the scan image and the leading edge of the
chart at this time. This band area will be removed after the completion of Position adjustment
for the leading edge.
Leading edge
of image
gap (band)
Leading edge
of chart
8-210
K116sm8e9
12. Click Origin entry field. A red cross cursor appears on the scan image.
8-211
K116sm8e9
13. Click once on the top center of the chart in the scan image.
A value appears in the field.
Top center
NOTE
If you make unintended clicks on the image, delete the value to empty the field and retry the
operation.
8-212
K116sm8e9
14. Press [Check] then [Set].
15. A dialog appears to prompt confirmation of the result. Press [OK].
8-213
K116sm8e9
16. Start Adjust Position again. Make a rescan of Stitch Adjustment Chart.
Confirm the result of the adjustment. If the gap disappears, Position adjustment for the leading
edge is completed.
No gap (band area)
NOTE
If the rescan image still has a gap, go back to step 11 to remove it completely.
gap (band)
17. The entire Position adjustment is completed.
8-214
K116sm8e9
8. 12. 5 Updating Scanner Firmware

It is possible to install a new Firmware to the KIP 3100 with KIP Scanner Utility.
1. Select [Update Firmware] under [Scanner].
2. Firmware Download Utility is displayed.

Click [Browse].
8-215
K116sm8e9
3. Select the Firmware component on the hard drive (or another drive). Click [Open].
NOTE
(1) A firmware file for KIP 3100 scanner unit should be named k116_***.x.
(2) Do not send any other file.
Doing so may result in malfunction of the scanner.
4. Confirm that the file name you will install is displayed.
Click [Start].
(The name of the firmware file or the CRC value may vary as the picture below is an example)
name of firmware file

5. A dialog is displayed, which request you to turn off the KIP 3100.
Turn off the machine.
6. Click [Exit] finally.
8-216
K116sm8e9
8. 13
Firmware Update (PW11620)
Data Controller Board Assy (PW11620) contains a flash type memory to store the firmware for
Engine Unit.
It is possible to send and apply a new firmware by using an exclusive tool with a Windows PC.
Before operation, please turn off KIP 3100.
1. Pull up Lever 2 (1) to open Engine Unit.
1
8-217
K116sm8eA
5. Connect RS Signal Cable to the connector (6) on PW11620 PCB (7).
6. Connect the other end of RS Signal Cable (8) to any available COM port on your PC.
8-218
K116sm8eA
7. Set DIP switch No.2 (9: DSW3, right) to ON.
switch 1: ON
switch 2: OFF
switch 1: ON
switch 2: ON
Default
Download mode
NOTE
Before switching, be sure to turn off KIP 3100.
8. Run WriteFlash.exe.
Flash Writing Tool screen is displayed.
8-219
K116sm8eA
9. Choose 2398F in CPU TYPE drop-down box.
10. Select 38400 in bps drop-down box.
11. Select a COM port to be used for the communication in COM drop-down box.
8-220
K116sm8eA
12. Press [FILE] to locate a firmware file and open it.

Program Size and Checksum will be displayed.
13. Turn on KIP 3100.

14. Press [DOWNLOAD] to start the process.
(program size / checksum may differ from the actual firmware information)
8-221
K116sm8eA
15. When Writing success dialog is displayed, press [OK].
NOTE
(1) Update may be failed if any of the following messages appear.
Take necessary measures and retry the operation.
Message
Cause
COM Port
Open Error
Selected port is being used by an application
Reception
Error
Selected port does not exist

RS Signal Cable is not connected to
selected port
Selected port does not support a given
communication speed
RS Signal Cable failure
Measure
Stop the application.
Use any unoccupied port.
Select the port been connecting.
Select lower speed.
Replace the cable.
(2) If an unexpected communication failure occurs during the process, the writing process
will end abnormally.
Retry the operation to overwrite the previous file. See step 8 and later.
16. Turn off KIP 3100.

17. Set DIP switch No.2 (9: DSW3, right) to OFF.
switch 1: ON
switch 2: ON
switch 1: ON
switch 2: OFF
9
Download mode
Default
18. Remove RS Signal Cable.

Return Cover 10, Cover 2 and Cover 3 in the original position.
8-222
K116sm8eA

Kip 3100 S M PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kip 3100 S M PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kip 3100 S M PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

Installation requirements, method of

Chapter 3 Print / Scan Process

Explanation for the steps of the print and

Circuit diagrams, image process system,

Parts replacement and mechanical

Field maintenance information

Chapter 8 Service Mode and Utility Software

Service Mode settings, Diagnosis and etc.

All sections of the document are subject to change without notice.

1. 3 Specifications for Originals

Specifications for the Scan Original

1. 6 Specifications for the Printing Paper

1,500W (Including Scanner & IPS)

Shorter than 4 minutes 30 seconds

Specifications for Originals

The width of original must range from 8.5 to 36 or 210mm to 914.4mm.

Do Not Scan Originals

Metal originals (The Scan Glass may damage)

Emergent Stop Button

Engine Unit Open Lever

Dehumidify Heater Switch

Specifications for the Scan Original

A scan original must satisfy the following specifications.

Folded (Leading edge)

Specifications for the Printing Paper

Proper Care of Printing Paper

Follow these steps in taking care of your printing paper.

Do not expose the paper to the direct sunlight.

Treatment against environmental condition

Shown below are necessary treatments according to the environmental conditions.

Void of image occurs when you print

Void of image occurs when you print

If the media is humidified ;

If the media is humidified ;

Leveling the KIP 3100

Setup of the Roll Deck

Setup of the Machine

Turning on the KIP 3100

2. 8 Initializing the KIP 3100 Scanner Unit

60cm/24 or larger when

Please note that and Software Box will be

OPEN THIS BOX FIRST.

3. Remove the inner cardboard cases (5).

8. Put aside the Power Cord (18) which is on the

Drum Box ( empty )

Original Guide 1 & 2

Starting Toner (500g)

Toner Cartridge (300g)

(2 for 1 Roll / 4 for 2 Rolls)

4x8 Tooth Washer Screws

3x8 Bind Screws

Hardcopy of Users Manual

(Europe/Asia model only)

Leveling the KIP 3100

1. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine.

2. Remove the screws (2) at both sides.

3. Remove 4 screws (3) at the bottom of both sides.

6. Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6).